THE NORTH FACE / JANSPORT
399-401 LAFAYETTE STREET, 8TH FLOOR
NEW YORK, NEW YORK
SPECIFICATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION
MAY 3RD, 2016
LOFFREDO BROOKS ARCHITECTS P.C.
118 WEST 22TH STREET, 4th FLOOR
NEW YORK, NEW YORK 10011
(212) 679-7729
TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 0 - BIDDING AND CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS
General Conditions
Supplementary Conditions
A305-1986 – Contractor’s Qualification Statement
VF Outdoor Schedule
DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Section 01000 General Requirements
DIVISION 2 - SITEWORK
Section 02070 Selective Demolition
Section 02112 Alteration Demolition
DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE
Section 03360 – Special Concrete Floor Finishes
DIVISION 4 - MASONRY
Section 04200 – Masonry Work
DIVISION 5 - METALS
Section 05500 Miscellaneous Metals
Section 05510 Steel Pan-type stairs
DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS
Section 06100 Rough Carpentry
Section 06400 Architectural Woodwork
Section 06420 Wood Paneling
DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
Section 07250 Sprayed-on Fireproofing
DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS
Section 08100 Steel Doors and Frames
Section 08370 Tempered Glass Doors
Section 08710 Finish Hardware
Section 08800 Glass and Glazing
DIVISION 9 - FINISHES
Section 09250 Gypsum Drywall
Section 09300 Tile
Section 09510 Acoustical Ceilings
Section 09600 Interior Stone
Section 09640 Wood Flooring
Section 09650 Resilient Flooring
Section 09680 Carpet
Section 09900 Painting
Section 09950 Wallcovering
DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES
Section 102219 Demountable Partitions
Section 10270 Access Flooring
Section 10800 Accessories
DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT
Section 11450 Pantry Equipment
Section 11900 Miscellaneous Specialties
DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS
Not Required
DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
Not Required
DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING SYSTEMS
Not Required
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL
As shown on the Drawings
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL
As shown on the Drawings
®
AIA Document A201 – 2007
TM
General Conditions of the Contract for Construction
Editing Template
CAUTION: Do not remove or otherwise edit Project
Data fill-points (Basic Information, Contract Details
and Project Team) when using this document
for the following PROJECT:
(Name and location or address)
« »
« »
THE OWNER:
(Name, legal status and address)
« »« »
« »
THE ARCHITECT:
(Name, legal status and address)
« »« »
« »
ADDITIONS AND DELETIONS:
The author of this document
has added information
needed for its completion.
The author may also have
revised the text of the
original AIA standard form.
An Additions and Deletions
Report that notes added
information as well as
revisions to the standard
form text is available from
the author and should be
reviewed.
This document has important
legal consequences.
Consultation with an
attorney is encouraged with
respect to its completion
or modification.
TABLE OF ARTICLES
1
GENERAL PROVISIONS
2
OWNER
3
CONTRACTOR
4
ARCHITECT
5
SUBCONTRACTORS
6
CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS
7
CHANGES IN THE WORK
8
TIME
9
PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION
10
PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY
11
INSURANCE AND BONDS
12
UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK
13
MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS
ELECTRONIC COPYING of any
portion of this AIA® Document
to another electronic file is
prohibited and constitutes a
violation of copyright laws
as set forth in the footer of
this document.
AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The
American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International
Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal
penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.
This document is not an original AIA® Contract Document, but a template produced by AIA® Contract Documents software for producing a
customized document.
1
14
TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT
15
CLAIMS AND DISPUTES
AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The
American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International
Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal
penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.
This document is not an original AIA® Contract Document, but a template produced by AIA® Contract Documents software for producing a
customized document.
2
INDEX
(Topics and numbers in bold are section headings.)
Acceptance of Nonconforming Work
9.6.6, 9.9.3, 12.3
Acceptance of Work
9.6.6, 9.8.2, 9.9.3, 9.10.1, 9.10.3, 12.3
Access to Work
3.16, 6.2.1, 12.1
Accident Prevention
10
Acts and Omissions
3.2, 3.3.2, 3.12.8, 3.18, 4.2.3, 8.3.1, 9.5.1, 10.2.5,
10.2.8, 13.4.2, 13.7, 14.1, 15.2
Addenda
1.1.1, 3.11
Additional Costs, Claims for
3.7.4, 3.7.5, 6.1.1, 7.3.7.5, 10.3, 15.1.4
Additional Inspections and Testing
9.4.2, 9.8.3, 12.2.1, 13.5
Additional Insured
11.1.4
Additional Time, Claims for
3.2.4, 3.7.4, 3.7.5, 3.10.2, 8.3.2, 15.1.5
Administration of the Contract
3.1.3, 4.2, 9.4, 9.5
Advertisement or Invitation to Bid
1.1.1
Aesthetic Effect
4.2.13
Allowances
3.8, 7.3.8
All-risk Insurance
11.3.1, 11.3.1.1
Applications for Payment
4.2.5, 7.3.9, 9.2, 9.3, 9.4, 9.5.1, 9.6.3, 9.7, 9.10,
11.1.3
Approvals
2.1.1, 2.2.2, 2.4, 3.1.3, 3.10.2, 3.12.8, 3.12.9, 3.12.10,
4.2.7, 9.3.2, 13.5.1
Arbitration
8.3.1, 11.3.10, 13.1, 15.3.2, 15.4
ARCHITECT
4
Architect, Definition of
4.1.1
Architect, Extent of Authority
2.4, 3.12.7, 4.1, 4.2, 5.2, 6.3, 7.1.2, 7.3.7, 7.4, 9.2,
9.3.1, 9.4, 9.5, 9.6.3, 9.8, 9.10.1, 9.10.3, 12.1, 12.2.1,
13.5.1, 13.5.2, 14.2.2, 14.2.4, 15.1.3, 15.2.1
Architect, Limitations of Authority and
Responsibility
2.1.1, 3.12.4, 3.12.8, 3.12.10, 4.1.2, 4.2.1, 4.2.2,
4.2.3, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 4.2.10, 4.2.12, 4.2.13, 5.2.1, 7.4,
9.4.2, 9.5.3, 9.6.4, 15.1.3, 15.2
Architect’s Additional Services and Expenses
2.4, 11.3.1.1, 12.2.1, 13.5.2, 13.5.3, 14.2.4
Architect’s Administration of the Contract
3.1.3, 4.2, 3.7.4, 15.2, 9.4.1, 9.5
Architect’s Approvals
2.4, 3.1.3, 3.5, 3.10.2, 4.2.7
Architect’s Authority to Reject Work
3.5, 4.2.6, 12.1.2, 12.2.1
Architect’s Copyright
1.1.7, 1.5
Architect’s Decisions
3.7.4, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 4.2.11, 4.2.12, 4.2.13, 4.2.14, 6.3,
7.3.7, 7.3.9, 8.1.3, 8.3.1, 9.2, 9.4.1, 9.5, 9.8.4, 9.9.1,
13.5.2, 15.2, 15.3
Architect’s Inspections
3.7.4, 4.2.2, 4.2.9, 9.4.2, 9.8.3, 9.9.2, 9.10.1, 13.5
Architect’s Instructions
3.2.4, 3.3.1, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 13.5.2
Architect’s Interpretations
4.2.11, 4.2.12
Architect’s Project Representative
4.2.10
Architect’s Relationship with Contractor
1.1.2, 1.5, 3.1.3, 3.2.2, 3.2.3, 3.2.4, 3.3.1, 3.4.2, 3.5,
3.7.4, 3.7.5, 3.9.2, 3.9.3, 3.10, 3.11, 3.12, 3.16, 3.18,
4.1.2, 4.1.3, 4.2, 5.2, 6.2.2, 7, 8.3.1, 9.2, 9.3, 9.4, 9.5,
9.7, 9.8, 9.9, 10.2.6, 10.3, 11.3.7, 12, 13.4.2, 13.5,
15.2
Architect’s Relationship with Subcontractors
1.1.2, 4.2.3, 4.2.4, 4.2.6, 9.6.3, 9.6.4, 11.3.7
Architect’s Representations
9.4.2, 9.5.1, 9.10.1
Architect’s Site Visits
3.7.4, 4.2.2, 4.2.9, 9.4.2, 9.5.1, 9.9.2, 9.10.1, 13.5
Asbestos
10.3.1
Attorneys’ Fees
3.18.1, 9.10.2, 10.3.3
Award of Separate Contracts
6.1.1, 6.1.2
Award of Subcontracts and Other Contracts for
Portions of the Work
5.2
Basic Definitions
1.1
Bidding Requirements
1.1.1, 5.2.1, 11.4.1
Binding Dispute Resolution
9.7, 11.3.9, 11.3.10, 13.1, 15.2.5, 15.2.6.1, 15.3.1,
15.3.2, 15.4.1
Boiler and Machinery Insurance
11.3.2
Bonds, Lien
7.3.7.4, 9.10.2, 9.10.3
Bonds, Performance, and Payment
7.3.7.4, 9.6.7, 9.10.3, 11.3.9, 11.4
AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The
American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International
Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal
penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.
This document is not an original AIA® Contract Document, but a template produced by AIA® Contract Documents software for producing a
customized document.
3
Building Permit
3.7.1
Capitalization
1.3
Certificate of Substantial Completion
9.8.3, 9.8.4, 9.8.5
Certificates for Payment
4.2.1, 4.2.5, 4.2.9, 9.3.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.6.1, 9.6.6, 9.7,
9.10.1, 9.10.3, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.4, 15.1.3
Certificates of Inspection, Testing or Approval
13.5.4
Certificates of Insurance
9.10.2, 11.1.3
Change Orders
1.1.1, 2.4, 3.4.2, 3.7.4, 3.8.2.3, 3.11, 3.12.8, 4.2.8,
5.2.3, 7.1.2, 7.1.3, 7.2, 7.3.2, 7.3.6, 7.3.9, 7.3.10,
8.3.1, 9.3.1.1, 9.10.3, 10.3.2, 11.3.1.2, 11.3.4, 11.3.9,
12.1.2, 15.1.3
Change Orders, Definition of
7.2.1
CHANGES IN THE WORK
2.2.1, 3.11, 4.2.8, 7, 7.2.1, 7.3.1, 7.4, 8.3.1, 9.3.1.1,
11.3.9
Claims, Definition of
15.1.1
CLAIMS AND DISPUTES
3.2.4, 6.1.1, 6.3, 7.3.9, 9.3.3, 9.10.4, 10.3.3, 15, 15.4
Claims and Timely Assertion of Claims
15.4.1
Claims for Additional Cost
3.2.4, 3.7.4, 6.1.1, 7.3.9, 10.3.2, 15.1.4
Claims for Additional Time
3.2.4, 3.7.4, 6.1.1, 8.3.2, 10.3.2, 15.1.5
Concealed or Unknown Conditions, Claims for
3.7.4
Claims for Damages
3.2.4, 3.18, 6.1.1, 8.3.3, 9.5.1, 9.6.7, 10.3.3, 11.1.1,
11.3.5, 11.3.7, 14.1.3, 14.2.4, 15.1.6
Claims Subject to Arbitration
15.3.1, 15.4.1
Cleaning Up
3.15, 6.3
Commencement of the Work, Conditions Relating to
2.2.1, 3.2.2, 3.4.1, 3.7.1, 3.10.1, 3.12.6, 5.2.1, 5.2.3,
6.2.2, 8.1.2, 8.2.2, 8.3.1, 11.1, 11.3.1, 11.3.6, 11.4.1,
15.1.4
Commencement of the Work, Definition of
8.1.2
Communications Facilitating Contract
Administration
3.9.1, 4.2.4
Completion, Conditions Relating to
3.4.1, 3.11, 3.15, 4.2.2, 4.2.9, 8.2, 9.4.2, 9.8, 9.9.1,
9.10, 12.2, 13.7, 14.1.2
COMPLETION, PAYMENTS AND
9
Completion, Substantial
4.2.9, 8.1.1, 8.1.3, 8.2.3, 9.4.2, 9.8, 9.9.1, 9.10.3,
12.2, 13.7
Compliance with Laws
1.6, 3.2.3, 3.6, 3.7, 3.12.10, 3.13, 4.1.1, 9.6.4, 10.2.2,
11.1, 11.3, 13.1, 13.4, 13.5.1, 13.5.2, 13.6, 14.1.1,
14.2.1.3, 15.2.8, 15.4.2, 15.4.3
Concealed or Unknown Conditions
3.7.4, 4.2.8, 8.3.1, 10.3
Conditions of the Contract
1.1.1, 6.1.1, 6.1.4
Consent, Written
3.4.2, 3.7.4, 3.12.8, 3.14.2, 4.1.2, 9.3.2, 9.8.5, 9.9.1,
9.10.2, 9.10.3, 11.3.1, 13.2, 13.4.2, 15.4.4.2
Consolidation or Joinder
15.4.4
CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY
SEPARATE CONTRACTORS
1.1.4, 6
Construction Change Directive, Definition of
7.3.1
Construction Change Directives
1.1.1, 3.4.2, 3.12.8, 4.2.8, 7.1.1, 7.1.2, 7.1.3, 7.3,
9.3.1.1
Construction Schedules, Contractor’s
3.10, 3.12.1, 3.12.2, 6.1.3, 15.1.5.2
Contingent Assignment of Subcontracts
5.4, 14.2.2.2
Continuing Contract Performance
15.1.3
Contract, Definition of
1.1.2
CONTRACT, TERMINATION OR
SUSPENSION OF THE
5.4.1.1, 11.3.9, 14
Contract Administration
3.1.3, 4, 9.4, 9.5
Contract Award and Execution, Conditions Relating
to
3.7.1, 3.10, 5.2, 6.1, 11.1.3, 11.3.6, 11.4.1
Contract Documents, Copies Furnished and Use of
1.5.2, 2.2.5, 5.3
Contract Documents, Definition of
1.1.1
Contract Sum
3.7.4, 3.8, 5.2.3, 7.2, 7.3, 7.4, 9.1, 9.4.2, 9.5.1.4,
9.6.7, 9.7, 10.3.2, 11.3.1, 14.2.4, 14.3.2, 15.1.4,
15.2.5
Contract Sum, Definition of
9.1
Contract Time
3.7.4, 3.7.5, 3.10.2, 5.2.3, 7.2.1.3, 7.3.1, 7.3.5, 7.4,
8.1.1, 8.2.1, 8.3.1, 9.5.1, 9.7, 10.3.2, 12.1.1, 14.3.2,
15.1.5.1, 15.2.5
Contract Time, Definition of
8.1.1
AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The
American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International
Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal
penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.
This document is not an original AIA® Contract Document, but a template produced by AIA® Contract Documents software for producing a
customized document.
4
CONTRACTOR
3
Contractor, Definition of
3.1, 6.1.2
Contractor’s Construction Schedules
3.10, 3.12.1, 3.12.2, 6.1.3, 15.1.5.2
Contractor’s Employees
3.3.2, 3.4.3, 3.8.1, 3.9, 3.18.2, 4.2.3, 4.2.6, 10.2, 10.3,
11.1.1, 11.3.7, 14.1, 14.2.1.1
Contractor’s Liability Insurance
11.1
Contractor’s Relationship with Separate Contractors
and Owner’s Forces
3.12.5, 3.14.2, 4.2.4, 6, 11.3.7, 12.1.2, 12.2.4
Contractor’s Relationship with Subcontractors
1.2.2, 3.3.2, 3.18.1, 3.18.2, 5, 9.6.2, 9.6.7, 9.10.2,
11.3.1.2, 11.3.7, 11.3.8
Contractor’s Relationship with the Architect
1.1.2, 1.5, 3.1.3, 3.2.2, 3.2.3, 3.2.4, 3.3.1, 3.4.2, 3.5,
3.7.4, 3.10, 3.11, 3.12, 3.16, 3.18, 4.1.3, 4.2, 5.2,
6.2.2, 7, 8.3.1, 9.2, 9.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.7, 9.8, 9.9, 10.2.6,
10.3, 11.3.7, 12, 13.5, 15.1.2, 15.2.1
Contractor’s Representations
3.2.1, 3.2.2, 3.5, 3.12.6, 6.2.2, 8.2.1, 9.3.3, 9.8.2
Contractor’s Responsibility for Those Performing the
Work
3.3.2, 3.18, 5.3, 6.1.3, 6.2, 9.5.1, 10.2.8
Contractor’s Review of Contract Documents
3.2
Contractor’s Right to Stop the Work
9.7
Contractor’s Right to Terminate the Contract
14.1, 15.1.6
Contractor’s Submittals
3.10, 3.11, 3.12.4, 4.2.7, 5.2.1, 5.2.3, 9.2, 9.3, 9.8.2,
9.8.3, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 9.10.3, 11.1.3, 11.4.2
Contractor’s Superintendent
3.9, 10.2.6
Contractor’s Supervision and Construction
Procedures
1.2.2, 3.3, 3.4, 3.12.10, 4.2.2, 4.2.7, 6.1.3, 6.2.4,
7.1.3, 7.3.5, 7.3.7, 8.2, 10, 12, 14, 15.1.3
Contractual Liability Insurance
11.1.1.8, 11.2
Coordination and Correlation
1.2, 3.2.1, 3.3.1, 3.10, 3.12.6, 6.1.3, 6.2.1
Copies Furnished of Drawings and Specifications
1.5, 2.2.5, 3.11
Copyrights
1.5, 3.17
Correction of Work
2.3, 2.4, 3.7.3, 9.4.2, 9.8.2, 9.8.3, 9.9.1, 12.1.2, 12.2
Correlation and Intent of the Contract Documents
1.2
Cost, Definition of
7.3.7
Costs
2.4, 3.2.4, 3.7.3, 3.8.2, 3.15.2, 5.4.2, 6.1.1, 6.2.3,
7.3.3.3, 7.3.7, 7.3.8, 7.3.9, 9.10.2, 10.3.2, 10.3.6,
11.3, 12.1.2, 12.2.1, 12.2.4, 13.5, 14
Cutting and Patching
3.14, 6.2.5
Damage to Construction of Owner or Separate
Contractors
3.14.2, 6.2.4, 10.2.1.2, 10.2.5, 10.4, 11.1.1, 11.3,
12.2.4
Damage to the Work
3.14.2, 9.9.1, 10.2.1.2, 10.2.5, 10.4, 11.3.1, 12.2.4
Damages, Claims for
3.2.4, 3.18, 6.1.1, 8.3.3, 9.5.1, 9.6.7, 10.3.3, 11.1.1,
11.3.5, 11.3.7, 14.1.3, 14.2.4, 15.1.6
Damages for Delay
6.1.1, 8.3.3, 9.5.1.6, 9.7, 10.3.2
Date of Commencement of the Work, Definition of
8.1.2
Date of Substantial Completion, Definition of
8.1.3
Day, Definition of
8.1.4
Decisions of the Architect
3.7.4, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 4.2.11, 4.2.12, 4.2.13, 15.2, 6.3,
7.3.7, 7.3.9, 8.1.3, 8.3.1, 9.2, 9.4, 9.5.1, 9.8.4, 9.9.1,
13.5.2, 14.2.2, 14.2.4, 15.1, 15.2
Decisions to Withhold Certification
9.4.1, 9.5, 9.7, 14.1.1.3
Defective or Nonconforming Work, Acceptance,
Rejection and Correction of
2.3, 2.4, 3.5, 4.2.6, 6.2.5, 9.5.1, 9.5.2, 9.6.6, 9.8.2,
9.9.3, 9.10.4, 12.2.1
Definitions
1.1, 2.1.1, 3.1.1, 3.5, 3.12.1, 3.12.2, 3.12.3, 4.1.1,
15.1.1, 5.1, 6.1.2, 7.2.1, 7.3.1, 8.1, 9.1, 9.8.1
Delays and Extensions of Time
3.2, 3.7.4, 5.2.3, 7.2.1, 7.3.1, 7.4, 8.3, 9.5.1, 9.7,
10.3.2, 10.4, 14.3.2, 15.1.5, 15.2.5
Disputes
6.3, 7.3.9, 15.1, 15.2
Documents and Samples at the Site
3.11
Drawings, Definition of
1.1.5
Drawings and Specifications, Use and Ownership of
3.11
Effective Date of Insurance
8.2.2, 11.1.2
Emergencies
10.4, 14.1.1.2, 15.1.4
Employees, Contractor’s
3.3.2, 3.4.3, 3.8.1, 3.9, 3.18.2, 4.2.3, 4.2.6, 10.2,
10.3.3, 11.1.1, 11.3.7, 14.1, 14.2.1.1
AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The
American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International
Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal
penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.
This document is not an original AIA® Contract Document, but a template produced by AIA® Contract Documents software for producing a
customized document.
5
Equipment, Labor, Materials or
1.1.3, 1.1.6, 3.4, 3.5, 3.8.2, 3.8.3, 3.12, 3.13, 3.15.1,
4.2.6, 4.2.7, 5.2.1, 6.2.1, 7.3.7, 9.3.2, 9.3.3, 9.5.1.3,
9.10.2, 10.2.1, 10.2.4, 14.2.1.1, 14.2.1.2
Execution and Progress of the Work
1.1.3, 1.2.1, 1.2.2, 2.2.3, 2.2.5, 3.1, 3.3.1, 3.4.1, 3.5,
3.7.1, 3.10.1, 3.12, 3.14, 4.2, 6.2.2, 7.1.3, 7.3.5, 8.2,
9.5.1, 9.9.1, 10.2, 10.3, 12.2, 14.2, 14.3.1, 15.1.3
Extensions of Time
3.2.4, 3.7.4, 5.2.3, 7.2.1, 7.3, 7.4, 9.5.1, 9.7, 10.3.2,
10.4, 14.3, 15.1.5, 15.2.5
Failure of Payment
9.5.1.3, 9.7, 9.10.2, 13.6, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.1.2
Faulty Work
(See Defective or Nonconforming Work)
Final Completion and Final Payment
4.2.1, 4.2.9, 9.8.2, 9.10, 11.1.2, 11.1.3, 11.3.1, 11.3.5,
12.3, 14.2.4, 14.4.3
Financial Arrangements, Owner’s
2.2.1, 13.2.2, 14.1.1.4
Fire and Extended Coverage Insurance
11.3.1.1
GENERAL PROVISIONS
1
Governing Law
13.1
Guarantees (See Warranty)
Hazardous Materials
10.2.4, 10.3
Identification of Subcontractors and Suppliers
5.2.1
Indemnification
3.17, 3.18, 9.10.2, 10.3.3, 10.3.5, 10.3.6, 11.3.1.2,
11.3.7
Information and Services Required of the Owner
2.1.2, 2.2, 3.2.2, 3.12.4, 3.12.10, 6.1.3, 6.1.4, 6.2.5,
9.6.1, 9.6.4, 9.9.2, 9.10.3, 10.3.3, 11.2, 11.4, 13.5.1,
13.5.2, 14.1.1.4, 14.1.4, 15.1.3
Initial Decision
15.2
Initial Decision Maker, Definition of
1.1.8
Initial Decision Maker, Decisions
14.2.2, 14.2.4, 15.2.1, 15.2.2, 15.2.3, 15.2.4, 15.2.5
Initial Decision Maker, Extent of Authority
14.2.2, 14.2.4, 15.1.3, 15.2.1, 15.2.2, 15.2.3, 15.2.4,
15.2.5
Injury or Damage to Person or Property
10.2.8, 10.4
Inspections
3.1.3, 3.3.3, 3.7.1, 4.2.2, 4.2.6, 4.2.9, 9.4.2, 9.8.3,
9.9.2, 9.10.1, 12.2.1, 13.5
Instructions to Bidders
1.1.1
Instructions to the Contractor
3.2.4, 3.3.1, 3.8.1, 5.2.1, 7, 8.2.2, 12, 13.5.2
Instruments of Service, Definition of
1.1.7
Insurance
3.18.1, 6.1.1, 7.3.7, 9.3.2, 9.8.4, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 11
Insurance, Boiler and Machinery
11.3.2
Insurance, Contractor’s Liability
11.1
Insurance, Effective Date of
8.2.2, 11.1.2
Insurance, Loss of Use
11.3.3
Insurance, Owner’s Liability
11.2
Insurance, Property
10.2.5, 11.3
Insurance, Stored Materials
9.3.2
INSURANCE AND BONDS
11
Insurance Companies, Consent to Partial Occupancy
9.9.1
Intent of the Contract Documents
1.2.1, 4.2.7, 4.2.12, 4.2.13, 7.4
Interest
13.6
Interpretation
1.2.3, 1.4, 4.1.1, 5.1, 6.1.2, 15.1.1
Interpretations, Written
4.2.11, 4.2.12, 15.1.4
Judgment on Final Award
15.4.2
Labor and Materials, Equipment
1.1.3, 1.1.6, 3.4, 3.5, 3.8.2, 3.8.3, 3.12, 3.13, 3.15.1,
4.2.6, 4.2.7, 5.2.1, 6.2.1, 7.3.7, 9.3.2, 9.3.3, 9.5.1.3,
9.10.2, 10.2.1, 10.2.4, 14.2.1.1, 14.2.1.2
Labor Disputes
8.3.1
Laws and Regulations
1.5, 3.2.3, 3.6, 3.7, 3.12.10, 3.13, 4.1.1, 9.6.4, 9.9.1,
10.2.2, 11.1.1, 11.3, 13.1, 13.4, 13.5.1, 13.5.2, 13.6,
14, 15.2.8, 15.4
Liens
2.1.2, 9.3.3, 9.10.2, 9.10.4, 15.2.8
Limitations, Statutes of
12.2.5, 13.7, 15.4.1.1
Limitations of Liability
2.3, 3.2.2, 3.5, 3.12.10, 3.17, 3.18.1, 4.2.6, 4.2.7,
4.2.12, 6.2.2, 9.4.2, 9.6.4, 9.6.7, 10.2.5, 10.3.3,
11.1.2, 11.2, 11.3.7, 12.2.5, 13.4.2
Limitations of Time
2.1.2, 2.2, 2.4, 3.2.2, 3.10, 3.11, 3.12.5, 3.15.1, 4.2.7,
5.2, 5.3, 5.4.1, 6.2.4, 7.3, 7.4, 8.2, 9.2, 9.3.1, 9.3.3,
9.4.1, 9.5, 9.6, 9.7, 9.8, 9.9, 9.10, 11.1.3, 11.3.1.5,
11.3.6, 11.3.10, 12.2, 13.5, 13.7, 14, 15
Loss of Use Insurance
11.3.3
AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The
American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International
Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal
penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.
This document is not an original AIA® Contract Document, but a template produced by AIA® Contract Documents software for producing a
customized document.
6
Material Suppliers
1.5, 3.12.1, 4.2.4, 4.2.6, 5.2.1, 9.3, 9.4.2, 9.6, 9.10.5
Materials, Hazardous
10.2.4, 10.3
Materials, Labor, Equipment and
1.1.3, 1.1.6, 1.5.1, 3.4.1, 3.5, 3.8.2, 3.8.3, 3.12, 3.13,
3.15.1, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 5.2.1, 6.2.1, 7.3.7, 9.3.2, 9.3.3,
9.5.1.3, 9.10.2, 10.2.1.2, 10.2.4, 14.2.1.1, 14.2.1.2
Means, Methods, Techniques, Sequences and
Procedures of Construction
3.3.1, 3.12.10, 4.2.2, 4.2.7, 9.4.2
Mechanic’s Lien
2.1.2, 15.2.8
Mediation
8.3.1, 10.3.5, 10.3.6, 15.2.1, 15.2.5, 15.2.6, 15.3,
15.4.1
Minor Changes in the Work
1.1.1, 3.12.8, 4.2.8, 7.1, 7.4
MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS
13
Modifications, Definition of
1.1.1
Modifications to the Contract
1.1.1, 1.1.2, 3.11, 4.1.2, 4.2.1, 5.2.3, 7, 8.3.1, 9.7,
10.3.2, 11.3.1
Mutual Responsibility
6.2
Nonconforming Work, Acceptance of
9.6.6, 9.9.3, 12.3
Nonconforming Work, Rejection and Correction of
2.3, 2.4, 3.5, 4.2.6, 6.2.4, 9.5.1, 9.8.2, 9.9.3, 9.10.4,
12.2.1
Notice
2.2.1, 2.3, 2.4, 3.2.4, 3.3.1, 3.7.2, 3.12.9, 5.2.1, 9.7,
9.10, 10.2.2, 11.1.3, 12.2.2.1, 13.3, 13.5.1, 13.5.2,
14.1, 14.2, 15.2.8, 15.4.1
Notice, Written
2.3, 2.4, 3.3.1, 3.9.2, 3.12.9, 3.12.10, 5.2.1, 9.7, 9.10,
10.2.2, 10.3, 11.1.3, 11.3.6, 12.2.2.1, 13.3, 14, 15.2.8,
15.4.1
Notice of Claims
3.7.4, 10.2.8, 15.1.2, 15.4
Notice of Testing and Inspections
13.5.1, 13.5.2
Observations, Contractor’s
3.2, 3.7.4
Occupancy
2.2.2, 9.6.6, 9.8, 11.3.1.5
Orders, Written
1.1.1, 2.3, 3.9.2, 7, 8.2.2, 11.3.9, 12.1, 12.2.2.1,
13.5.2, 14.3.1
OWNER
2
Owner, Definition of
2.1.1
Owner, Information and Services Required of the
2.1.2, 2.2, 3.2.2, 3.12.10, 6.1.3, 6.1.4, 6.2.5, 9.3.2,
9.6.1, 9.6.4, 9.9.2, 9.10.3, 10.3.3, 11.2, 11.3, 13.5.1,
13.5.2, 14.1.1.4, 14.1.4, 15.1.3
Owner’s Authority
1.5, 2.1.1, 2.3, 2.4, 3.4.2, 3.8.1, 3.12.10, 3.14.2, 4.1.2,
4.1.3, 4.2.4, 4.2.9, 5.2.1, 5.2.4, 5.4.1, 6.1, 6.3, 7.2.1,
7.3.1, 8.2.2, 8.3.1, 9.3.1, 9.3.2, 9.5.1, 9.6.4, 9.9.1,
9.10.2, 10.3.2, 11.1.3, 11.3.3, 11.3.10, 12.2.2, 12.3,
13.2.2, 14.3, 14.4, 15.2.7
Owner’s Financial Capability
2.2.1, 13.2.2, 14.1.1.4
Owner’s Liability Insurance
11.2
Owner’s Relationship with Subcontractors
1.1.2, 5.2, 5.3, 5.4, 9.6.4, 9.10.2, 14.2.2
Owner’s Right to Carry Out the Work
2.4, 14.2.2
Owner’s Right to Clean Up
6.3
Owner’s Right to Perform Construction and to
Award Separate Contracts
6.1
Owner’s Right to Stop the Work
2.3
Owner’s Right to Suspend the Work
14.3
Owner’s Right to Terminate the Contract
14.2
Ownership and Use of Drawings, Specifications
and Other Instruments of Service
1.1.1, 1.1.6, 1.1.7, 1.5, 2.2.5, 3.2.2, 3.11, 3.17, 4.2.12,
5.3
Partial Occupancy or Use
9.6.6, 9.9, 11.3.1.5
Patching, Cutting and
3.14, 6.2.5
Patents
3.17
Payment, Applications for
4.2.5, 7.3.9, 9.2, 9.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.6.3, 9.7, 9.8.5, 9.10.1,
14.2.3, 14.2.4, 14.4.3
Payment, Certificates for
4.2.5, 4.2.9, 9.3.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.6.1, 9.6.6, 9.7, 9.10.1,
9.10.3, 13.7, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.4
Payment, Failure of
9.5.1.3, 9.7, 9.10.2, 13.6, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.1.2
Payment, Final
4.2.1, 4.2.9, 9.8.2, 9.10, 11.1.2, 11.1.3, 11.4.1, 12.3,
13.7, 14.2.4, 14.4.3
Payment Bond, Performance Bond and
7.3.7.4, 9.6.7, 9.10.3, 11.4
Payments, Progress
9.3, 9.6, 9.8.5, 9.10.3, 13.6, 14.2.3, 15.1.3
PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION
9
AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The
American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International
Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal
penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.
This document is not an original AIA® Contract Document, but a template produced by AIA® Contract Documents software for producing a
customized document.
7
Payments to Subcontractors
5.4.2, 9.5.1.3, 9.6.2, 9.6.3, 9.6.4, 9.6.7, 14.2.1.2
PCB
10.3.1
Performance Bond and Payment Bond
7.3.7.4, 9.6.7, 9.10.3, 11.4
Permits, Fees, Notices and Compliance with Laws
2.2.2, 3.7, 3.13, 7.3.7.4, 10.2.2
PERSONS AND PROPERTY, PROTECTION
OF
10
Polychlorinated Biphenyl
10.3.1
Product Data, Definition of
3.12.2
Product Data and Samples, Shop Drawings
3.11, 3.12, 4.2.7
Progress and Completion
4.2.2, 8.2, 9.8, 9.9.1, 14.1.4, 15.1.3
Progress Payments
9.3, 9.6, 9.8.5, 9.10.3, 13.6, 14.2.3, 15.1.3
Project, Definition of
1.1.4
Project Representatives
4.2.10
Property Insurance
10.2.5, 11.3
PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY
10
Regulations and Laws
1.5, 3.2.3, 3.6, 3.7, 3.12.10, 3.13, 4.1.1, 9.6.4, 9.9.1,
10.2.2, 11.1, 11.4, 13.1, 13.4, 13.5.1, 13.5.2, 13.6, 14,
15.2.8, 15.4
Rejection of Work
3.5, 4.2.6, 12.2.1
Releases and Waivers of Liens
9.10.2
Representations
3.2.1, 3.5, 3.12.6, 6.2.2, 8.2.1, 9.3.3, 9.4.2, 9.5.1,
9.8.2, 9.10.1
Representatives
2.1.1, 3.1.1, 3.9, 4.1.1, 4.2.1, 4.2.2, 4.2.10, 5.1.1,
5.1.2, 13.2.1
Responsibility for Those Performing the Work
3.3.2, 3.18, 4.2.3, 5.3, 6.1.3, 6.2, 6.3, 9.5.1, 10
Retainage
9.3.1, 9.6.2, 9.8.5, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 9.10.3
Review of Contract Documents and Field
Conditions by Contractor
3.2, 3.12.7, 6.1.3
Review of Contractor’s Submittals by Owner and
Architect
3.10.1, 3.10.2, 3.11, 3.12, 4.2, 5.2, 6.1.3, 9.2, 9.8.2
Review of Shop Drawings, Product Data and
Samples by Contractor
3.12
Rights and Remedies
1.1.2, 2.3, 2.4, 3.5, 3.7.4, 3.15.2, 4.2.6, 5.3, 5.4, 6.1,
6.3, 7.3.1, 8.3, 9.5.1, 9.7, 10.2.5, 10.3, 12.2.2, 12.2.4,
13.4, 14, 15.4
Royalties, Patents and Copyrights
3.17
Rules and Notices for Arbitration
15.4.1
Safety of Persons and Property
10.2, 10.4
Safety Precautions and Programs
3.3.1, 4.2.2, 4.2.7, 5.3, 10.1, 10.2, 10.4
Samples, Definition of
3.12.3
Samples, Shop Drawings, Product Data and
3.11, 3.12, 4.2.7
Samples at the Site, Documents and
3.11
Schedule of Values
9.2, 9.3.1
Schedules, Construction
3.10, 3.12.1, 3.12.2, 6.1.3, 15.1.5.2
Separate Contracts and Contractors
1.1.4, 3.12.5, 3.14.2, 4.2.4, 4.2.7, 6, 8.3.1, 12.1.2
Shop Drawings, Definition of
3.12.1
Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples
3.11, 3.12, 4.2.7
Site, Use of
3.13, 6.1.1, 6.2.1
Site Inspections
3.2.2, 3.3.3, 3.7.1, 3.7.4, 4.2, 9.4.2, 9.10.1, 13.5
Site Visits, Architect’s
3.7.4, 4.2.2, 4.2.9, 9.4.2, 9.5.1, 9.9.2, 9.10.1, 13.5
Special Inspections and Testing
4.2.6, 12.2.1, 13.5
Specifications, Definition of
1.1.6
Specifications
1.1.1, 1.1.6, 1.2.2, 1.5, 3.11, 3.12.10, 3.17, 4.2.14
Statute of Limitations
13.7, 15.4.1.1
Stopping the Work
2.3, 9.7, 10.3, 14.1
Stored Materials
6.2.1, 9.3.2, 10.2.1.2, 10.2.4
Subcontractor, Definition of
5.1.1
SUBCONTRACTORS
5
Subcontractors, Work by
1.2.2, 3.3.2, 3.12.1, 4.2.3, 5.2.3, 5.3, 5.4, 9.3.1.2,
9.6.7
Subcontractual Relations
5.3, 5.4, 9.3.1.2, 9.6, 9.10, 10.2.1, 14.1, 14.2.1
AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The
American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International
Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal
penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.
This document is not an original AIA® Contract Document, but a template produced by AIA® Contract Documents software for producing a
customized document.
8
Submittals
3.10, 3.11, 3.12, 4.2.7, 5.2.1, 5.2.3, 7.3.7, 9.2, 9.3,
9.8, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 9.10.3, 11.1.3
Submittal Schedule
3.10.2, 3.12.5, 4.2.7
Subrogation, Waivers of
6.1.1, 11.3.7
Substantial Completion
4.2.9, 8.1.1, 8.1.3, 8.2.3, 9.4.2, 9.8, 9.9.1, 9.10.3,
12.2, 13.7
Substantial Completion, Definition of
9.8.1
Substitution of Subcontractors
5.2.3, 5.2.4
Substitution of Architect
4.1.3
Substitutions of Materials
3.4.2, 3.5, 7.3.8
Sub-subcontractor, Definition of
5.1.2
Subsurface Conditions
3.7.4
Successors and Assigns
13.2
Superintendent
3.9, 10.2.6
Supervision and Construction Procedures
1.2.2, 3.3, 3.4, 3.12.10, 4.2.2, 4.2.7, 6.1.3, 6.2.4,
7.1.3, 7.3.7, 8.2, 8.3.1, 9.4.2, 10, 12, 14, 15.1.3
Surety
5.4.1.2, 9.8.5, 9.10.2, 9.10.3, 14.2.2, 15.2.7
Surety, Consent of
9.10.2, 9.10.3
Surveys
2.2.3
Suspension by the Owner for Convenience
14.3
Suspension of the Work
5.4.2, 14.3
Suspension or Termination of the Contract
5.4.1.1, 14
Taxes
3.6, 3.8.2.1, 7.3.7.4
Termination by the Contractor
14.1, 15.1.6
Termination by the Owner for Cause
5.4.1.1, 14.2, 15.1.6
Termination by the Owner for Convenience
14.4
Termination of the Architect
4.1.3
Termination of the Contractor
14.2.2
TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE
CONTRACT
14
Tests and Inspections
3.1.3, 3.3.3, 4.2.2, 4.2.6, 4.2.9, 9.4.2, 9.8.3, 9.9.2,
9.10.1, 10.3.2, 11.4.1, 12.2.1, 13.5
TIME
8
Time, Delays and Extensions of
3.2.4, 3.7.4, 5.2.3, 7.2.1, 7.3.1, 7.4, 8.3, 9.5.1, 9.7,
10.3.2, 10.4, 14.3.2, 15.1.5, 15.2.5
Time Limits
2.1.2, 2.2, 2.4, 3.2.2, 3.10, 3.11, 3.12.5, 3.15.1, 4.2,
5.2, 5.3, 5.4, 6.2.4, 7.3, 7.4, 8.2, 9.2, 9.3.1, 9.3.3,
9.4.1, 9.5, 9.6, 9.7, 9.8, 9.9, 9.10, 11.1.3, 12.2, 13.5,
13.7, 14, 15.1.2, 15.4
Time Limits on Claims
3.7.4, 10.2.8, 13.7, 15.1.2
Title to Work
9.3.2, 9.3.3
Transmission of Data in Digital Form
1.6
UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF
WORK
12
Uncovering of Work
12.1
Unforeseen Conditions, Concealed or Unknown
3.7.4, 8.3.1, 10.3
Unit Prices
7.3.3.2, 7.3.4
Use of Documents
1.1.1, 1.5, 2.2.5, 3.12.6, 5.3
Use of Site
3.13, 6.1.1, 6.2.1
Values, Schedule of
9.2, 9.3.1
Waiver of Claims by the Architect
13.4.2
Waiver of Claims by the Contractor
9.10.5, 13.4.2, 15.1.6
Waiver of Claims by the Owner
9.9.3, 9.10.3, 9.10.4, 12.2.2.1, 13.4.2, 14.2.4, 15.1.6
Waiver of Consequential Damages
14.2.4, 15.1.6
Waiver of Liens
9.10.2, 9.10.4
Waivers of Subrogation
6.1.1, 11.3.7
Warranty
3.5, 4.2.9, 9.3.3, 9.8.4, 9.9.1, 9.10.4, 12.2.2, 13.7
Weather Delays
15.1.5.2
Work, Definition of
1.1.3
Written Consent
1.5.2, 3.4.2, 3.7.4, 3.12.8, 3.14.2, 4.1.2, 9.3.2, 9.8.5,
9.9.1, 9.10.2, 9.10.3, 11.4.1, 13.2, 13.4.2, 15.4.4.2
Written Interpretations
4.2.11, 4.2.12
AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The
American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International
Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal
penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.
This document is not an original AIA® Contract Document, but a template produced by AIA® Contract Documents software for producing a
customized document.
9
Written Notice
2.3, 2.4, 3.3.1, 3.9, 3.12.9, 3.12.10, 5.2.1, 8.2.2, 9.7,
9.10, 10.2.2, 10.3, 11.1.3, 12.2.2, 12.2.4, 13.3, 14,
15.4.1
Written Orders
1.1.1, 2.3, 3.9, 7, 8.2.2, 12.1, 12.2, 13.5.2, 14.3.1,
15.1.2
AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The
American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International
Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal
penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.
This document is not an original AIA® Contract Document, but a template produced by AIA® Contract Documents software for producing a
customized document.
10
ARTICLE 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS
§ 1.1 BASIC DEFINITIONS
§ 1.1.1 THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
The Contract Documents are enumerated in the Agreement between the Owner and Contractor (hereinafter the
Agreement) and consist of the Agreement, Conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary and other
Conditions), Drawings, Specifications, Addenda issued prior to execution of the Contract, other documents listed in
the Agreement and Modifications issued after execution of the Contract. A Modification is (1) a written amendment
to the Contract signed by both parties, (2) a Change Order, (3) a Construction Change Directive or (4) a written
order for a minor change in the Work issued by the Architect. Unless specifically enumerated in the Agreement, the
Contract Documents do not include the advertisement or invitation to bid, Instructions to Bidders, sample forms,
other information furnished by the Owner in anticipation of receiving bids or proposals, the Contractor’s bid or
proposal, or portions of Addenda relating to bidding requirements.
§ 1.1.2 THE CONTRACT
The Contract Documents form the Contract for Construction. The Contract represents the entire and integrated
agreement between the parties hereto and supersedes prior negotiations, representations or agreements, either written
or oral. The Contract may be amended or modified only by a Modification. The Contract Documents shall not be
construed to create a contractual relationship of any kind (1) between the Contractor and the Architect or the
Architect’s consultants, (2) between the Owner and a Subcontractor or a Sub-subcontractor, (3) between the Owner
and the Architect or the Architect’s consultants or (4) between any persons or entities other than the Owner and the
Contractor. The Architect shall, however, be entitled to performance and enforcement of obligations under the
Contract intended to facilitate performance of the Architect’s duties.
§ 1.1.3 THE WORK
The term “Work” means the construction and services required by the Contract Documents, whether completed or
partially completed, and includes all other labor, materials, equipment and services provided or to be provided by
the Contractor to fulfill the Contractor’s obligations. The Work may constitute the whole or a part of the Project.
§ 1.1.4 THE PROJECT
The Project is the total construction of which the Work performed under the Contract Documents may be the whole
or a part and which may include construction by the Owner and by separate contractors.
§ 1.1.5 THE DRAWINGS
The Drawings are the graphic and pictorial portions of the Contract Documents showing the design, location and
dimensions of the Work, generally including plans, elevations, sections, details, schedules and diagrams.
§ 1.1.6 THE SPECIFICATIONS
The Specifications are that portion of the Contract Documents consisting of the written requirements for materials,
equipment, systems, standards and workmanship for the Work, and performance of related services.
§ 1.1.7 INSTRUMENTS OF SERVICE
Instruments of Service are representations, in any medium of expression now known or later developed, of the
tangible and intangible creative work performed by the Architect and the Architect’s consultants under their
respective professional services agreements. Instruments of Service may include, without limitation, studies,
surveys, models, sketches, drawings, specifications, and other similar materials.
§ 1.1.8 INITIAL DECISION MAKER
The Initial Decision Maker is the person identified in the Agreement to render initial decisions on Claims in
accordance with Section 15.2 and certify termination of the Agreement under Section 14.2.2.
§ 1.2 CORRELATION AND INTENT OF THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
§ 1.2.1 The intent of the Contract Documents is to include all items necessary for the proper execution and
completion of the Work by the Contractor. The Contract Documents are complementary, and what is required by
one shall be as binding as if required by all; performance by the Contractor shall be required only to the extent
consistent with the Contract Documents and reasonably inferable from them as being necessary to produce the
indicated results.
AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The
American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International
Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal
penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.
This document is not an original AIA® Contract Document, but a template produced by AIA® Contract Documents software for producing a
customized document.
11
§ 1.2.2 Organization of the Specifications into divisions, sections and articles, and arrangement of Drawings shall not
control the Contractor in dividing the Work among Subcontractors or in establishing the extent of Work to be
performed by any trade.
§ 1.2.3 Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, words that have well-known technical or construction
industry meanings are used in the Contract Documents in accordance with such recognized meanings.
§ 1.3 CAPITALIZATION
Terms capitalized in these General Conditions include those that are (1) specifically defined, (2) the titles of
numbered articles or (3) the titles of other documents published by the American Institute of Architects.
§ 1.4 INTERPRETATION
In the interest of brevity the Contract Documents frequently omit modifying words such as “all” and “any” and
articles such as “the” and “an,” but the fact that a modifier or an article is absent from one statement and appears in
another is not intended to affect the interpretation of either statement.
§ 1.5 OWNERSHIP AND USE OF DRAWINGS, SPECIFICATIONS AND OTHER INSTRUMENTS OF SERVICE
§ 1.5.1 The Architect and the Architect’s consultants shall be deemed the authors and owners of their respective
Instruments of Service, including the Drawings and Specifications, and will retain all common law, statutory and
other reserved rights, including copyrights. The Contractor, Subcontractors, Sub-subcontractors, and material or
equipment suppliers shall not own or claim a copyright in the Instruments of Service. Submittal or distribution to
meet official regulatory requirements or for other purposes in connection with this Project is not to be construed as
publication in derogation of the Architect’s or Architect’s consultants’ reserved rights.
§ 1.5.2 The Contractor, Subcontractors, Sub-subcontractors and material or equipment suppliers are authorized to use
and reproduce the Instruments of Service provided to them solely and exclusively for execution of the Work. All
copies made under this authorization shall bear the copyright notice, if any, shown on the Instruments of Service.
The Contractor, Subcontractors, Sub-subcontractors, and material or equipment suppliers may not use the
Instruments of Service on other projects or for additions to this Project outside the scope of the Work without the
specific written consent of the Owner, Architect and the Architect’s consultants.
§ 1.6 TRANSMISSION OF DATA IN DIGITAL FORM
If the parties intend to transmit Instruments of Service or any other information or documentation in digital form,
they shall endeavor to establish necessary protocols governing such transmissions, unless otherwise already
provided in the Agreement or the Contract Documents.
ARTICLE 2 OWNER
§ 2.1 GENERAL
§ 2.1.1 The Owner is the person or entity identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the
Contract Documents as if singular in number. The Owner shall designate in writing a representative who shall have
express authority to bind the Owner with respect to all matters requiring the Owner’s approval or authorization.
Except as otherwise provided in Section 4.2.1, the Architect does not have such authority. The term “Owner” means
the Owner or the Owner’s authorized representative.
§ 2.1.2 The Owner shall furnish to the Contractor within fifteen days after receipt of a written request, information
necessary and relevant for the Contractor to evaluate, give notice of or enforce mechanic’s lien rights. Such
information shall include a correct statement of the record legal title to the property on which the Project is located,
usually referred to as the site, and the Owner’s interest therein.
§ 2.2 INFORMATION AND SERVICES REQUIRED OF THE OWNER
§ 2.2.1 Prior to commencement of the Work, the Contractor may request in writing that the Owner provide
reasonable evidence that the Owner has made financial arrangements to fulfill the Owner’s obligations under the
Contract. Thereafter, the Contractor may only request such evidence if (1) the Owner fails to make payments to the
Contractor as the Contract Documents require; (2) a change in the Work materially changes the Contract Sum; or (3)
the Contractor identifies in writing a reasonable concern regarding the Owner’s ability to make payment when due.
The Owner shall furnish such evidence as a condition precedent to commencement or continuation of the Work or
AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The
American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International
Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal
penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.
This document is not an original AIA® Contract Document, but a template produced by AIA® Contract Documents software for producing a
customized document.
12
the portion of the Work affected by a material change. After the Owner furnishes the evidence, the Owner shall not
materially vary such financial arrangements without prior notice to the Contractor.
§ 2.2.2 Except for permits and fees that are the responsibility of the Contractor under the Contract Documents,
including those required under Section 3.7.1, the Owner shall secure and pay for necessary approvals, easements,
assessments and charges required for construction, use or occupancy of permanent structures or for permanent
changes in existing facilities.
§ 2.2.3 The Owner shall furnish surveys describing physical characteristics, legal limitations and utility locations for
the site of the Project, and a legal description of the site. The Contractor shall be entitled to rely on the accuracy of
information furnished by the Owner but shall exercise proper precautions relating to the safe performance of the
Work.
§ 2.2.4 The Owner shall furnish information or services required of the Owner by the Contract Documents with
reasonable promptness. The Owner shall also furnish any other information or services under the Owner’s control
and relevant to the Contractor’s performance of the Work with reasonable promptness after receiving the
Contractor’s written request for such information or services.
§ 2.2.5 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Owner shall furnish to the Contractor one copy of
the Contract Documents for purposes of making reproductions pursuant to Section 1.5.2.
§ 2.3 OWNER’S RIGHT TO STOP THE WORK
If the Contractor fails to correct Work that is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents as
required by Section 12.2 or repeatedly fails to carry out Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, the
Owner may issue a written order to the Contractor to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for such
order has been eliminated; however, the right of the Owner to stop the Work shall not give rise to a duty on the part
of the Owner to exercise this right for the benefit of the Contractor or any other person or entity, except to the extent
required by Section 6.1.3.
§ 2.4 OWNER’S RIGHT TO CARRY OUT THE WORK
If the Contractor defaults or neglects to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents and fails
within a ten-day period after receipt of written notice from the Owner to commence and continue correction of such
default or neglect with diligence and promptness, the Owner may, without prejudice to other remedies the Owner
may have, correct such deficiencies. In such case an appropriate Change Order shall be issued deducting from
payments then or thereafter due the Contractor the reasonable cost of correcting such deficiencies, including
Owner’s expenses and compensation for the Architect’s additional services made necessary by such default, neglect
or failure. Such action by the Owner and amounts charged to the Contractor are both subject to prior approval of the
Architect. If payments then or thereafter due the Contractor are not sufficient to cover such amounts, the Contractor
shall pay the difference to the Owner.
ARTICLE 3 CONTRACTOR
§ 3.1 GENERAL
§ 3.1.1 The Contractor is the person or entity identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the
Contract Documents as if singular in number. The Contractor shall be lawfully licensed, if required in the
jurisdiction where the Project is located. The Contractor shall designate in writing a representative who shall have
express authority to bind the Contractor with respect to all matters under this Contract. The term “Contractor” means
the Contractor or the Contractor’s authorized representative.
§ 3.1.2 The Contractor shall perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.
§ 3.1.3 The Contractor shall not be relieved of obligations to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract
Documents either by activities or duties of the Architect in the Architect’s administration of the Contract, or by tests,
inspections or approvals required or performed by persons or entities other than the Contractor.
AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The
American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International
Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal
penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.
This document is not an original AIA® Contract Document, but a template produced by AIA® Contract Documents software for producing a
customized document.
13
§ 3.2 REVIEW OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND FIELD CONDITIONS BY CONTRACTOR
§ 3.2.1 Execution of the Contract by the Contractor is a representation that the Contractor has visited the site, become
generally familiar with local conditions under which the Work is to be performed and correlated personal
observations with requirements of the Contract Documents.
§ 3.2.2 Because the Contract Documents are complementary, the Contractor shall, before starting each portion of the
Work, carefully study and compare the various Contract Documents relative to that portion of the Work, as well as
the information furnished by the Owner pursuant to Section 2.2.3, shall take field measurements of any existing
conditions related to that portion of the Work, and shall observe any conditions at the site affecting it. These
obligations are for the purpose of facilitating coordination and construction by the Contractor and are not for the
purpose of discovering errors, omissions, or inconsistencies in the Contract Documents; however, the Contractor
shall promptly report to the Architect any errors, inconsistencies or omissions discovered by or made known to the
Contractor as a request for information in such form as the Architect may require. It is recognized that the
Contractor’s review is made in the Contractor’s capacity as a contractor and not as a licensed design professional,
unless otherwise specifically provided in the Contract Documents.
§ 3.2.3 The Contractor is not required to ascertain that the Contract Documents are in accordance with applicable
laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, or lawful orders of public authorities, but the Contractor
shall promptly report to the Architect any nonconformity discovered by or made known to the Contractor as a
request for information in such form as the Architect may require.
§ 3.2.4 If the Contractor believes that additional cost or time is involved because of clarifications or instructions the
Architect issues in response to the Contractor’s notices or requests for information pursuant to Sections 3.2.2 or
3.2.3, the Contractor shall make Claims as provided in Article 15. If the Contractor fails to perform the obligations
of Sections 3.2.2 or 3.2.3, the Contractor shall pay such costs and damages to the Owner as would have been
avoided if the Contractor had performed such obligations. If the Contractor performs those obligations, the
Contractor shall not be liable to the Owner or Architect for damages resulting from errors, inconsistencies or
omissions in the Contract Documents, for differences between field measurements or conditions and the Contract
Documents, or for nonconformities of the Contract Documents to applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules
and regulations, and lawful orders of public authorities.
§ 3.3 SUPERVISION AND CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES
§ 3.3.1 The Contractor shall supervise and direct the Work, using the Contractor’s best skill and attention. The
Contractor shall be solely responsible for, and have control over, construction means, methods, techniques,
sequences and procedures and for coordinating all portions of the Work under the Contract, unless the Contract
Documents give other specific instructions concerning these matters. If the Contract Documents give specific
instructions concerning construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, the Contractor shall
evaluate the jobsite safety thereof and, except as stated below, shall be fully and solely responsible for the jobsite
safety of such means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures. If the Contractor determines that such means,
methods, techniques, sequences or procedures may not be safe, the Contractor shall give timely written notice to the
Owner and Architect and shall not proceed with that portion of the Work without further written instructions from
the Architect. If the Contractor is then instructed to proceed with the required means, methods, techniques,
sequences or procedures without acceptance of changes proposed by the Contractor, the Owner shall be solely
responsible for any loss or damage arising solely from those Owner-required means, methods, techniques, sequences
or procedures.
§ 3.3.2 The Contractor shall be responsible to the Owner for acts and omissions of the Contractor’s employees,
Subcontractors and their agents and employees, and other persons or entities performing portions of the Work for, or
on behalf of, the Contractor or any of its Subcontractors.
§ 3.3.3 The Contractor shall be responsible for inspection of portions of Work already performed to determine that
such portions are in proper condition to receive subsequent Work.
§ 3.4 LABOR AND MATERIALS
§ 3.4.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall provide and pay for labor,
materials, equipment, tools, construction equipment and machinery, water, heat, utilities, transportation, and other
AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The
American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International
Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal
penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.
This document is not an original AIA® Contract Document, but a template produced by AIA® Contract Documents software for producing a
customized document.
14
facilities and services necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work, whether temporary or permanent
and whether or not incorporated or to be incorporated in the Work.
§ 3.4.2 Except in the case of minor changes in the Work authorized by the Architect in accordance with Sections
3.12.8 or 7.4, the Contractor may make substitutions only with the consent of the Owner, after evaluation by the
Architect and in accordance with a Change Order or Construction Change Directive.
§ 3.4.3 The Contractor shall enforce strict discipline and good order among the Contractor’s employees and other
persons carrying out the Work. The Contractor shall not permit employment of unfit persons or persons not properly
skilled in tasks assigned to them.
§ 3.5 WARRANTY
The Contractor warrants to the Owner and Architect that materials and equipment furnished under the Contract will
be of good quality and new unless the Contract Documents require or permit otherwise. The Contractor further
warrants that the Work will conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents and will be free from defects,
except for those inherent in the quality of the Work the Contract Documents require or permit. Work, materials, or
equipment not conforming to these requirements may be considered defective. The Contractor’s warranty excludes
remedy for damage or defect caused by abuse, alterations to the Work not executed by the Contractor, improper or
insufficient maintenance, improper operation, or normal wear and tear and normal usage. If required by the
Architect, the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials and equipment.
§ 3.6 TAXES
The Contractor shall pay sales, consumer, use and similar taxes for the Work provided by the Contractor that are
legally enacted when bids are received or negotiations concluded, whether or not yet effective or merely scheduled
to go into effect.
§ 3.7 PERMITS, FEES, NOTICES AND COMPLIANCE WITH LAWS
§ 3.7.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall secure and pay for the building
permit as well as for other permits, fees, licenses, and inspections by government agencies necessary for proper
execution and completion of the Work that are customarily secured after execution of the Contract and legally
required at the time bids are received or negotiations concluded.
§ 3.7.2 The Contractor shall comply with and give notices required by applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes,
rules and regulations, and lawful orders of public authorities applicable to performance of the Work.
§ 3.7.3 If the Contractor performs Work knowing it to be contrary to applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes,
rules and regulations, or lawful orders of public authorities, the Contractor shall assume appropriate responsibility
for such Work and shall bear the costs attributable to correction.
§ 3.7.4 Concealed or Unknown Conditions. If the Contractor encounters conditions at the site that are (1)
subsurface or otherwise concealed physical conditions that differ materially from those indicated in the Contract
Documents or (2) unknown physical conditions of an unusual nature, that differ materially from those ordinarily
found to exist and generally recognized as inherent in construction activities of the character provided for in the
Contract Documents, the Contractor shall promptly provide notice to the Owner and the Architect before conditions
are disturbed and in no event later than 21 days after first observance of the conditions. The Architect will promptly
investigate such conditions and, if the Architect determines that they differ materially and cause an increase or
decrease in the Contractor’s cost of, or time required for, performance of any part of the Work, will recommend an
equitable adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time, or both. If the Architect determines that the conditions
at the site are not materially different from those indicated in the Contract Documents and that no change in the
terms of the Contract is justified, the Architect shall promptly notify the Owner and Contractor in writing, stating the
reasons. If either party disputes the Architect’s determination or recommendation, that party may proceed as
provided in Article 15.
§ 3.7.5 If, in the course of the Work, the Contractor encounters human remains or recognizes the existence of burial
markers, archaeological sites or wetlands not indicated in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall immediately
suspend any operations that would affect them and shall notify the Owner and Architect. Upon receipt of such
notice, the Owner shall promptly take any action necessary to obtain governmental authorization required to resume
AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The
American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International
Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal
penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.
This document is not an original AIA® Contract Document, but a template produced by AIA® Contract Documents software for producing a
customized document.
15
the operations. The Contractor shall continue to suspend such operations until otherwise instructed by the Owner but
shall continue with all other operations that do not affect those remains or features. Requests for adjustments in the
Contract Sum and Contract Time arising from the existence of such remains or features may be made as provided in
Article 15.
§ 3.8 ALLOWANCES
§ 3.8.1 The Contractor shall include in the Contract Sum all allowances stated in the Contract Documents. Items
covered by allowances shall be supplied for such amounts and by such persons or entities as the Owner may direct,
but the Contractor shall not be required to employ persons or entities to whom the Contractor has reasonable
objection.
§ 3.8.2 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents,
.1
Allowances shall cover the cost to the Contractor of materials and equipment delivered at the site and
all required taxes, less applicable trade discounts;
.2
Contractor’s costs for unloading and handling at the site, labor, installation costs, overhead, profit and
other expenses contemplated for stated allowance amounts shall be included in the Contract Sum but
not in the allowances; and
.3
Whenever costs are more than or less than allowances, the Contract Sum shall be adjusted
accordingly by Change Order. The amount of the Change Order shall reflect (1) the difference
between actual costs and the allowances under Section 3.8.2.1 and (2) changes in Contractor’s costs
under Section 3.8.2.2.
§ 3.8.3 Materials and equipment under an allowance shall be selected by the Owner with reasonable promptness.
§ 3.9 SUPERINTENDENT
§ 3.9.1 The Contractor shall employ a competent superintendent and necessary assistants who shall be in attendance
at the Project site during performance of the Work. The superintendent shall represent the Contractor, and
communications given to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given to the Contractor.
§ 3.9.2 The Contractor, as soon as practicable after award of the Contract, shall furnish in writing to the Owner
through the Architect the name and qualifications of a proposed superintendent. The Architect may reply within 14
days to the Contractor in writing stating (1) whether the Owner or the Architect has reasonable objection to the
proposed superintendent or (2) that the Architect requires additional time to review. Failure of the Architect to reply
within the 14 day period shall constitute notice of no reasonable objection.
§ 3.9.3 The Contractor shall not employ a proposed superintendent to whom the Owner or Architect has made
reasonable and timely objection. The Contractor shall not change the superintendent without the Owner’s consent,
which shall not unreasonably be withheld or delayed.
§ 3.10 CONTRACTOR’S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES
§ 3.10.1 The Contractor, promptly after being awarded the Contract, shall prepare and submit for the Owner’s and
Architect’s information a Contractor’s construction schedule for the Work. The schedule shall not exceed time limits
current under the Contract Documents, shall be revised at appropriate intervals as required by the conditions of the
Work and Project, shall be related to the entire Project to the extent required by the Contract Documents, and shall
provide for expeditious and practicable execution of the Work.
§ 3.10.2 The Contractor shall prepare a submittal schedule, promptly after being awarded the Contract and thereafter
as necessary to maintain a current submittal schedule, and shall submit the schedule(s) for the Architect’s approval.
The Architect’s approval shall not unreasonably be delayed or withheld. The submittal schedule shall (1) be
coordinated with the Contractor’s construction schedule, and (2) allow the Architect reasonable time to review
submittals. If the Contractor fails to submit a submittal schedule, the Contractor shall not be entitled to any increase
in Contract Sum or extension of Contract Time based on the time required for review of submittals.
§ 3.10.3 The Contractor shall perform the Work in general accordance with the most recent schedules submitted to
the Owner and Architect.
AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The
American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International
Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal
penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.
This document is not an original AIA® Contract Document, but a template produced by AIA® Contract Documents software for producing a
customized document.
16
§ 3.11 DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES AT THE SITE
The Contractor shall maintain at the site for the Owner one copy of the Drawings, Specifications, Addenda, Change
Orders and other Modifications, in good order and marked currently to indicate field changes and selections made
during construction, and one copy of approved Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar required
submittals. These shall be available to the Architect and shall be delivered to the Architect for submittal to the
Owner upon completion of the Work as a record of the Work as constructed.
§ 3.12 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES
§ 3.12.1 Shop Drawings are drawings, diagrams, schedules and other data specially prepared for the Work by the
Contractor or a Subcontractor, Sub-subcontractor, manufacturer, supplier or distributor to illustrate some portion of
the Work.
§ 3.12.2 Product Data are illustrations, standard schedules, performance charts, instructions, brochures, diagrams and
other information furnished by the Contractor to illustrate materials or equipment for some portion of the Work.
§ 3.12.3 Samples are physical examples that illustrate materials, equipment or workmanship and establish standards
by which the Work will be judged.
§ 3.12.4 Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar submittals are not Contract Documents. Their purpose is
to demonstrate the way by which the Contractor proposes to conform to the information given and the design
concept expressed in the Contract Documents for those portions of the Work for which the Contract Documents
require submittals. Review by the Architect is subject to the limitations of Section 4.2.7. Informational submittals
upon which the Architect is not expected to take responsive action may be so identified in the Contract Documents.
Submittals that are not required by the Contract Documents may be returned by the Architect without action.
§ 3.12.5 The Contractor shall review for compliance with the Contract Documents, approve and submit to the
Architect Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar submittals required by the Contract Documents in
accordance with the submittal schedule approved by the Architect or, in the absence of an approved submittal
schedule, with reasonable promptness and in such sequence as to cause no delay in the Work or in the activities of
the Owner or of separate contractors.
§ 3.12.6 By submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar submittals, the Contractor represents to
the Owner and Architect that the Contractor has (1) reviewed and approved them, (2) determined and verified
materials, field measurements and field construction criteria related thereto, or will do so and (3) checked and
coordinated the information contained within such submittals with the requirements of the Work and of the Contract
Documents.
§ 3.12.7 The Contractor shall perform no portion of the Work for which the Contract Documents require submittal
and review of Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples or similar submittals until the respective submittal has been
approved by the Architect.
§ 3.12.8 The Work shall be in accordance with approved submittals except that the Contractor shall not be relieved of
responsibility for deviations from requirements of the Contract Documents by the Architect’s approval of Shop
Drawings, Product Data, Samples or similar submittals unless the Contractor has specifically informed the Architect
in writing of such deviation at the time of submittal and (1) the Architect has given written approval to the specific
deviation as a minor change in the Work, or (2) a Change Order or Construction Change Directive has been issued
authorizing the deviation. The Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for errors or omissions in Shop
Drawings, Product Data, Samples or similar submittals by the Architect’s approval thereof.
§ 3.12.9 The Contractor shall direct specific attention, in writing or on resubmitted Shop Drawings, Product Data,
Samples or similar submittals, to revisions other than those requested by the Architect on previous submittals. In the
absence of such written notice, the Architect’s approval of a resubmission shall not apply to such revisions.
§ 3.12.10 The Contractor shall not be required to provide professional services that constitute the practice of
architecture or engineering unless such services are specifically required by the Contract Documents for a portion of
the Work or unless the Contractor needs to provide such services in order to carry out the Contractor’s
responsibilities for construction means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures. The Contractor shall not be
AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The
American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International
Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal
penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.
This document is not an original AIA® Contract Document, but a template produced by AIA® Contract Documents software for producing a
customized document.
17
required to provide professional services in violation of applicable law. If professional design services or
certifications by a design professional related to systems, materials or equipment are specifically required of the
Contractor by the Contract Documents, the Owner and the Architect will specify all performance and design criteria
that such services must satisfy. The Contractor shall cause such services or certifications to be provided by a
properly licensed design professional, whose signature and seal shall appear on all drawings, calculations,
specifications, certifications, Shop Drawings and other submittals prepared by such professional. Shop Drawings
and other submittals related to the Work designed or certified by such professional, if prepared by others, shall bear
such professional’s written approval when submitted to the Architect. The Owner and the Architect shall be entitled
to rely upon the adequacy, accuracy and completeness of the services, certifications and approvals performed or
provided by such design professionals, provided the Owner and Architect have specified to the Contractor all
performance and design criteria that such services must satisfy. Pursuant to this Section 3.12.10, the Architect will
review, approve or take other appropriate action on submittals only for the limited purpose of checking for
conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents. The Contractor
shall not be responsible for the adequacy of the performance and design criteria specified in the Contract
Documents.
§ 3.13 USE OF SITE
The Contractor shall confine operations at the site to areas permitted by applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes,
rules and regulations, and lawful orders of public authorities and the Contract Documents and shall not unreasonably
encumber the site with materials or equipment.
§ 3.14 CUTTING AND PATCHING
§ 3.14.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for cutting, fitting or patching required to complete the Work or to make
its parts fit together properly. All areas requiring cutting, fitting and patching shall be restored to the condition
existing prior to the cutting, fitting and patching, unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents.
§ 3.14.2 The Contractor shall not damage or endanger a portion of the Work or fully or partially completed
construction of the Owner or separate contractors by cutting, patching or otherwise altering such construction, or by
excavation. The Contractor shall not cut or otherwise alter such construction by the Owner or a separate contractor
except with written consent of the Owner and of such separate contractor; such consent shall not be unreasonably
withheld. The Contractor shall not unreasonably withhold from the Owner or a separate contractor the Contractor’s
consent to cutting or otherwise altering the Work.
§ 3.15 CLEANING UP
§ 3.15.1 The Contractor shall keep the premises and surrounding area free from accumulation of waste materials or
rubbish caused by operations under the Contract. At completion of the Work, the Contractor shall remove waste
materials, rubbish, the Contractor’s tools, construction equipment, machinery and surplus materials from and about
the Project.
§ 3.15.2 If the Contractor fails to clean up as provided in the Contract Documents, the Owner may do so and Owner
shall be entitled to reimbursement from the Contractor.
§ 3.16 ACCESS TO WORK
The Contractor shall provide the Owner and Architect access to the Work in preparation and progress wherever
located.
§ 3.17 ROYALTIES, PATENTS AND COPYRIGHTS
The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees. The Contractor shall defend suits or claims for infringement
of copyrights and patent rights and shall hold the Owner and Architect harmless from loss on account thereof, but
shall not be responsible for such defense or loss when a particular design, process or product of a particular
manufacturer or manufacturers is required by the Contract Documents, or where the copyright violations are
contained in Drawings, Specifications or other documents prepared by the Owner or Architect. However, if the
Contractor has reason to believe that the required design, process or product is an infringement of a copyright or a
patent, the Contractor shall be responsible for such loss unless such information is promptly furnished to the
Architect.
AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The
American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International
Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal
penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.
This document is not an original AIA® Contract Document, but a template produced by AIA® Contract Documents software for producing a
customized document.
18
§ 3.18 INDEMNIFICATION
§ 3.18.1 To the fullest extent permitted by law the Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the Owner,
Architect, Architect’s consultants, and agents and employees of any of them from and against claims, damages,
losses and expenses, including but not limited to attorneys’ fees, arising out of or resulting from performance of the
Work, provided that such claim, damage, loss or expense is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease or death,
or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than the Work itself), but only to the extent caused by the
negligent acts or omissions of the Contractor, a Subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by them or
anyone for whose acts they may be liable, regardless of whether or not such claim, damage, loss or expense is
caused in part by a party indemnified hereunder. Such obligation shall not be construed to negate, abridge, or reduce
other rights or obligations of indemnity that would otherwise exist as to a party or person described in this Section
3.18.
§ 3.18.2 In claims against any person or entity indemnified under this Section 3.18 by an employee of the Contractor,
a Subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by them or anyone for whose acts they may be liable, the
indemnification obligation under Section 3.18.1 shall not be limited by a limitation on amount or type of damages,
compensation or benefits payable by or for the Contractor or a Subcontractor under workers’ compensation acts,
disability benefit acts or other employee benefit acts.
ARTICLE 4 ARCHITECT
§ 4.1 GENERAL
§ 4.1.1 The Owner shall retain an architect lawfully licensed to practice architecture or an entity lawfully practicing
architecture in the jurisdiction where the Project is located. That person or entity is identified as the Architect in the
Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number.
§ 4.1.2 Duties, responsibilities and limitations of authority of the Architect as set forth in the Contract Documents
shall not be restricted, modified or extended without written consent of the Owner, Contractor and Architect.
Consent shall not be unreasonably withheld.
§ 4.1.3 If the employment of the Architect is terminated, the Owner shall employ a successor architect as to whom
the Contractor has no reasonable objection and whose status under the Contract Documents shall be that of the
Architect.
§ 4.2 ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT
§ 4.2.1 The Architect will provide administration of the Contract as described in the Contract Documents and will be
an Owner’s representative during construction until the date the Architect issues the final Certificate for Payment.
The Architect will have authority to act on behalf of the Owner only to the extent provided in the Contract
Documents.
§ 4.2.2 The Architect will visit the site at intervals appropriate to the stage of construction, or as otherwise agreed
with the Owner, to become generally familiar with the progress and quality of the portion of the Work completed,
and to determine in general if the Work observed is being performed in a manner indicating that the Work, when
fully completed, will be in accordance with the Contract Documents. However, the Architect will not be required to
make exhaustive or continuous on-site inspections to check the quality or quantity of the Work. The Architect will
not have control over, charge of, or responsibility for, the construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or
procedures, or for the safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work, since these are solely the
Contractor’s rights and responsibilities under the Contract Documents, except as provided in Section 3.3.1.
§ 4.2.3 On the basis of the site visits, the Architect will keep the Owner reasonably informed about the progress and
quality of the portion of the Work completed, and report to the Owner (1) known deviations from the Contract
Documents and from the most recent construction schedule submitted by the Contractor, and (2) defects and
deficiencies observed in the Work. The Architect will not be responsible for the Contractor’s failure to perform the
Work in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. The Architect will not have control over or
charge of and will not be responsible for acts or omissions of the Contractor, Subcontractors, or their agents or
employees, or any other persons or entities performing portions of the Work.
AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The
American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International
Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal
penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.
This document is not an original AIA® Contract Document, but a template produced by AIA® Contract Documents software for producing a
customized document.
19
§ 4.2.4 COMMUNICATIONS FACILITATING CONTRACT ADMINISTRATION
Except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents or when direct communications have been specially
authorized, the Owner and Contractor shall endeavor to communicate with each other through the Architect about
matters arising out of or relating to the Contract. Communications by and with the Architect’s consultants shall be
through the Architect. Communications by and with Subcontractors and material suppliers shall be through the
Contractor. Communications by and with separate contractors shall be through the Owner.
§ 4.2.5 Based on the Architect’s evaluations of the Contractor’s Applications for Payment, the Architect will review
and certify the amounts due the Contractor and will issue Certificates for Payment in such amounts.
§ 4.2.6 The Architect has authority to reject Work that does not conform to the Contract Documents. Whenever the
Architect considers it necessary or advisable, the Architect will have authority to require inspection or testing of the
Work in accordance with Sections 13.5.2 and 13.5.3, whether or not such Work is fabricated, installed or completed.
However, neither this authority of the Architect nor a decision made in good faith either to exercise or not to
exercise such authority shall give rise to a duty or responsibility of the Architect to the Contractor, Subcontractors,
material and equipment suppliers, their agents or employees, or other persons or entities performing portions of the
Work.
§ 4.2.7 The Architect will review and approve, or take other appropriate action upon, the Contractor’s submittals
such as Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples, but only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance
with information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents. The Architect’s action will be
taken in accordance with the submittal schedule approved by the Architect or, in the absence of an approved
submittal schedule, with reasonable promptness while allowing sufficient time in the Architect’s professional
judgment to permit adequate review. Review of such submittals is not conducted for the purpose of determining the
accuracy and completeness of other details such as dimensions and quantities, or for substantiating instructions for
installation or performance of equipment or systems, all of which remain the responsibility of the Contractor as
required by the Contract Documents. The Architect’s review of the Contractor’s submittals shall not relieve the
Contractor of the obligations under Sections 3.3, 3.5 and 3.12. The Architect’s review shall not constitute approval
of safety precautions or, unless otherwise specifically stated by the Architect, of any construction means, methods,
techniques, sequences or procedures. The Architect’s approval of a specific item shall not indicate approval of an
assembly of which the item is a component.
§ 4.2.8 The Architect will prepare Change Orders and Construction Change Directives, and may authorize minor
changes in the Work as provided in Section 7.4. The Architect will investigate and make determinations and
recommendations regarding concealed and unknown conditions as provided in Section 3.7.4.
§ 4.2.9 The Architect will conduct inspections to determine the date or dates of Substantial Completion and the date
of final completion; issue Certificates of Substantial Completion pursuant to Section 9.8; receive and forward to the
Owner, for the Owner’s review and records, written warranties and related documents required by the Contract and
assembled by the Contractor pursuant to Section 9.10; and issue a final Certificate for Payment pursuant to Section
9.10.
§ 4.2.10 If the Owner and Architect agree, the Architect will provide one or more project representatives to assist in
carrying out the Architect’s responsibilities at the site. The duties, responsibilities and limitations of authority of
such project representatives shall be as set forth in an exhibit to be incorporated in the Contract Documents.
§ 4.2.11 The Architect will interpret and decide matters concerning performance under, and requirements of, the
Contract Documents on written request of either the Owner or Contractor. The Architect’s response to such requests
will be made in writing within any time limits agreed upon or otherwise with reasonable promptness.
§ 4.2.12 Interpretations and decisions of the Architect will be consistent with the intent of, and reasonably inferable
from, the Contract Documents and will be in writing or in the form of drawings. When making such interpretations
and decisions, the Architect will endeavor to secure faithful performance by both Owner and Contractor, will not
show partiality to either and will not be liable for results of interpretations or decisions rendered in good faith.
§ 4.2.13 The Architect’s decisions on matters relating to aesthetic effect will be final if consistent with the intent
expressed in the Contract Documents.
AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The
American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International
Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal
penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.
This document is not an original AIA® Contract Document, but a template produced by AIA® Contract Documents software for producing a
customized document.
20
§ 4.2.14 The Architect will review and respond to requests for information about the Contract Documents. The
Architect’s response to such requests will be made in writing within any time limits agreed upon or otherwise with
reasonable promptness. If appropriate, the Architect will prepare and issue supplemental Drawings and
Specifications in response to the requests for information.
ARTICLE 5 SUBCONTRACTORS
§ 5.1 DEFINITIONS
§ 5.1.1 A Subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct contract with the Contractor to perform a portion of the
Work at the site. The term “Subcontractor” is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in
number and means a Subcontractor or an authorized representative of the Subcontractor. The term “Subcontractor”
does not include a separate contractor or subcontractors of a separate contractor.
§ 5.1.2 A Sub-subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct or indirect contract with a Subcontractor to
perform a portion of the Work at the site. The term “Sub-subcontractor” is referred to throughout the Contract
Documents as if singular in number and means a Sub-subcontractor or an authorized representative of the Subsubcontractor.
§ 5.2 AWARD OF SUBCONTRACTS AND OTHER CONTRACTS FOR PORTIONS OF THE WORK
§ 5.2.1 Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents or the bidding requirements, the Contractor, as soon as
practicable after award of the Contract, shall furnish in writing to the Owner through the Architect the names of
persons or entities (including those who are to furnish materials or equipment fabricated to a special design)
proposed for each principal portion of the Work. The Architect may reply within 14 days to the Contractor in
writing stating (1) whether the Owner or the Architect has reasonable objection to any such proposed person or
entity or (2) that the Architect requires additional time for review. Failure of the Owner or Architect to reply within
the 14-day period shall constitute notice of no reasonable objection.
§ 5.2.2 The Contractor shall not contract with a proposed person or entity to whom the Owner or Architect has made
reasonable and timely objection. The Contractor shall not be required to contract with anyone to whom the
Contractor has made reasonable objection.
§ 5.2.3 If the Owner or Architect has reasonable objection to a person or entity proposed by the Contractor, the
Contractor shall propose another to whom the Owner or Architect has no reasonable objection. If the proposed but
rejected Subcontractor was reasonably capable of performing the Work, the Contract Sum and Contract Time shall
be increased or decreased by the difference, if any, occasioned by such change, and an appropriate Change Order
shall be issued before commencement of the substitute Subcontractor’s Work. However, no increase in the Contract
Sum or Contract Time shall be allowed for such change unless the Contractor has acted promptly and responsively
in submitting names as required.
§ 5.2.4 The Contractor shall not substitute a Subcontractor, person or entity previously selected if the Owner or
Architect makes reasonable objection to such substitution.
§ 5.3 SUBCONTRACTUAL RELATIONS
By appropriate agreement, written where legally required for validity, the Contractor shall require each
Subcontractor, to the extent of the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor, to be bound to the Contractor by
terms of the Contract Documents, and to assume toward the Contractor all the obligations and responsibilities,
including the responsibility for safety of the Subcontractor’s Work, which the Contractor, by these Documents,
assumes toward the Owner and Architect. Each subcontract agreement shall preserve and protect the rights of the
Owner and Architect under the Contract Documents with respect to the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor
so that subcontracting thereof will not prejudice such rights, and shall allow to the Subcontractor, unless specifically
provided otherwise in the subcontract agreement, the benefit of all rights, remedies and redress against the
Contractor that the Contractor, by the Contract Documents, has against the Owner. Where appropriate, the
Contractor shall require each Subcontractor to enter into similar agreements with Sub-subcontractors. The
Contractor shall make available to each proposed Subcontractor, prior to the execution of the subcontract agreement,
copies of the Contract Documents to which the Subcontractor will be bound, and, upon written request of the
Subcontractor, identify to the Subcontractor terms and conditions of the proposed subcontract agreement that may
AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The
American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International
Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal
penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.
This document is not an original AIA® Contract Document, but a template produced by AIA® Contract Documents software for producing a
customized document.
21
be at variance with the Contract Documents. Subcontractors will similarly make copies of applicable portions of
such documents available to their respective proposed Sub-subcontractors.
§ 5.4 CONTINGENT ASSIGNMENT OF SUBCONTRACTS
§ 5.4.1 Each subcontract agreement for a portion of the Work is assigned by the Contractor to the Owner, provided
that
.1
assignment is effective only after termination of the Contract by the Owner for cause pursuant to
Section 14.2 and only for those subcontract agreements that the Owner accepts by notifying the
Subcontractor and Contractor in writing; and
.2
assignment is subject to the prior rights of the surety, if any, obligated under bond relating to the
Contract.
When the Owner accepts the assignment of a subcontract agreement, the Owner assumes the Contractor’s rights and
obligations under the subcontract.
§ 5.4.2 Upon such assignment, if the Work has been suspended for more than 30 days, the Subcontractor’s
compensation shall be equitably adjusted for increases in cost resulting from the suspension.
§ 5.4.3 Upon such assignment to the Owner under this Section 5.4, the Owner may further assign the subcontract to a
successor contractor or other entity. If the Owner assigns the subcontract to a successor contractor or other entity,
the Owner shall nevertheless remain legally responsible for all of the successor contractor’s obligations under the
subcontract.
ARTICLE 6 CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS
§ 6.1 OWNER’S RIGHT TO PERFORM CONSTRUCTION AND TO AWARD SEPARATE CONTRACTS
§ 6.1.1 The Owner reserves the right to perform construction or operations related to the Project with the Owner’s
own forces, and to award separate contracts in connection with other portions of the Project or other construction or
operations on the site under Conditions of the Contract identical or substantially similar to these including those
portions related to insurance and waiver of subrogation. If the Contractor claims that delay or additional cost is
involved because of such action by the Owner, the Contractor shall make such Claim as provided in Article 15.
§ 6.1.2 When separate contracts are awarded for different portions of the Project or other construction or operations
on the site, the term “Contractor” in the Contract Documents in each case shall mean the Contractor who executes
each separate Owner-Contractor Agreement.
§ 6.1.3 The Owner shall provide for coordination of the activities of the Owner’s own forces and of each separate
contractor with the Work of the Contractor, who shall cooperate with them. The Contractor shall participate with
other separate contractors and the Owner in reviewing their construction schedules. The Contractor shall make any
revisions to the construction schedule deemed necessary after a joint review and mutual agreement. The construction
schedules shall then constitute the schedules to be used by the Contractor, separate contractors and the Owner until
subsequently revised.
§ 6.1.4 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, when the Owner performs construction or operations
related to the Project with the Owner’s own forces, the Owner shall be deemed to be subject to the same obligations
and to have the same rights that apply to the Contractor under the Conditions of the Contract, including, without
excluding others, those stated in Article 3, this Article 6 and Articles 10, 11 and 12.
§ 6.2 MUTUAL RESPONSIBILITY
§ 6.2.1 The Contractor shall afford the Owner and separate contractors reasonable opportunity for introduction and
storage of their materials and equipment and performance of their activities, and shall connect and coordinate the
Contractor’s construction and operations with theirs as required by the Contract Documents.
§ 6.2.2 If part of the Contractor’s Work depends for proper execution or results upon construction or operations by
the Owner or a separate contractor, the Contractor shall, prior to proceeding with that portion of the Work, promptly
report to the Architect apparent discrepancies or defects in such other construction that would render it unsuitable
for such proper execution and results. Failure of the Contractor so to report shall constitute an acknowledgment that
AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The
American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International
Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal
penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.
This document is not an original AIA® Contract Document, but a template produced by AIA® Contract Documents software for producing a
customized document.
22
the Owner’s or separate contractor’s completed or partially completed construction is fit and proper to receive the
Contractor’s Work, except as to defects not then reasonably discoverable.
§ 6.2.3 The Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for costs the Owner incurs that are payable to a separate contractor
because of the Contractor’s delays, improperly timed activities or defective construction. The Owner shall be
responsible to the Contractor for costs the Contractor incurs because of a separate contractor’s delays, improperly
timed activities, damage to the Work or defective construction.
§ 6.2.4 The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage the Contractor wrongfully causes to completed or partially
completed construction or to property of the Owner or separate contractors as provided in Section 10.2.5.
§ 6.2.5 The Owner and each separate contractor shall have the same responsibilities for cutting and patching as are
described for the Contractor in Section 3.14.
§ 6.3 OWNER’S RIGHT TO CLEAN UP
If a dispute arises among the Contractor, separate contractors and the Owner as to the responsibility under their
respective contracts for maintaining the premises and surrounding area free from waste materials and rubbish, the
Owner may clean up and the Architect will allocate the cost among those responsible.
ARTICLE 7 CHANGES IN THE WORK
§ 7.1 GENERAL
§ 7.1.1 Changes in the Work may be accomplished after execution of the Contract, and without invalidating the
Contract, by Change Order, Construction Change Directive or order for a minor change in the Work, subject to the
limitations stated in this Article 7 and elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
§ 7.1.2 A Change Order shall be based upon agreement among the Owner, Contractor and Architect; a Construction
Change Directive requires agreement by the Owner and Architect and may or may not be agreed to by the
Contractor; an order for a minor change in the Work may be issued by the Architect alone.
§ 7.1.3 Changes in the Work shall be performed under applicable provisions of the Contract Documents, and the
Contractor shall proceed promptly, unless otherwise provided in the Change Order, Construction Change Directive
or order for a minor change in the Work.
§ 7.2 CHANGE ORDERS
§ 7.2.1 A Change Order is a written instrument prepared by the Architect and signed by the Owner, Contractor and
Architect stating their agreement upon all of the following:
.1
The change in the Work;
.2
The amount of the adjustment, if any, in the Contract Sum; and
.3
The extent of the adjustment, if any, in the Contract Time.
§ 7.3 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVES
§ 7.3.1 A Construction Change Directive is a written order prepared by the Architect and signed by the Owner and
Architect, directing a change in the Work prior to agreement on adjustment, if any, in the Contract Sum or Contract
Time, or both. The Owner may by Construction Change Directive, without invalidating the Contract, order changes
in the Work within the general scope of the Contract consisting of additions, deletions or other revisions, the
Contract Sum and Contract Time being adjusted accordingly.
§ 7.3.2 A Construction Change Directive shall be used in the absence of total agreement on the terms of a Change
Order.
§ 7.3.3 If the Construction Change Directive provides for an adjustment to the Contract Sum, the adjustment shall be
based on one of the following methods:
.1
Mutual acceptance of a lump sum properly itemized and supported by sufficient substantiating data to
permit evaluation;
.2
Unit prices stated in the Contract Documents or subsequently agreed upon;
.3
Cost to be determined in a manner agreed upon by the parties and a mutually acceptable fixed or
percentage fee; or
AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The
American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International
Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal
penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.
This document is not an original AIA® Contract Document, but a template produced by AIA® Contract Documents software for producing a
customized document.
23
.4
As provided in Section 7.3.7.
§ 7.3.4 If unit prices are stated in the Contract Documents or subsequently agreed upon, and if quantities originally
contemplated are materially changed in a proposed Change Order or Construction Change Directive so that
application of such unit prices to quantities of Work proposed will cause substantial inequity to the Owner or
Contractor, the applicable unit prices shall be equitably adjusted.
§ 7.3.5 Upon receipt of a Construction Change Directive, the Contractor shall promptly proceed with the change in
the Work involved and advise the Architect of the Contractor’s agreement or disagreement with the method, if any,
provided in the Construction Change Directive for determining the proposed adjustment in the Contract Sum or
Contract Time.
§ 7.3.6 A Construction Change Directive signed by the Contractor indicates the Contractor’s agreement therewith,
including adjustment in Contract Sum and Contract Time or the method for determining them. Such agreement shall
be effective immediately and shall be recorded as a Change Order.
§ 7.3.7 If the Contractor does not respond promptly or disagrees with the method for adjustment in the Contract Sum,
the Architect shall determine the method and the adjustment on the basis of reasonable expenditures and savings of
those performing the Work attributable to the change, including, in case of an increase in the Contract Sum, an
amount for overhead and profit as set forth in the Agreement, or if no such amount is set forth in the Agreement, a
reasonable amount. In such case, and also under Section 7.3.3.3, the Contractor shall keep and present, in such form
as the Architect may prescribe, an itemized accounting together with appropriate supporting data. Unless otherwise
provided in the Contract Documents, costs for the purposes of this Section 7.3.7 shall be limited to the following:
.1
Costs of labor, including social security, old age and unemployment insurance, fringe benefits
required by agreement or custom, and workers’ compensation insurance;
.2
Costs of materials, supplies and equipment, including cost of transportation, whether incorporated or
consumed;
.3
Rental costs of machinery and equipment, exclusive of hand tools, whether rented from the
Contractor or others;
.4
Costs of premiums for all bonds and insurance, permit fees, and sales, use or similar taxes related to
the Work; and
.5
Additional costs of supervision and field office personnel directly attributable to the change.
§ 7.3.8 The amount of credit to be allowed by the Contractor to the Owner for a deletion or change that results in a
net decrease in the Contract Sum shall be actual net cost as confirmed by the Architect. When both additions and
credits covering related Work or substitutions are involved in a change, the allowance for overhead and profit shall
be figured on the basis of net increase, if any, with respect to that change.
§ 7.3.9 Pending final determination of the total cost of a Construction Change Directive to the Owner, the Contractor
may request payment for Work completed under the Construction Change Directive in Applications for Payment.
The Architect will make an interim determination for purposes of monthly certification for payment for those costs
and certify for payment the amount that the Architect determines, in the Architect’s professional judgment, to be
reasonably justified. The Architect’s interim determination of cost shall adjust the Contract Sum on the same basis
as a Change Order, subject to the right of either party to disagree and assert a Claim in accordance with Article 15.
§ 7.3.10 When the Owner and Contractor agree with a determination made by the Architect concerning the
adjustments in the Contract Sum and Contract Time, or otherwise reach agreement upon the adjustments, such
agreement shall be effective immediately and the Architect will prepare a Change Order. Change Orders may be
issued for all or any part of a Construction Change Directive.
§ 7.4 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK
The Architect has authority to order minor changes in the Work not involving adjustment in the Contract Sum or
extension of the Contract Time and not inconsistent with the intent of the Contract Documents. Such changes will be
effected by written order signed by the Architect and shall be binding on the Owner and Contractor.
AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The
American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International
Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal
penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.
This document is not an original AIA® Contract Document, but a template produced by AIA® Contract Documents software for producing a
customized document.
24
ARTICLE 8 TIME
§ 8.1 DEFINITIONS
§ 8.1.1 Unless otherwise provided, Contract Time is the period of time, including authorized adjustments, allotted in
the Contract Documents for Substantial Completion of the Work.
§ 8.1.2 The date of commencement of the Work is the date established in the Agreement.
§ 8.1.3 The date of Substantial Completion is the date certified by the Architect in accordance with Section 9.8.
§ 8.1.4 The term “day” as used in the Contract Documents shall mean calendar day unless otherwise specifically
defined.
§ 8.2 PROGRESS AND COMPLETION
§ 8.2.1 Time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Contract. By executing the Agreement
the Contractor confirms that the Contract Time is a reasonable period for performing the Work.
§ 8.2.2 The Contractor shall not knowingly, except by agreement or instruction of the Owner in writing, prematurely
commence operations on the site or elsewhere prior to the effective date of insurance required by Article 11 to be
furnished by the Contractor and Owner. The date of commencement of the Work shall not be changed by the
effective date of such insurance.
§ 8.2.3 The Contractor shall proceed expeditiously with adequate forces and shall achieve Substantial Completion
within the Contract Time.
§ 8.3 DELAYS AND EXTENSIONS OF TIME
§ 8.3.1 If the Contractor is delayed at any time in the commencement or progress of the Work by an act or neglect of
the Owner or Architect, or of an employee of either, or of a separate contractor employed by the Owner; or by
changes ordered in the Work; or by labor disputes, fire, unusual delay in deliveries, unavoidable casualties or other
causes beyond the Contractor’s control; or by delay authorized by the Owner pending mediation and arbitration; or
by other causes that the Architect determines may justify delay, then the Contract Time shall be extended by Change
Order for such reasonable time as the Architect may determine.
§ 8.3.2 Claims relating to time shall be made in accordance with applicable provisions of Article 15.
§ 8.3.3 This Section 8.3 does not preclude recovery of damages for delay by either party under other provisions of
the Contract Documents.
ARTICLE 9 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION
§ 9.1 CONTRACT SUM
The Contract Sum is stated in the Agreement and, including authorized adjustments, is the total amount payable by
the Owner to the Contractor for performance of the Work under the Contract Documents.
§ 9.2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES
Where the Contract is based on a stipulated sum or Guaranteed Maximum Price, the Contractor shall submit to the
Architect, before the first Application for Payment, a schedule of values allocating the entire Contract Sum to the
various portions of the Work and prepared in such form and supported by such data to substantiate its accuracy as
the Architect may require. This schedule, unless objected to by the Architect, shall be used as a basis for reviewing
the Contractor’s Applications for Payment.
§ 9.3 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
§ 9.3.1 At least ten days before the date established for each progress payment, the Contractor shall submit to the
Architect an itemized Application for Payment prepared in accordance with the schedule of values, if required under
Section 9.2, for completed portions of the Work. Such application shall be notarized, if required, and supported by
such data substantiating the Contractor’s right to payment as the Owner or Architect may require, such as copies of
requisitions from Subcontractors and material suppliers, and shall reflect retainage if provided for in the Contract
Documents.
AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The
American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International
Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal
penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.
This document is not an original AIA® Contract Document, but a template produced by AIA® Contract Documents software for producing a
customized document.
25
§ 9.3.1.1 As provided in Section 7.3.9, such applications may include requests for payment on account of changes in
the Work that have been properly authorized by Construction Change Directives, or by interim determinations of the
Architect, but not yet included in Change Orders.
§ 9.3.1.2 Applications for Payment shall not include requests for payment for portions of the Work for which the
Contractor does not intend to pay a Subcontractor or material supplier, unless such Work has been performed by
others whom the Contractor intends to pay.
§ 9.3.2 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, payments shall be made on account of materials and
equipment delivered and suitably stored at the site for subsequent incorporation in the Work. If approved in advance
by the Owner, payment may similarly be made for materials and equipment suitably stored off the site at a location
agreed upon in writing. Payment for materials and equipment stored on or off the site shall be conditioned upon
compliance by the Contractor with procedures satisfactory to the Owner to establish the Owner’s title to such
materials and equipment or otherwise protect the Owner’s interest, and shall include the costs of applicable
insurance, storage and transportation to the site for such materials and equipment stored off the site.
§ 9.3.3 The Contractor warrants that title to all Work covered by an Application for Payment will pass to the Owner
no later than the time of payment. The Contractor further warrants that upon submittal of an Application for
Payment all Work for which Certificates for Payment have been previously issued and payments received from the
Owner shall, to the best of the Contractor’s knowledge, information and belief, be free and clear of liens, claims,
security interests or encumbrances in favor of the Contractor, Subcontractors, material suppliers, or other persons or
entities making a claim by reason of having provided labor, materials and equipment relating to the Work.
§ 9.4 CERTIFICATES FOR PAYMENT
§ 9.4.1 The Architect will, within seven days after receipt of the Contractor’s Application for Payment, either issue to
the Owner a Certificate for Payment, with a copy to the Contractor, for such amount as the Architect determines is
properly due, or notify the Contractor and Owner in writing of the Architect’s reasons for withholding certification
in whole or in part as provided in Section 9.5.1.
§ 9.4.2 The issuance of a Certificate for Payment will constitute a representation by the Architect to the Owner,
based on the Architect’s evaluation of the Work and the data comprising the Application for Payment, that, to the
best of the Architect’s knowledge, information and belief, the Work has progressed to the point indicated and that
the quality of the Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents. The foregoing representations are subject to
an evaluation of the Work for conformance with the Contract Documents upon Substantial Completion, to results of
subsequent tests and inspections, to correction of minor deviations from the Contract Documents prior to completion
and to specific qualifications expressed by the Architect. The issuance of a Certificate for Payment will further
constitute a representation that the Contractor is entitled to payment in the amount certified. However, the issuance
of a Certificate for Payment will not be a representation that the Architect has (1) made exhaustive or continuous onsite inspections to check the quality or quantity of the Work, (2) reviewed construction means, methods, techniques,
sequences or procedures, (3) reviewed copies of requisitions received from Subcontractors and material suppliers
and other data requested by the Owner to substantiate the Contractor’s right to payment, or (4) made examination to
ascertain how or for what purpose the Contractor has used money previously paid on account of the Contract Sum.
§ 9.5 DECISIONS TO WITHHOLD CERTIFICATION
§ 9.5.1 The Architect may withhold a Certificate for Payment in whole or in part, to the extent reasonably necessary
to protect the Owner, if in the Architect’s opinion the representations to the Owner required by Section 9.4.2 cannot
be made. If the Architect is unable to certify payment in the amount of the Application, the Architect will notify the
Contractor and Owner as provided in Section 9.4.1. If the Contractor and Architect cannot agree on a revised
amount, the Architect will promptly issue a Certificate for Payment for the amount for which the Architect is able to
make such representations to the Owner. The Architect may also withhold a Certificate for Payment or, because of
subsequently discovered evidence, may nullify the whole or a part of a Certificate for Payment previously issued, to
such extent as may be necessary in the Architect’s opinion to protect the Owner from loss for which the Contractor
is responsible, including loss resulting from acts and omissions described in Section 3.3.2, because of
.1
defective Work not remedied;
.2
third party claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating probable filing of such claims unless
security acceptable to the Owner is provided by the Contractor;
AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The
American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International
Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal
penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.
This document is not an original AIA® Contract Document, but a template produced by AIA® Contract Documents software for producing a
customized document.
26
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
failure of the Contractor to make payments properly to Subcontractors or for labor, materials or
equipment;
reasonable evidence that the Work cannot be completed for the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum;
damage to the Owner or a separate contractor;
reasonable evidence that the Work will not be completed within the Contract Time, and that the
unpaid balance would not be adequate to cover actual or liquidated damages for the anticipated delay;
or
repeated failure to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.
§ 9.5.2 When the above reasons for withholding certification are removed, certification will be made for amounts
previously withheld.
§ 9.5.3 If the Architect withholds certification for payment under Section 9.5.1.3, the Owner may, at its sole option,
issue joint checks to the Contractor and to any Subcontractor or material or equipment suppliers to whom the
Contractor failed to make payment for Work properly performed or material or equipment suitably delivered. If the
Owner makes payments by joint check, the Owner shall notify the Architect and the Architect will reflect such
payment on the next Certificate for Payment.
§ 9.6 PROGRESS PAYMENTS
§ 9.6.1 After the Architect has issued a Certificate for Payment, the Owner shall make payment in the manner and
within the time provided in the Contract Documents, and shall so notify the Architect.
§ 9.6.2 The Contractor shall pay each Subcontractor no later than seven days after receipt of payment from the
Owner the amount to which the Subcontractor is entitled, reflecting percentages actually retained from payments to
the Contractor on account of the Subcontractor’s portion of the Work. The Contractor shall, by appropriate
agreement with each Subcontractor, require each Subcontractor to make payments to Sub-subcontractors in a similar
manner.
§ 9.6.3 The Architect will, on request, furnish to a Subcontractor, if practicable, information regarding percentages of
completion or amounts applied for by the Contractor and action taken thereon by the Architect and Owner on
account of portions of the Work done by such Subcontractor.
§ 9.6.4 The Owner has the right to request written evidence from the Contractor that the Contractor has properly paid
Subcontractors and material and equipment suppliers amounts paid by the Owner to the Contractor for subcontracted
Work. If the Contractor fails to furnish such evidence within seven days, the Owner shall have the right to contact
Subcontractors to ascertain whether they have been properly paid. Neither the Owner nor Architect shall have an
obligation to pay or to see to the payment of money to a Subcontractor, except as may otherwise be required by law.
§ 9.6.5 Contractor payments to material and equipment suppliers shall be treated in a manner similar to that provided
in Sections 9.6.2, 9.6.3 and 9.6.4.
§ 9.6.6 A Certificate for Payment, a progress payment, or partial or entire use or occupancy of the Project by the
Owner shall not constitute acceptance of Work not in accordance with the Contract Documents.
§ 9.6.7 Unless the Contractor provides the Owner with a payment bond in the full penal sum of the Contract Sum,
payments received by the Contractor for Work properly performed by Subcontractors and suppliers shall be held by
the Contractor for those Subcontractors or suppliers who performed Work or furnished materials, or both, under
contract with the Contractor for which payment was made by the Owner. Nothing contained herein shall require
money to be placed in a separate account and not commingled with money of the Contractor, shall create any
fiduciary liability or tort liability on the part of the Contractor for breach of trust or shall entitle any person or entity
to an award of punitive damages against the Contractor for breach of the requirements of this provision.
§ 9.7 FAILURE OF PAYMENT
If the Architect does not issue a Certificate for Payment, through no fault of the Contractor, within seven days after
receipt of the Contractor’s Application for Payment, or if the Owner does not pay the Contractor within seven days
after the date established in the Contract Documents the amount certified by the Architect or awarded by binding
dispute resolution, then the Contractor may, upon seven additional days’ written notice to the Owner and Architect,
AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The
American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International
Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal
penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.
This document is not an original AIA® Contract Document, but a template produced by AIA® Contract Documents software for producing a
customized document.
27
stop the Work until payment of the amount owing has been received. The Contract Time shall be extended
appropriately and the Contract Sum shall be increased by the amount of the Contractor’s reasonable costs of shutdown, delay and start-up, plus interest as provided for in the Contract Documents.
§ 9.8 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
§ 9.8.1 Substantial Completion is the stage in the progress of the Work when the Work or designated portion thereof
is sufficiently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents so that the Owner can occupy or utilize the
Work for its intended use.
§ 9.8.2 When the Contractor considers that the Work, or a portion thereof which the Owner agrees to accept
separately, is substantially complete, the Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Architect a comprehensive list of
items to be completed or corrected prior to final payment. Failure to include an item on such list does not alter the
responsibility of the Contractor to complete all Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.
§ 9.8.3 Upon receipt of the Contractor’s list, the Architect will make an inspection to determine whether the Work or
designated portion thereof is substantially complete. If the Architect’s inspection discloses any item, whether or not
included on the Contractor’s list, which is not sufficiently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents so
that the Owner can occupy or utilize the Work or designated portion thereof for its intended use, the Contractor
shall, before issuance of the Certificate of Substantial Completion, complete or correct such item upon notification
by the Architect. In such case, the Contractor shall then submit a request for another inspection by the Architect to
determine Substantial Completion.
§ 9.8.4 When the Work or designated portion thereof is substantially complete, the Architect will prepare a
Certificate of Substantial Completion that shall establish the date of Substantial Completion, shall establish
responsibilities of the Owner and Contractor for security, maintenance, heat, utilities, damage to the Work and
insurance, and shall fix the time within which the Contractor shall finish all items on the list accompanying the
Certificate. Warranties required by the Contract Documents shall commence on the date of Substantial Completion
of the Work or designated portion thereof unless otherwise provided in the Certificate of Substantial Completion.
§ 9.8.5 The Certificate of Substantial Completion shall be submitted to the Owner and Contractor for their written
acceptance of responsibilities assigned to them in such Certificate. Upon such acceptance and consent of surety, if
any, the Owner shall make payment of retainage applying to such Work or designated portion thereof. Such payment
shall be adjusted for Work that is incomplete or not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.
§ 9.9 PARTIAL OCCUPANCY OR USE
§ 9.9.1 The Owner may occupy or use any completed or partially completed portion of the Work at any stage when
such portion is designated by separate agreement with the Contractor, provided such occupancy or use is consented
to by the insurer as required under Section 11.3.1.5 and authorized by public authorities having jurisdiction over the
Project. Such partial occupancy or use may commence whether or not the portion is substantially complete, provided
the Owner and Contractor have accepted in writing the responsibilities assigned to each of them for payments,
retainage, if any, security, maintenance, heat, utilities, damage to the Work and insurance, and have agreed in
writing concerning the period for correction of the Work and commencement of warranties required by the Contract
Documents. When the Contractor considers a portion substantially complete, the Contractor shall prepare and
submit a list to the Architect as provided under Section 9.8.2. Consent of the Contractor to partial occupancy or use
shall not be unreasonably withheld. The stage of the progress of the Work shall be determined by written agreement
between the Owner and Contractor or, if no agreement is reached, by decision of the Architect.
§ 9.9.2 Immediately prior to such partial occupancy or use, the Owner, Contractor and Architect shall jointly inspect
the area to be occupied or portion of the Work to be used in order to determine and record the condition of the
Work.
§ 9.9.3 Unless otherwise agreed upon, partial occupancy or use of a portion or portions of the Work shall not
constitute acceptance of Work not complying with the requirements of the Contract Documents.
§ 9.10 FINAL COMPLETION AND FINAL PAYMENT
§ 9.10.1 Upon receipt of the Contractor’s written notice that the Work is ready for final inspection and acceptance
and upon receipt of a final Application for Payment, the Architect will promptly make such inspection and, when the
AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The
American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International
Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal
penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.
This document is not an original AIA® Contract Document, but a template produced by AIA® Contract Documents software for producing a
customized document.
28
Architect finds the Work acceptable under the Contract Documents and the Contract fully performed, the Architect
will promptly issue a final Certificate for Payment stating that to the best of the Architect’s knowledge, information
and belief, and on the basis of the Architect’s on-site visits and inspections, the Work has been completed in
accordance with terms and conditions of the Contract Documents and that the entire balance found to be due the
Contractor and noted in the final Certificate is due and payable. The Architect’s final Certificate for Payment will
constitute a further representation that conditions listed in Section 9.10.2 as precedent to the Contractor’s being
entitled to final payment have been fulfilled.
§ 9.10.2 Neither final payment nor any remaining retained percentage shall become due until the Contractor submits
to the Architect (1) an affidavit that payrolls, bills for materials and equipment, and other indebtedness connected
with the Work for which the Owner or the Owner’s property might be responsible or encumbered (less amounts
withheld by Owner) have been paid or otherwise satisfied, (2) a certificate evidencing that insurance required by the
Contract Documents to remain in force after final payment is currently in effect and will not be canceled or allowed
to expire until at least 30 days’ prior written notice has been given to the Owner, (3) a written statement that the
Contractor knows of no substantial reason that the insurance will not be renewable to cover the period required by
the Contract Documents, (4) consent of surety, if any, to final payment and (5), if required by the Owner, other data
establishing payment or satisfaction of obligations, such as receipts, releases and waivers of liens, claims, security
interests or encumbrances arising out of the Contract, to the extent and in such form as may be designated by the
Owner. If a Subcontractor refuses to furnish a release or waiver required by the Owner, the Contractor may furnish a
bond satisfactory to the Owner to indemnify the Owner against such lien. If such lien remains unsatisfied after
payments are made, the Contractor shall refund to the Owner all money that the Owner may be compelled to pay in
discharging such lien, including all costs and reasonable attorneys’ fees.
§ 9.10.3 If, after Substantial Completion of the Work, final completion thereof is materially delayed through no fault
of the Contractor or by issuance of Change Orders affecting final completion, and the Architect so confirms, the
Owner shall, upon application by the Contractor and certification by the Architect, and without terminating the
Contract, make payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted. If the
remaining balance for Work not fully completed or corrected is less than retainage stipulated in the Contract
Documents, and if bonds have been furnished, the written consent of surety to payment of the balance due for that
portion of the Work fully completed and accepted shall be submitted by the Contractor to the Architect prior to
certification of such payment. Such payment shall be made under terms and conditions governing final payment,
except that it shall not constitute a waiver of claims.
§ 9.10.4 The making of final payment shall constitute a waiver of Claims by the Owner except those arising from
.1
liens, Claims, security interests or encumbrances arising out of the Contract and unsettled;
.2
failure of the Work to comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents; or
.3
terms of special warranties required by the Contract Documents.
§ 9.10.5 Acceptance of final payment by the Contractor, a Subcontractor or material supplier shall constitute a waiver
of claims by that payee except those previously made in writing and identified by that payee as unsettled at the time
of final Application for Payment.
ARTICLE 10 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY
§ 10.1 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS AND PROGRAMS
The Contractor shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety precautions and programs
in connection with the performance of the Contract.
§ 10.2 SAFETY OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY
§ 10.2.1 The Contractor shall take reasonable precautions for safety of, and shall provide reasonable protection to
prevent damage, injury or loss to
.1
employees on the Work and other persons who may be affected thereby;
.2
the Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in storage on or off the
site, under care, custody or control of the Contractor or the Contractor’s Subcontractors or Subsubcontractors; and
.3
other property at the site or adjacent thereto, such as trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements,
roadways, structures and utilities not designated for removal, relocation or replacement in the course
of construction.
AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The
American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International
Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal
penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.
This document is not an original AIA® Contract Document, but a template produced by AIA® Contract Documents software for producing a
customized document.
29
§ 10.2.2 The Contractor shall comply with and give notices required by applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes,
rules and regulations, and lawful orders of public authorities bearing on safety of persons or property or their
protection from damage, injury or loss.
§ 10.2.3 The Contractor shall erect and maintain, as required by existing conditions and performance of the Contract,
reasonable safeguards for safety and protection, including posting danger signs and other warnings against hazards,
promulgating safety regulations and notifying owners and users of adjacent sites and utilities.
§ 10.2.4 When use or storage of explosives or other hazardous materials or equipment or unusual methods are
necessary for execution of the Work, the Contractor shall exercise utmost care and carry on such activities under
supervision of properly qualified personnel.
§ 10.2.5 The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage and loss (other than damage or loss insured under property
insurance required by the Contract Documents) to property referred to in Sections 10.2.1.2 and 10.2.1.3 caused in
whole or in part by the Contractor, a Subcontractor, a Sub-subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed
by any of them, or by anyone for whose acts they may be liable and for which the Contractor is responsible under
Sections 10.2.1.2 and 10.2.1.3, except damage or loss attributable to acts or omissions of the Owner or Architect or
anyone directly or indirectly employed by either of them, or by anyone for whose acts either of them may be liable,
and not attributable to the fault or negligence of the Contractor. The foregoing obligations of the Contractor are in
addition to the Contractor’s obligations under Section 3.18.
§ 10.2.6 The Contractor shall designate a responsible member of the Contractor’s organization at the site whose duty
shall be the prevention of accidents. This person shall be the Contractor’s superintendent unless otherwise
designated by the Contractor in writing to the Owner and Architect.
§ 10.2.7 The Contractor shall not permit any part of the construction or site to be loaded so as to cause damage or
create an unsafe condition.
§ 10.2.8 INJURY OR DAMAGE TO PERSON OR PROPERTY
If either party suffers injury or damage to person or property because of an act or omission of the other party, or of
others for whose acts such party is legally responsible, written notice of such injury or damage, whether or not
insured, shall be given to the other party within a reasonable time not exceeding 21 days after discovery. The notice
shall provide sufficient detail to enable the other party to investigate the matter.
§ 10.3 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS
§ 10.3.1 The Contractor is responsible for compliance with any requirements included in the Contract Documents
regarding hazardous materials. If the Contractor encounters a hazardous material or substance not addressed in the
Contract Documents and if reasonable precautions will be inadequate to prevent foreseeable bodily injury or death
to persons resulting from a material or substance, including but not limited to asbestos or polychlorinated biphenyl
(PCB), encountered on the site by the Contractor, the Contractor shall, upon recognizing the condition, immediately
stop Work in the affected area and report the condition to the Owner and Architect in writing.
§ 10.3.2 Upon receipt of the Contractor’s written notice, the Owner shall obtain the services of a licensed laboratory
to verify the presence or absence of the material or substance reported by the Contractor and, in the event such
material or substance is found to be present, to cause it to be rendered harmless. Unless otherwise required by the
Contract Documents, the Owner shall furnish in writing to the Contractor and Architect the names and qualifications
of persons or entities who are to perform tests verifying the presence or absence of such material or substance or
who are to perform the task of removal or safe containment of such material or substance. The Contractor and the
Architect will promptly reply to the Owner in writing stating whether or not either has reasonable objection to the
persons or entities proposed by the Owner. If either the Contractor or Architect has an objection to a person or entity
proposed by the Owner, the Owner shall propose another to whom the Contractor and the Architect have no
reasonable objection. When the material or substance has been rendered harmless, Work in the affected area shall
resume upon written agreement of the Owner and Contractor. By Change Order, the Contract Time shall be
extended appropriately and the Contract Sum shall be increased in the amount of the Contractor’s reasonable
additional costs of shut-down, delay and start-up.
AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The
American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International
Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal
penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.
This document is not an original AIA® Contract Document, but a template produced by AIA® Contract Documents software for producing a
customized document.
30
§ 10.3.3 To the fullest extent permitted by law, the Owner shall indemnify and hold harmless the Contractor,
Subcontractors, Architect, Architect’s consultants and agents and employees of any of them from and against
claims, damages, losses and expenses, including but not limited to attorneys’ fees, arising out of or resulting from
performance of the Work in the affected area if in fact the material or substance presents the risk of bodily injury or
death as described in Section 10.3.1 and has not been rendered harmless, provided that such claim, damage, loss or
expense is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property
(other than the Work itself), except to the extent that such damage, loss or expense is due to the fault or negligence
of the party seeking indemnity.
§ 10.3.4 The Owner shall not be responsible under this Section 10.3 for materials or substances the Contractor brings
to the site unless such materials or substances are required by the Contract Documents. The Owner shall be
responsible for materials or substances required by the Contract Documents, except to the extent of the Contractor’s
fault or negligence in the use and handling of such materials or substances.
§ 10.3.5 The Contractor shall indemnify the Owner for the cost and expense the Owner incurs (1) for remediation of
a material or substance the Contractor brings to the site and negligently handles, or (2) where the Contractor fails to
perform its obligations under Section 10.3.1, except to the extent that the cost and expense are due to the Owner’s
fault or negligence.
§ 10.3.6 If, without negligence on the part of the Contractor, the Contractor is held liable by a government agency for
the cost of remediation of a hazardous material or substance solely by reason of performing Work as required by the
Contract Documents, the Owner shall indemnify the Contractor for all cost and expense thereby incurred.
§ 10.4 EMERGENCIES
In an emergency affecting safety of persons or property, the Contractor shall act, at the Contractor’s discretion, to
prevent threatened damage, injury or loss. Additional compensation or extension of time claimed by the Contractor
on account of an emergency shall be determined as provided in Article 15 and Article 7.
ARTICLE 11 INSURANCE AND BONDS
§ 11.1 CONTRACTOR’S LIABILITY INSURANCE
§ 11.1.1 The Contractor shall purchase from and maintain in a company or companies lawfully authorized to do
business in the jurisdiction in which the Project is located such insurance as will protect the Contractor from claims
set forth below which may arise out of or result from the Contractor’s operations and completed operations under
the Contract and for which the Contractor may be legally liable, whether such operations be by the Contractor or by
a Subcontractor or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or by anyone for whose acts any of
them may be liable:
.1
Claims under workers’ compensation, disability benefit and other similar employee benefit acts that
are applicable to the Work to be performed;
.2
Claims for damages because of bodily injury, occupational sickness or disease, or death of the
Contractor’s employees;
.3
Claims for damages because of bodily injury, sickness or disease, or death of any person other than
the Contractor’s employees;
.4
Claims for damages insured by usual personal injury liability coverage;
.5
Claims for damages, other than to the Work itself, because of injury to or destruction of tangible
property, including loss of use resulting therefrom;
.6
Claims for damages because of bodily injury, death of a person or property damage arising out of
ownership, maintenance or use of a motor vehicle;
.7
Claims for bodily injury or property damage arising out of completed operations; and
.8
Claims involving contractual liability insurance applicable to the Contractor’s obligations under
Section 3.18.
§ 11.1.2 The insurance required by Section 11.1.1 shall be written for not less than limits of liability specified in the
Contract Documents or required by law, whichever coverage is greater. Coverages, whether written on an
occurrence or claims-made basis, shall be maintained without interruption from the date of commencement of the
Work until the date of final payment and termination of any coverage required to be maintained after final payment,
and, with respect to the Contractor’s completed operations coverage, until the expiration of the period for correction
AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The
American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International
Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal
penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.
This document is not an original AIA® Contract Document, but a template produced by AIA® Contract Documents software for producing a
customized document.
31
of Work or for such other period for maintenance of completed operations coverage as specified in the Contract
Documents.
§ 11.1.3 Certificates of insurance acceptable to the Owner shall be filed with the Owner prior to commencement of
the Work and thereafter upon renewal or replacement of each required policy of insurance. These certificates and the
insurance policies required by this Section 11.1 shall contain a provision that coverages afforded under the policies
will not be canceled or allowed to expire until at least 30 days’ prior written notice has been given to the Owner. An
additional certificate evidencing continuation of liability coverage, including coverage for completed operations,
shall be submitted with the final Application for Payment as required by Section 9.10.2 and thereafter upon renewal
or replacement of such coverage until the expiration of the time required by Section 11.1.2. Information concerning
reduction of coverage on account of revised limits or claims paid under the General Aggregate, or both, shall be
furnished by the Contractor with reasonable promptness.
§ 11.1.4 The Contractor shall cause the commercial liability coverage required by the Contract Documents to include
(1) the Owner, the Architect and the Architect’s consultants as additional insureds for claims caused in whole or in
part by the Contractor’s negligent acts or omissions during the Contractor’s operations; and (2) the Owner as an
additional insured for claims caused in whole or in part by the Contractor’s negligent acts or omissions during the
Contractor’s completed operations.
§ 11.2 OWNER’S LIABILITY INSURANCE
The Owner shall be responsible for purchasing and maintaining the Owner’s usual liability insurance.
§ 11.3 PROPERTY INSURANCE
§ 11.3.1 Unless otherwise provided, the Owner shall purchase and maintain, in a company or companies lawfully
authorized to do business in the jurisdiction in which the Project is located, property insurance written on a builder’s
risk “all-risk” or equivalent policy form in the amount of the initial Contract Sum, plus value of subsequent Contract
Modifications and cost of materials supplied or installed by others, comprising total value for the entire Project at
the site on a replacement cost basis without optional deductibles. Such property insurance shall be maintained,
unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents or otherwise agreed in writing by all persons and entities who
are beneficiaries of such insurance, until final payment has been made as provided in Section 9.10 or until no person
or entity other than the Owner has an insurable interest in the property required by this Section 11.3 to be covered,
whichever is later. This insurance shall include interests of the Owner, the Contractor, Subcontractors and Subsubcontractors in the Project.
§ 11.3.1.1 Property insurance shall be on an “all-risk” or equivalent policy form and shall include, without limitation,
insurance against the perils of fire (with extended coverage) and physical loss or damage including, without
duplication of coverage, theft, vandalism, malicious mischief, collapse, earthquake, flood, windstorm, falsework,
testing and startup, temporary buildings and debris removal including demolition occasioned by enforcement of any
applicable legal requirements, and shall cover reasonable compensation for Architect’s and Contractor’s services
and expenses required as a result of such insured loss.
§ 11.3.1.2 If the Owner does not intend to purchase such property insurance required by the Contract and with all of
the coverages in the amount described above, the Owner shall so inform the Contractor in writing prior to
commencement of the Work. The Contractor may then effect insurance that will protect the interests of the
Contractor, Subcontractors and Sub-subcontractors in the Work, and by appropriate Change Order the cost thereof
shall be charged to the Owner. If the Contractor is damaged by the failure or neglect of the Owner to purchase or
maintain insurance as described above, without so notifying the Contractor in writing, then the Owner shall bear all
reasonable costs properly attributable thereto.
§ 11.3.1.3 If the property insurance requires deductibles, the Owner shall pay costs not covered because of such
deductibles.
§ 11.3.1.4 This property insurance shall cover portions of the Work stored off the site, and also portions of the Work
in transit.
§ 11.3.1.5 Partial occupancy or use in accordance with Section 9.9 shall not commence until the insurance company
or companies providing property insurance have consented to such partial occupancy or use by endorsement or
AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The
American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International
Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal
penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.
This document is not an original AIA® Contract Document, but a template produced by AIA® Contract Documents software for producing a
customized document.
32
otherwise. The Owner and the Contractor shall take reasonable steps to obtain consent of the insurance company or
companies and shall, without mutual written consent, take no action with respect to partial occupancy or use that
would cause cancellation, lapse or reduction of insurance.
§ 11.3.2 BOILER AND MACHINERY INSURANCE
The Owner shall purchase and maintain boiler and machinery insurance required by the Contract Documents or by
law, which shall specifically cover such insured objects during installation and until final acceptance by the Owner;
this insurance shall include interests of the Owner, Contractor, Subcontractors and Sub-subcontractors in the Work,
and the Owner and Contractor shall be named insureds.
§ 11.3.3 LOSS OF USE INSURANCE
The Owner, at the Owner’s option, may purchase and maintain such insurance as will insure the Owner against loss
of use of the Owner’s property due to fire or other hazards, however caused. The Owner waives all rights of action
against the Contractor for loss of use of the Owner’s property, including consequential losses due to fire or other
hazards however caused.
§ 11.3.4 If the Contractor requests in writing that insurance for risks other than those described herein or other
special causes of loss be included in the property insurance policy, the Owner shall, if possible, include such
insurance, and the cost thereof shall be charged to the Contractor by appropriate Change Order.
§ 11.3.5 If during the Project construction period the Owner insures properties, real or personal or both, at or adjacent
to the site by property insurance under policies separate from those insuring the Project, or if after final payment
property insurance is to be provided on the completed Project through a policy or policies other than those insuring
the Project during the construction period, the Owner shall waive all rights in accordance with the terms of Section
11.3.7 for damages caused by fire or other causes of loss covered by this separate property insurance. All separate
policies shall provide this waiver of subrogation by endorsement or otherwise.
§ 11.3.6 Before an exposure to loss may occur, the Owner shall file with the Contractor a copy of each policy that
includes insurance coverages required by this Section 11.3. Each policy shall contain all generally applicable
conditions, definitions, exclusions and endorsements related to this Project. Each policy shall contain a provision
that the policy will not be canceled or allowed to expire, and that its limits will not be reduced, until at least 30 days’
prior written notice has been given to the Contractor.
§ 11.3.7 WAIVERS OF SUBROGATION
The Owner and Contractor waive all rights against (1) each other and any of their subcontractors, subsubcontractors, agents and employees, each of the other, and (2) the Architect, Architect’s consultants, separate
contractors described in Article 6, if any, and any of their subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, agents and employees,
for damages caused by fire or other causes of loss to the extent covered by property insurance obtained pursuant to
this Section 11.3 or other property insurance applicable to the Work, except such rights as they have to proceeds of
such insurance held by the Owner as fiduciary. The Owner or Contractor, as appropriate, shall require of the
Architect, Architect’s consultants, separate contractors described in Article 6, if any, and the subcontractors, subsubcontractors, agents and employees of any of them, by appropriate agreements, written where legally required for
validity, similar waivers each in favor of other parties enumerated herein. The policies shall provide such waivers of
subrogation by endorsement or otherwise. A waiver of subrogation shall be effective as to a person or entity even
though that person or entity would otherwise have a duty of indemnification, contractual or otherwise, did not pay
the insurance premium directly or indirectly, and whether or not the person or entity had an insurable interest in the
property damaged.
§ 11.3.8 A loss insured under the Owner’s property insurance shall be adjusted by the Owner as fiduciary and made
payable to the Owner as fiduciary for the insureds, as their interests may appear, subject to requirements of any
applicable mortgagee clause and of Section 11.3.10. The Contractor shall pay Subcontractors their just shares of
insurance proceeds received by the Contractor, and by appropriate agreements, written where legally required for
validity, shall require Subcontractors to make payments to their Sub-subcontractors in similar manner.
§ 11.3.9 If required in writing by a party in interest, the Owner as fiduciary shall, upon occurrence of an insured loss,
give bond for proper performance of the Owner’s duties. The cost of required bonds shall be charged against
proceeds received as fiduciary. The Owner shall deposit in a separate account proceeds so received, which the
AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The
American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International
Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal
penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.
This document is not an original AIA® Contract Document, but a template produced by AIA® Contract Documents software for producing a
customized document.
33
Owner shall distribute in accordance with such agreement as the parties in interest may reach, or as determined in
accordance with the method of binding dispute resolution selected in the Agreement between the Owner and
Contractor. If after such loss no other special agreement is made and unless the Owner terminates the Contract for
convenience, replacement of damaged property shall be performed by the Contractor after notification of a Change
in the Work in accordance with Article 7.
§ 11.3.10 The Owner as fiduciary shall have power to adjust and settle a loss with insurers unless one of the parties in
interest shall object in writing within five days after occurrence of loss to the Owner’s exercise of this power; if such
objection is made, the dispute shall be resolved in the manner selected by the Owner and Contractor as the method
of binding dispute resolution in the Agreement. If the Owner and Contractor have selected arbitration as the method
of binding dispute resolution, the Owner as fiduciary shall make settlement with insurers or, in the case of a dispute
over distribution of insurance proceeds, in accordance with the directions of the arbitrators.
§ 11.4 PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND
§ 11.4.1 The Owner shall have the right to require the Contractor to furnish bonds covering faithful performance of
the Contract and payment of obligations arising thereunder as stipulated in bidding requirements or specifically
required in the Contract Documents on the date of execution of the Contract.
§ 11.4.2 Upon the request of any person or entity appearing to be a potential beneficiary of bonds covering payment
of obligations arising under the Contract, the Contractor shall promptly furnish a copy of the bonds or shall
authorize a copy to be furnished.
ARTICLE 12 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK
§ 12.1 UNCOVERING OF WORK
§ 12.1.1 If a portion of the Work is covered contrary to the Architect’s request or to requirements specifically
expressed in the Contract Documents, it must, if requested in writing by the Architect, be uncovered for the
Architect’s examination and be replaced at the Contractor’s expense without change in the Contract Time.
§ 12.1.2 If a portion of the Work has been covered that the Architect has not specifically requested to examine prior
to its being covered, the Architect may request to see such Work and it shall be uncovered by the Contractor. If such
Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents, costs of uncovering and replacement shall, by appropriate
Change Order, be at the Owner’s expense. If such Work is not in accordance with the Contract Documents, such
costs and the cost of correction shall be at the Contractor’s expense unless the condition was caused by the Owner or
a separate contractor in which event the Owner shall be responsible for payment of such costs.
§ 12.2 CORRECTION OF WORK
§ 12.2.1 BEFORE OR AFTER SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
The Contractor shall promptly correct Work rejected by the Architect or failing to conform to the requirements of
the Contract Documents, whether discovered before or after Substantial Completion and whether or not fabricated,
installed or completed. Costs of correcting such rejected Work, including additional testing and inspections, the cost
of uncovering and replacement, and compensation for the Architect’s services and expenses made necessary
thereby, shall be at the Contractor’s expense.
§ 12.2.2 AFTER SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
§ 12.2.2.1 In addition to the Contractor’s obligations under Section 3.5, if, within one year after the date of
Substantial Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof or after the date for commencement of warranties
established under Section 9.9.1, or by terms of an applicable special warranty required by the Contract Documents,
any of the Work is found to be not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the Contractor
shall correct it promptly after receipt of written notice from the Owner to do so unless the Owner has previously
given the Contractor a written acceptance of such condition. The Owner shall give such notice promptly after
discovery of the condition. During the one-year period for correction of Work, if the Owner fails to notify the
Contractor and give the Contractor an opportunity to make the correction, the Owner waives the rights to require
correction by the Contractor and to make a claim for breach of warranty. If the Contractor fails to correct
nonconforming Work within a reasonable time during that period after receipt of notice from the Owner or
Architect, the Owner may correct it in accordance with Section 2.4.
AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The
American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International
Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal
penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.
This document is not an original AIA® Contract Document, but a template produced by AIA® Contract Documents software for producing a
customized document.
34
§ 12.2.2.2 The one-year period for correction of Work shall be extended with respect to portions of Work first
performed after Substantial Completion by the period of time between Substantial Completion and the actual
completion of that portion of the Work.
§ 12.2.2.3 The one-year period for correction of Work shall not be extended by corrective Work performed by the
Contractor pursuant to this Section 12.2.
§ 12.2.3 The Contractor shall remove from the site portions of the Work that are not in accordance with the
requirements of the Contract Documents and are neither corrected by the Contractor nor accepted by the Owner.
§ 12.2.4 The Contractor shall bear the cost of correcting destroyed or damaged construction, whether completed or
partially completed, of the Owner or separate contractors caused by the Contractor’s correction or removal of Work
that is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.
§ 12.2.5 Nothing contained in this Section 12.2 shall be construed to establish a period of limitation with respect to
other obligations the Contractor has under the Contract Documents. Establishment of the one-year period for
correction of Work as described in Section 12.2.2 relates only to the specific obligation of the Contractor to correct
the Work, and has no relationship to the time within which the obligation to comply with the Contract Documents
may be sought to be enforced, nor to the time within which proceedings may be commenced to establish the
Contractor’s liability with respect to the Contractor’s obligations other than specifically to correct the Work.
§ 12.3 ACCEPTANCE OF NONCONFORMING WORK
If the Owner prefers to accept Work that is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the
Owner may do so instead of requiring its removal and correction, in which case the Contract Sum will be reduced as
appropriate and equitable. Such adjustment shall be effected whether or not final payment has been made.
ARTICLE 13 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS
§ 13.1 GOVERNING LAW
The Contract shall be governed by the law of the place where the Project is located except that, if the parties have
selected arbitration as the method of binding dispute resolution, the Federal Arbitration Act shall govern Section
15.4.
§ 13.2 SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS
§ 13.2.1 The Owner and Contractor respectively bind themselves, their partners, successors, assigns and legal
representatives to covenants, agreements and obligations contained in the Contract Documents. Except as provided
in Section 13.2.2, neither party to the Contract shall assign the Contract as a whole without written consent of the
other. If either party attempts to make such an assignment without such consent, that party shall nevertheless remain
legally responsible for all obligations under the Contract.
§ 13.2.2 The Owner may, without consent of the Contractor, assign the Contract to a lender providing construction
financing for the Project, if the lender assumes the Owner’s rights and obligations under the Contract Documents.
The Contractor shall execute all consents reasonably required to facilitate such assignment.
§ 13.3 WRITTEN NOTICE
Written notice shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person to the individual, to a member of the
firm or entity, or to an officer of the corporation for which it was intended; or if delivered at, or sent by registered or
certified mail or by courier service providing proof of delivery to, the last business address known to the party
giving notice.
§ 13.4 RIGHTS AND REMEDIES
§ 13.4.1 Duties and obligations imposed by the Contract Documents and rights and remedies available thereunder
shall be in addition to and not a limitation of duties, obligations, rights and remedies otherwise imposed or available
by law.
§ 13.4.2 No action or failure to act by the Owner, Architect or Contractor shall constitute a waiver of a right or duty
afforded them under the Contract, nor shall such action or failure to act constitute approval of or acquiescence in a
breach there under, except as may be specifically agreed in writing.
AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The
American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International
Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal
penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.
This document is not an original AIA® Contract Document, but a template produced by AIA® Contract Documents software for producing a
customized document.
35
§ 13.5 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS
§ 13.5.1 Tests, inspections and approvals of portions of the Work shall be made as required by the Contract
Documents and by applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations or lawful orders of public
authorities. Unless otherwise provided, the Contractor shall make arrangements for such tests, inspections and
approvals with an independent testing laboratory or entity acceptable to the Owner, or with the appropriate public
authority, and shall bear all related costs of tests, inspections and approvals. The Contractor shall give the Architect
timely notice of when and where tests and inspections are to be made so that the Architect may be present for such
procedures. The Owner shall bear costs of (1) tests, inspections or approvals that do not become requirements until
after bids are received or negotiations concluded, and (2) tests, inspections or approvals where building codes or
applicable laws or regulations prohibit the Owner from delegating their cost to the Contractor.
§ 13.5.2 If the Architect, Owner or public authorities having jurisdiction determine that portions of the Work require
additional testing, inspection or approval not included under Section 13.5.1, the Architect will, upon written
authorization from the Owner, instruct the Contractor to make arrangements for such additional testing, inspection
or approval by an entity acceptable to the Owner, and the Contractor shall give timely notice to the Architect of
when and where tests and inspections are to be made so that the Architect may be present for such procedures. Such
costs, except as provided in Section 13.5.3, shall be at the Owner’s expense.
§ 13.5.3 If such procedures for testing, inspection or approval under Sections 13.5.1 and 13.5.2 reveal failure of the
portions of the Work to comply with requirements established by the Contract Documents, all costs made necessary
by such failure including those of repeated procedures and compensation for the Architect’s services and expenses
shall be at the Contractor’s expense.
§ 13.5.4 Required certificates of testing, inspection or approval shall, unless otherwise required by the Contract
Documents, be secured by the Contractor and promptly delivered to the Architect.
§ 13.5.5 If the Architect is to observe tests, inspections or approvals required by the Contract Documents, the
Architect will do so promptly and, where practicable, at the normal place of testing.
§ 13.5.6 Tests or inspections conducted pursuant to the Contract Documents shall be made promptly to avoid
unreasonable delay in the Work.
§ 13.6 INTEREST
Payments due and unpaid under the Contract Documents shall bear interest from the date payment is due at such rate
as the parties may agree upon in writing or, in the absence thereof, at the legal rate prevailing from time to time at
the place where the Project is located.
§ 13.7 TIME LIMITS ON CLAIMS
The Owner and Contractor shall commence all claims and causes of action, whether in contract, tort, breach of
warranty or otherwise, against the other arising out of or related to the Contract in accordance with the requirements
of the final dispute resolution method selected in the Agreement within the time period specified by applicable law,
but in any case not more than 10 years after the date of Substantial Completion of the Work. The Owner and
Contractor waive all claims and causes of action not commenced in accordance with this Section 13.7.
ARTICLE 14 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT
§ 14.1 TERMINATION BY THE CONTRACTOR
§ 14.1.1 The Contractor may terminate the Contract if the Work is stopped for a period of 30 consecutive days
through no act or fault of the Contractor or a Subcontractor, Sub-subcontractor or their agents or employees or any
other persons or entities performing portions of the Work under direct or indirect contract with the Contractor, for
any of the following reasons:
.1
Issuance of an order of a court or other public authority having jurisdiction that requires all Work to
be stopped;
.2
An act of government, such as a declaration of national emergency that requires all Work to be
stopped;
AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The
American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International
Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal
penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.
This document is not an original AIA® Contract Document, but a template produced by AIA® Contract Documents software for producing a
customized document.
36
.3
.4
Because the Architect has not issued a Certificate for Payment and has not notified the Contractor of
the reason for withholding certification as provided in Section 9.4.1, or because the Owner has not
made payment on a Certificate for Payment within the time stated in the Contract Documents; or
The Owner has failed to furnish to the Contractor promptly, upon the Contractor’s request, reasonable
evidence as required by Section 2.2.1.
§ 14.1.2 The Contractor may terminate the Contract if, through no act or fault of the Contractor or a Subcontractor,
Sub-subcontractor or their agents or employees or any other persons or entities performing portions of the Work
under direct or indirect contract with the Contractor, repeated suspensions, delays or interruptions of the entire Work
by the Owner as described in Section 14.3 constitute in the aggregate more than 100 percent of the total number of
days scheduled for completion, or 120 days in any 365-day period, whichever is less.
§ 14.1.3 If one of the reasons described in Section 14.1.1 or 14.1.2 exists, the Contractor may, upon seven days’
written notice to the Owner and Architect, terminate the Contract and recover from the Owner payment for Work
executed, including reasonable overhead and profit, costs incurred by reason of such termination, and damages.
§ 14.1.4 If the Work is stopped for a period of 60 consecutive days through no act or fault of the Contractor or a
Subcontractor or their agents or employees or any other persons performing portions of the Work under contract
with the Contractor because the Owner has repeatedly failed to fulfill the Owner’s obligations under the Contract
Documents with respect to matters important to the progress of the Work, the Contractor may, upon seven additional
days’ written notice to the Owner and the Architect, terminate the Contract and recover from the Owner as provided
in Section 14.1.3.
§ 14.2 TERMINATION BY THE OWNER FOR CAUSE
§ 14.2.1 The Owner may terminate the Contract if the Contractor
.1
repeatedly refuses or fails to supply enough properly skilled workers or proper materials;
.2
fails to make payment to Subcontractors for materials or labor in accordance with the respective
agreements between the Contractor and the Subcontractors;
.3
repeatedly disregards applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, or lawful
orders of a public authority; or
.4
otherwise is guilty of substantial breach of a provision of the Contract Documents.
§ 14.2.2 When any of the above reasons exist, the Owner, upon certification by the Initial Decision Maker that
sufficient cause exists to justify such action, may without prejudice to any other rights or remedies of the Owner and
after giving the Contractor and the Contractor’s surety, if any, seven days’ written notice, terminate employment of
the Contractor and may, subject to any prior rights of the surety:
.1
Exclude the Contractor from the site and take possession of all materials, equipment, tools, and
construction equipment and machinery thereon owned by the Contractor;
.2
Accept assignment of subcontracts pursuant to Section 5.4; and
.3
Finish the Work by whatever reasonable method the Owner may deem expedient. Upon written
request of the Contractor, the Owner shall furnish to the Contractor a detailed accounting of the costs
incurred by the Owner in finishing the Work.
§ 14.2.3 When the Owner terminates the Contract for one of the reasons stated in Section 14.2.1, the Contractor shall
not be entitled to receive further payment until the Work is finished.
§ 14.2.4 If the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum exceeds costs of finishing the Work, including compensation for
the Architect’s services and expenses made necessary thereby, and other damages incurred by the Owner and not
expressly waived, such excess shall be paid to the Contractor. If such costs and damages exceed the unpaid balance,
the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. The amount to be paid to the Contractor or Owner, as the case
may be, shall be certified by the Initial Decision Maker, upon application, and this obligation for payment shall
survive termination of the Contract.
§ 14.3 SUSPENSION BY THE OWNER FOR CONVENIENCE
§ 14.3.1 The Owner may, without cause, order the Contractor in writing to suspend, delay or interrupt the Work in
whole or in part for such period of time as the Owner may determine.
AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The
American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International
Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal
penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.
This document is not an original AIA® Contract Document, but a template produced by AIA® Contract Documents software for producing a
customized document.
37
§ 14.3.2 The Contract Sum and Contract Time shall be adjusted for increases in the cost and time caused by
suspension, delay or interruption as described in Section 14.3.1. Adjustment of the Contract Sum shall include
profit. No adjustment shall be made to the extent
.1
that performance is, was or would have been so suspended, delayed or interrupted by another cause
for which the Contractor is responsible; or
.2
that an equitable adjustment is made or denied under another provision of the Contract.
§ 14.4 TERMINATION BY THE OWNER FOR CONVENIENCE
§ 14.4.1 The Owner may, at any time, terminate the Contract for the Owner’s convenience and without cause.
§ 14.4.2 Upon receipt of written notice from the Owner of such termination for the Owner’s convenience, the
Contractor shall
.1
cease operations as directed by the Owner in the notice;
.2
take actions necessary, or that the Owner may direct, for the protection and preservation of the Work;
and
.3
except for Work directed to be performed prior to the effective date of termination stated in the
notice, terminate all existing subcontracts and purchase orders and enter into no further subcontracts
and purchase orders.
§ 14.4.3 In case of such termination for the Owner’s convenience, the Contractor shall be entitled to receive payment
for Work executed, and costs incurred by reason of such termination, along with reasonable overhead and profit on
the Work not executed.
ARTICLE 15 CLAIMS AND DISPUTES
§ 15.1 CLAIMS
§ 15.1.1 DEFINITION
A Claim is a demand or assertion by one of the parties seeking, as a matter of right, payment of money, or other
relief with respect to the terms of the Contract. The term “Claim” also includes other disputes and matters in
question between the Owner and Contractor arising out of or relating to the Contract. The responsibility to
substantiate Claims shall rest with the party making the Claim.
§ 15.1.2 NOTICE OF CLAIMS
Claims by either the Owner or Contractor must be initiated by written notice to the other party and to the Initial
Decision Maker with a copy sent to the Architect, if the Architect is not serving as the Initial Decision Maker.
Claims by either party must be initiated within 21 days after occurrence of the event giving rise to such Claim or
within 21 days after the claimant first recognizes the condition giving rise to the Claim, whichever is later.
§ 15.1.3 CONTINUING CONTRACT PERFORMANCE
Pending final resolution of a Claim, except as otherwise agreed in writing or as provided in Section 9.7 and Article
14, the Contractor shall proceed diligently with performance of the Contract and the Owner shall continue to make
payments in accordance with the Contract Documents. The Architect will prepare Change Orders and issue
Certificates for Payment in accordance with the decisions of the Initial Decision Maker.
§ 15.1.4 CLAIMS FOR ADDITIONAL COST
If the Contractor wishes to make a Claim for an increase in the Contract Sum, written notice as provided herein shall
be given before proceeding to execute the Work. Prior notice is not required for Claims relating to an emergency
endangering life or property arising under Section 10.4.
§ 15.1.5 CLAIMS FOR ADDITIONAL TIME
§ 15.1.5.1 If the Contractor wishes to make a Claim for an increase in the Contract Time, written notice as provided
herein shall be given. The Contractor’s Claim shall include an estimate of cost and of probable effect of delay on
progress of the Work. In the case of a continuing delay, only one Claim is necessary.
§ 15.1.5.2 If adverse weather conditions are the basis for a Claim for additional time, such Claim shall be
documented by data substantiating that weather conditions were abnormal for the period of time, could not have
been reasonably anticipated and had an adverse effect on the scheduled construction.
AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The
American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International
Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal
penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.
This document is not an original AIA® Contract Document, but a template produced by AIA® Contract Documents software for producing a
customized document.
38
§ 15.1.6 CLAIMS FOR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
The Contractor and Owner waive Claims against each other for consequential damages arising out of or relating to
this Contract. This mutual waiver includes
.1
damages incurred by the Owner for rental expenses, for losses of use, income, profit, financing,
business and reputation, and for loss of management or employee productivity or of the services of
such persons; and
.2
damages incurred by the Contractor for principal office expenses including the compensation of
personnel stationed there, for losses of financing, business and reputation, and for loss of profit
except anticipated profit arising directly from the Work.
This mutual waiver is applicable, without limitation, to all consequential damages due to either party’s termination
in accordance with Article 14. Nothing contained in this Section 15.1.6 shall be deemed to preclude an award of
liquidated damages, when applicable, in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.
§ 15.2 INITIAL DECISION
§ 15.2.1 Claims, excluding those arising under Sections 10.3, 10.4, 11.3.9, and 11.3.10, shall be referred to the Initial
Decision Maker for initial decision. The Architect will serve as the Initial Decision Maker, unless otherwise
indicated in the Agreement. Except for those Claims excluded by this Section 15.2.1, an initial decision shall be
required as a condition precedent to mediation of any Claim arising prior to the date final payment is due, unless 30
days have passed after the Claim has been referred to the Initial Decision Maker with no decision having been
rendered. Unless the Initial Decision Maker and all affected parties agree, the Initial Decision Maker will not decide
disputes between the Contractor and persons or entities other than the Owner.
§ 15.2.2 The Initial Decision Maker will review Claims and within ten days of the receipt of a Claim take one or
more of the following actions: (1) request additional supporting data from the claimant or a response with supporting
data from the other party, (2) reject the Claim in whole or in part, (3) approve the Claim, (4) suggest a compromise,
or (5) advise the parties that the Initial Decision Maker is unable to resolve the Claim if the Initial Decision Maker
lacks sufficient information to evaluate the merits of the Claim or if the Initial Decision Maker concludes that, in the
Initial Decision Maker’s sole discretion, it would be inappropriate for the Initial Decision Maker to resolve the
Claim.
§ 15.2.3 In evaluating Claims, the Initial Decision Maker may, but shall not be obligated to, consult with or seek
information from either party or from persons with special knowledge or expertise who may assist the Initial
Decision Maker in rendering a decision. The Initial Decision Maker may request the Owner to authorize retention of
such persons at the Owner’s expense.
§ 15.2.4 If the Initial Decision Maker requests a party to provide a response to a Claim or to furnish additional
supporting data, such party shall respond, within ten days after receipt of such request, and shall either (1) provide a
response on the requested supporting data, (2) advise the Initial Decision Maker when the response or supporting
data will be furnished or (3) advise the Initial Decision Maker that no supporting data will be furnished. Upon
receipt of the response or supporting data, if any, the Initial Decision Maker will either reject or approve the Claim
in whole or in part.
§ 15.2.5 The Initial Decision Maker will render an initial decision approving or rejecting the Claim, or indicating that
the Initial Decision Maker is unable to resolve the Claim. This initial decision shall (1) be in writing; (2) state the
reasons therefor; and (3) notify the parties and the Architect, if the Architect is not serving as the Initial Decision
Maker, of any change in the Contract Sum or Contract Time or both. The initial decision shall be final and binding
on the parties but subject to mediation and, if the parties fail to resolve their dispute through mediation, to binding
dispute resolution.
§ 15.2.6 Either party may file for mediation of an initial decision at any time, subject to the terms of Section 15.2.6.1.
§ 15.2.6.1 Either party may, within 30 days from the date of an initial decision, demand in writing that the other party
file for mediation within 60 days of the initial decision. If such a demand is made and the party receiving the
demand fails to file for mediation within the time required, then both parties waive their rights to mediate or pursue
binding dispute resolution proceedings with respect to the initial decision.
AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The
American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International
Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal
penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.
This document is not an original AIA® Contract Document, but a template produced by AIA® Contract Documents software for producing a
customized document.
39
§ 15.2.7 In the event of a Claim against the Contractor, the Owner may, but is not obligated to, notify the surety, if
any, of the nature and amount of the Claim. If the Claim relates to a possibility of a Contractor’s default, the Owner
may, but is not obligated to, notify the surety and request the surety’s assistance in resolving the controversy.
§ 15.2.8 If a Claim relates to or is the subject of a mechanic’s lien, the party asserting such Claim may proceed in
accordance with applicable law to comply with the lien notice or filing deadlines.
§ 15.3 MEDIATION
§ 15.3.1 Claims, disputes, or other matters in controversy arising out of or related to the Contract except those
waived as provided for in Sections 9.10.4, 9.10.5, and 15.1.6 shall be subject to mediation as a condition precedent
to binding dispute resolution.
§ 15.3.2 The parties shall endeavor to resolve their Claims by mediation which, unless the parties mutually agree
otherwise, shall be administered by the American Arbitration Association in accordance with its Construction
Industry Mediation Procedures in effect on the date of the Agreement. A request for mediation shall be made in
writing, delivered to the other party to the Contract, and filed with the person or entity administering the mediation.
The request may be made concurrently with the filing of binding dispute resolution proceedings but, in such event,
mediation shall proceed in advance of binding dispute resolution proceedings, which shall be stayed pending
mediation for a period of 60 days from the date of filing, unless stayed for a longer period by agreement of the
parties or court order. If an arbitration is stayed pursuant to this Section 15.3.2, the parties may nonetheless proceed
to the selection of the arbitrator(s) and agree upon a schedule for later proceedings.
§ 15.3.3 The parties shall share the mediator’s fee and any filing fees equally. The mediation shall be held in the
place where the Project is located, unless another location is mutually agreed upon. Agreements reached in
mediation shall be enforceable as settlement agreements in any court having jurisdiction thereof.
§ 15.4 ARBITRATION
§ 15.4.1 If the parties have selected arbitration as the method for binding dispute resolution in the Agreement, any
Claim subject to, but not resolved by, mediation shall be subject to arbitration which, unless the parties mutually
agree otherwise, shall be administered by the American Arbitration Association in accordance with its Construction
Industry Arbitration Rules in effect on the date of the Agreement. A demand for arbitration shall be made in writing,
delivered to the other party to the Contract, and filed with the person or entity administering the arbitration. The
party filing a notice of demand for arbitration must assert in the demand all Claims then known to that party on
which arbitration is permitted to be demanded.
§ 15.4.1.1 A demand for arbitration shall be made no earlier than concurrently with the filing of a request for
mediation, but in no event shall it be made after the date when the institution of legal or equitable proceedings based
on the Claim would be barred by the applicable statute of limitations. For statute of limitations purposes, receipt of a
written demand for arbitration by the person or entity administering the arbitration shall constitute the institution of
legal or equitable proceedings based on the Claim.
§ 15.4.2 The award rendered by the arbitrator or arbitrators shall be final, and judgment may be entered upon it in
accordance with applicable law in any court having jurisdiction thereof.
§ 15.4.3 The foregoing agreement to arbitrate and other agreements to arbitrate with an additional person or entity
duly consented to by parties to the Agreement shall be specifically enforceable under applicable law in any court
having jurisdiction thereof.
§ 15.4.4 CONSOLIDATION OR JOINDER
§ 15.4.4.1 Either party, at its sole discretion, may consolidate an arbitration conducted under this Agreement with any
other arbitration to which it is a party provided that (1) the arbitration agreement governing the other arbitration
permits consolidation, (2) the arbitrations to be consolidated substantially involve common questions of law or fact,
and (3) the arbitrations employ materially similar procedural rules and methods for selecting arbitrator(s).
§ 15.4.4.2 Either party, at its sole discretion, may include by joinder persons or entities substantially involved in a
common question of law or fact whose presence is required if complete relief is to be accorded in arbitration,
provided that the party sought to be joined consents in writing to such joinder. Consent to arbitration involving an
AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The
American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International
Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal
penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.
This document is not an original AIA® Contract Document, but a template produced by AIA® Contract Documents software for producing a
customized document.
40
additional person or entity shall not constitute consent to arbitration of any claim, dispute or other matter in question
not described in the written consent.
§ 15.4.4.3 The Owner and Contractor grant to any person or entity made a party to an arbitration conducted under
this Section 15.4, whether by joinder or consolidation, the same rights of joinder and consolidation as the Owner and
Contractor under this Agreement.
AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The
American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International
Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal
penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.
This document is not an original AIA® Contract Document, but a template produced by AIA® Contract Documents software for producing a
customized document.
41
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS GENERAL The following supplements modify, change, delete from or add to the "General Conditions of the Contract for Construction", AIA Document A201, 2007 Edition. Where any Article of the General Conditions is modified or any Paragraph, Subparagraph, Sub‐Subparagraph or Clause thereof is modified or deleted by these supplements, the unaltered provisions of that Article, Paragraph, Subparagraph, Sub‐Subparagraph or Clause shall remain in effect. Wherever the work "Architect" appears in the General Conditions, it shall be deleted and replaced with "Architect (LOFFREDO BROOKS ARCHITECTS P.C.)". ARTICLE I ‐ CONTRACT DOCUMENTS Paragraph 1.1 BASIC DEFINITIONS Add the following new Subparagraph: 1.1.9 MISCELLANEOUS DEFINITIONS 1.1.9.1 The term "product" as used in the Contract Documents includes materials, systems and equipment. 1.1.9.2 The "Project Manual" is the volume which includes the bidding requirements, sample forms and certain of the Contract Documents, such as Conditions of the Contract and the Specifications, Division 1 thru 16. 1.1.9.3 The terms "suitable," "satisfactory," "acceptable," "unacceptable," or words of similar intent, are construed to include the phrase "as determined by the Architect," unless other specific reference is made thereat. 1.1.9.4 The terms "approval," "for approval," "consent," "review", or words of similar intent, are construed to include the phrase "of the Architect", unless other specific reference is made thereof. 1.1.9.5 The term "provide" means to furnish and install, complete and in place, including all accessories, finishes, tests and services as required to render the item so specified completely ready for use. 1.1.9.6 The term "furnish" means procurement of fabrication of materials, equipment or components, or the performance of services to the extent indicated. Where used in respect to materials, equipment, or components, the term shall include delivery to project site but is not intended to include the installation of the item, either temporary or final. Supplementary Conditions
SC-1
1.1.9.7 The term "install" means the placement of materials, equipment, or component including the receiving, unloading, transporting, storage and installing, and the performance of such testing and finish work as is compatible with the degree of installation specified. ARTICLE 2 ‐ OWNER Paragraph 2.2 2.2.5 2.2.5 INFORMATION AND SERVICES REQUIRED OF THE OWNER Delete this Subparagraph in its entirety and substitute the following: The Owner will furnish the Contractor with three (1) copy of written material and one (1) reproducible set of Drawings at no cost or an electronic version as determined by client. ARTICLE 3 – CONTRACTOR Paragraph 3.1 GENERAL Add the following new Subparagraph 3.1.4 It is the Contractor’s responsibility to obtain a copy, if available, of the Building Rules and Regulations, and to include the terms of these as par to their contract for construction. The Contractor must notify the Architect and Owner in writing of any inconsistency between the Contract Documents and the Building Rules and Regulations prior to commencement of any work. Paragraph 3.2 REVIEW OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND FIELD CONDITIONS BY THE CONTRACTOR Add the following new Subparagraph: 3.2.2 The Contractor's report to the Architect of any error, inconsistency or omission in the Contract Documents shall be in writing. Paragraph 3.4 LABOR AND MATERIALS Add the following Subparagraphs: 3.4.4 The Architect will promptly reply in writing to the Contractor stating whether the Owner or the Architect, after due investigation, has reasonable objection to any such proposal. If adequate data on any proposed manufacturer or installer is not available, the Architect may state that action will be deferred until the Contractor provides further data. Failure of the Owner or Architect to reply promptly shall constitute notice of no reasonable objection. Failure to object to a manufacturer shall not constitute a waiver of any of the requirements of the Contract Documents, and all products furnished by the manufacturer must conform to such requirements. Supplementary Conditions
SC-2
3.4.5 Not later than thirty (30) days after the Contract Date (the Date of the Owner‐Contractor Agreement) and prior to Award of Subcontracts, but in all cases at least ten (10) working days prior to submission of the Contractor's first Application for Payment, the Contractor shall provide a list showing the name of the manufacturer proposed to be used for each of the products specified in all Sections of Division 2 through 16 and, where applicable, the name of the installing Subcontractor. 3.4.6 After the Contract has been executed, the Owner and the Architect will consider a formal request for the substitution of products in place of those specified only under the conditions set forth in the Contract Documents. PERMITS, FEES AND NOTICES 3.7.1 Paragraph 3.7 Paragraph 3.10 3.10.2 Paragraph 3.12 3.12.11 3.12.12 Paragraph 3.14 Replace Paragraph 3.7.1 with the following: The Contractor shall secure and pay for the cost of the building permit required by the local jurisdiction. Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall secure and pay for all other permits and governmental fees, licenses and inspections necessary for the project execution and completion of the Work which are customarily secured after execution of the Contract and which are legally required at the time the bids are received; all costs for these permits, fees, licenses and inspections shall be included in the Bid. This includes any after hours permits required CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE Add the following : Initial submittal of the progress schedule shall be within five (5) working days of receipt of Notice of Award of the Contract. SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES Add the following new Subparagraphs: Refer to General Requirements for additional provisions on this subject. The Contractor shall prepare and submit a schedule listing dates for submission and dates reviewed shop drawings, product data and samples required by the Specifications are needed. This schedule shall be submitted within five (5) working days of the receipt of Notice of Award of the Contract. CUTTING AND PATCHING OF WORK Supplementary Conditions
SC-3
Add the following new Subparagraph: 3.14.3 The Contractor shall be responsible for restoration of any existing conditions disturbed by his work, whether or not indicated in the Contract Documents. The costs for such restoration shall be included in the Contract sum and be performed by workers skilled in the trade of work affected. Paragraph 3.15 CLEANING UP Add the following new Subparagraph: 3.15.3 Refer to the General Requirements for additional provisions on this subject. ARTICLE 9 ‐ PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION Paragraph 9.2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES Add the following new Subparagraph: 9.2.1 Refer to Division 1 ‐ Submittals for additional provisions on this subject. Paragraph 9.3 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT 9.3.1 In the fourth line following the word "notarized", delete the words "if required". Add the following new Sub‐Subparagraphs: 9.3.1.3 The form of Application for Payment shall be AIA Document G702 "Application and Certificate for Payment", 1992 Edition, supported by AIA Document G703, Continuation Sheet, 1992 Edition. 9.3.1.4 Unit the Work is Substantially Complete, the Owner will pay ninety percent (90%) of the amount due the Contractor on account of progress payments. 9.3.1.5 With the second Application for Payment, and with each Application thereafter, the Contractor shall furnish waivers of liens in the amount of the previous Certificate for Payment. Paragraph 9.8 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION 9.8.5 Add the following Sentence: The payment shall be sufficient to increase the total payments to ninety‐five percent (95%) of the Contract Sum, less such amounts as the Architect shall determine for all incomplete Work and unsettled claims. Supplementary Conditions
SC-4
Paragraph 9.10 FINAL COMPLETION AND FINAL PAYMENT 9.10.2 Add the following new Sub‐Subparagraph: 9.10.2.1 The Contractor shall secure all final inspection permits except for third party inspection identified on the documents as owner’s responsibility and attach them to his final Application for Payment. END OF SECTION Supplementary Conditions
SC-5
SECTION 01000 ‐ GENERAL REQUIREMENTS PART 1 ‐ GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL A. Examine premises carefully and report in writing any discrepancies to the Architect before proceeding with any work. B. The General Conditions of the Contract, the American Institute of Architects Standard Document #A201 "General Conditions of the Contract for Construction," 2007 edition or most current published edition, 14 articles, 24 pages and the following supplementary requirements apply to all sections of this specification. C. Where "General and Supplementary Conditions" specified in these documents modify the AIA General Conditions, they shall take precedence. D. Where "General and Supplementary Conditions" clauses are repeated, it shall be understood as calling special attention to them or as a further qualification, and shall not be assumed as omitting any further clause of the General Conditions. E. Maintain adequate protection of the Work from damage and protect the Owner's property and the public from injury or loss arising in connection with this Work. Make good any such damage, injury or loss, and accept exclusive liability and hold harmless the Owner and Architect against injuries or claims therefore of all persons and any alleged damage to property in connection with the Work. Erect and maintain at all times, as required by the conditions and progress of the Work, all necessary safeguards for the protection of the workmen and the public. F. All work and materials shall be in full accordance with the latest rules and regulations of all municipal codes and state laws or regulations. Nothing in these plans or specifications is to be construed to permit work not conforming to these codes. In cases where code requirements differ, the more stringent code shall take precedence. G. INDEMNITY Provision must be made to insure the "Hold Harmless Agreement" which reads as follows: 1. The Contractor hereby agrees to indemnify and save harmless the Owner, Building Management and Architect from and against all liability claims and demands on account of injury to persons including death resulting there from and damage to property arising out of the performance of these Contract Documents by the Contractor's property. The Contractor shall, at his or its own expense, defend any and all actions at law brought against the Owner and the same Owner's representative above and shall pay all attorney's fees and all expenses, and promptly discharge any judgments arising there from. These conditions shall also apply to any subcontracted operations. 2. The Contractor shall secure and protect the Work and shall bear and be liable for, and shall repair and replace all loss and damage of any kind which may happen to the Work at any time prior to the final completion and acceptance thereof from any cause whatsoever, and the Owner and Architect will not, in any manner, be answerable or responsible for any loss or damage that shall happen to the Work or any part thereof, nor for any materials, equipment, tools, plant, facilities or other things that may be employed therein or placed upon the premises by the Contractor, the latter being solely responsible General Requirements
01000-1
therefore until the Work has been fully accepted by the Owner. 3. H. INSURANCE TO BE PROVIDED BY THE CONTRACTOR The Contractor hereby agrees, to the extent permitted by law, to assume the entire responsibility and liability for and defense of and to pay and indemnify the Owner and the Architect (collectively the "Indemnities") against any loss, expense or liability and will hold each of them harmless from any pay, any loss, damage, cost or expense (including without limitation, judgments, attorney's fees, court costs and the cost of appellate proceedings), which the Indemnities (collectively or individually) incur because of injury to or death of any person or on account of damage to property, including loss of use thereof, or any other claim arising out of, in connection with or as a consequence of the performance of the Work, and/or any act or omission of the Contractor or any of its subcontractors, officers, directors, employees, agents or anyone directly or indirectly employed by the Contractor or anyone whose acts the Contractor may be liable as it relates to the scope of this Contract. However, nothing herein contained shall require the Contractor to provide indemnification against the proportion of any liability for claims which are proven to have arisen from the negligence of the party asked to be defended, indemnified or held harmless. Contractor will purchase and maintain such insurance as will protect it from any costs and expenses relating to the foregoing, including, without limitation, contractual coverage covering the foregoing indemnity, and shall provide the Owner with certificates evidencing same in the form annexed hereto. 1. The Contractor shall, through agents and in amounts and by companies to be approved by the Owner, obtain, maintain in force during the period covered by the Contract and pay for such insurance as required herein. If the Contractor shall fail to deliver certificates for its insurance or the insurance of its subcontractors to the Owner within forty‐eight (48) hours after demand, and in any event, prior to commencement of the Work on the Project, the Owner may obtain such insurance for the Contractor and pay premiums thereon, and the Contractor shall repay the Owner, on demand, any sum or sums paid therefore, together with interest thereon, or the Owner, may deduct such sum or sums, together with interest therein, from any money due or to become due to the Contractor under this Contract. As provided below, every policy of insurance required hereunder shall name the Indemnities as additional insured and shall provide for giving the Owner and the other Indemnities if so requested in writing thirty (30) days' prior written notice of the cancellation thereof. 2. Any policy of insurance covering the Contractor's own tools, plant and facilities against loss by physical damage shall include an endorsement providing that the Underwriters waive their rights of subrogation against the Owner. 3. The Contractor shall not commence work under this Contract until it has obtained all of the insurance as required by the owner and building management. Coverages must include and not be limited to the following : a. Workers Compensation in accordance with the laws of the state with jurisdiction. b. c. Employer's Liability insurance. Comprehensive General Liability/Umbrella Liability for: (1) (2) Bodily Injury Liability Insurance Property Damage Liability General Requirements
01000-2
including, but not limited to, Comprehensive Form Premises ‐ Operations, Explosion and Collapse Hazard, Products/Completed Operations Hazard (2 years' extension beyond completion of Project), Contractual Coverage (including coverage for the Indemnity Clauses provided under this Contract), Broad Form Property Damage, Independent Contractors, Personal Injury (employees exclusion deleted) and 'X,' 'C' and 'U' exclusions deleted. (3) Comprehensive Automobile Liability Comprehensive, Owned, Hired, Non‐Owned. (4) The Contractor shall verify that these requirements are acceptable to the Owner. If not, they shall obtain insurance coverage in accordance with their requirements. 4. The above insurance shall, without liability on the part of the Owner for premiums thereof, include the following: a. Endorsement as Additional Insurers of: (1) (2) Owner, Building management/landlord, Architect and their partners, directors, officers, employees, agents and representatives; and All other indemnities named in the Contract. b. Thirty (30) Day Prior Notice of Cancellation to each name insured; and c. Waiver of Subrogation 5. The above policies shall be endorsed to contain the following wording verbatim: "Owner is interested in the maintenance of this insurance and it is agreed that this insurance will not be canceled, materially changed or not renewed without at least thirty (30) days' advance written notice to the Owner and the other additional insurers as so requested in writing. The Contractor hereby agrees, to the extent permitted by law, to assume the entire responsibility and liability for and defense of and to pay and indemnify the Owner for the Project and the Architect (collectively the "Indemnities") against any loss, expense or liability and will hold each of them harmless from any pay, any loss, judgments, attorney's fees, court costs and the cost of appellate proceedings), which the Indemnities (collectively or individually) incur because of injury to or death of any person or on account of damage to property, including loss of use thereof, or any other claim arising out of, in connection with or as a consequence of the performance of the Work, and/or any act or omission of the Contractor or any of its subcontractors, officers, directors, employees, agents or anyone directly or indirectly employed by the Contractor or anyone whose acts the Contractor may be liable as it relates to the scope of this Contract. However, nothing herein contained shall require the Contractor to provide indemnification against the proportion of any liability for claims which are proven to have arisen from the negligence of the party asked to be defended, indemnified or held harmless. Contractor will purchase and maintain such insurance as will protect it from any costs and expenses relating to the foregoing, including, without limitation, contractual coverage covering the foregoing indemnity, and shall provide the Owner with certificates evidencing same." General Requirements
01000-3
1.02 A. B. C. SUMMARY OF WORK The Work of this Contract comprises the renovation of space for The North Face/Jansport, 393‐401 Lafayette Street, 8th floor, New York, NY The construction schedule and operations shall be subject to approval of the Owner. Contractor's Use of Premises 1. Contractor shall limit his use of the premises for work and for storage to the area designated by the owner or project manager. 2. Each Contractor assumes responsibility for the protection and safekeeping of his materials stored at the site. D. 3. The Contractor is advised that limited storage space is available in the space to be renovated. Work Related Requirements 1. 2. Movement of workmen and materials into the building will be along routes and at times as directed and restricted by the Construction manager. Work in the building will be permitted during the hours and days established by the Construction manager and other alternate hours as arranged with and approved by the Construction Manager. 3. 4. 5. The Contractor shall schedule delivery of materials and removals of debris with the Construction Manager. Contractor shall give adequate notice of requirements. The Contractor shall not erect signs. Temporary field office space in the construction area shall be provided by the Contractor. Contractor shall provide his own furniture. The Contractor shall provide a telephone for communications and subcontractors' use. 6. 7. 8. 9. The Contractor shall arrange with the Construction Manager for his own utility services including electrical power, water and lighting. The cost of hook‐up and distribution shall also be paid for by the Contractor. Services not available from the Building shall be provided by the Contractor at his own expense. The Contractor will provide a temporary men’s and women’s toilet facilities and his personnel may use these temporary toilet facilities for his employees and any other person authorized by the contractor or the owner to work in the building. Where disagreements occur between the Drawings and the Specifications, or within either document itself or between the Specifications and the Building Rules and Standards, the item or arrangement of better quality, greater quantity or higher cost shall be included in the contract. Contractors shall verify and be responsible for all dimensions and conditions on the job and the General Requirements
01000-4
Architect's office must be notified of any variations from the dimensions and conditions shown by these Drawings. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. All construction dimensions and details shall concur with and be determined from these Drawings only. Contractor will not scale off of any dwg and will create an RFI for a request for information and promptly submit it to the architect for clarifications. All materials, assemblies, forms and methods of constructions and service equipment to be incorporated in the work shall be in strict accordance with the latest edition of the ASTM specifications applicable, and to conform to the standards and recommendations of the various trade institutes (ACI, AIBC, etc.), where applicable. All materials incorporated into the Work shall be new and shall comply with the local code requirements. Contractors shall be responsible for adequately bracing and protecting all work during construction against damage, breakages, collapse, distortions and off‐alignment according to applicable codes, standards and good practice. Construction shall comply with all Federal, state and local codes, ordinances, rules and regulations pertaining to labor and materials. All notes herein mentioned with those of the various Drawings shall apply to all Drawings and form part of the Contract. 15. 16. Each contractor will be held strictly responsible for his work. Any discrepancies in the plans or details shall be called to the attention of the Architect. All materials, assemblies, forms and methods of construction and service equipment shall meet the following requirements: 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. a. It shall have been accepted prior to the effective date of the code. b. It shall have been accepted for use under the prescribed code test methods by the commissioner, or c. It shall have been approved by the Board of Standards and Appeals. All materials or assemblies required to have a fire resistance rating shall comply with local codes and requirements. All exits shall be kept readily accessible and unobstructed at all times. Finish flooring in all exits shall be of non‐combustible materials. Illumination of at least 5‐foot candles measured at the floor level shall be maintained continuously in exits and their access facilities. Exit lighting shall be on circuits that are separate from any other circuits, taken off ahead of the main switch. General Requirements
01000-5
22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32. 33. 34. Where required, location of every exit shall be clearly indicated by exit signs, placed, if required, at an angle with the exit opening. Install directional signs to serve as guide from all portions of the corridor or floor, signs shall be on separate circuits, taken off ahead of the main switch. Exit signs shall be internally lighted, having an initial brightness of the letters of at least Corridors and exit passageways shall have a minimum clear height of 7'‐6" for at least 75% of the floor area with no point less than 7'‐0" in height. Projection below the ceiling shall not obstruct full view of exit signs. Conduits in fire‐rated partitions will not exceed 3/4" diameter. Outlets in partitions shall be backed up with approved materials. No conduits, pipes, medicine cabinets, etc. shall encroach upon fire‐rated partitions enclosing public corridors, stairs, elevator shafts or vent shafts. Exit doors shall be readily operable at all times from the side from which egress is to be made. Doors opening into interior enclosed stair shall not be locked from either side except that doors may be locked to prevent access to the stairs from the outdoors at the street level. Pipe space and wall furrings shall consist of metal channels and 5/8" gypsum wallboard, except as otherwise shown. All combustible flooring to have flame spread rating in accordance with BOCA '93. The bathroom side of partitions shall be 5/8" water resistant gypsum wallboard or backer board as indicated in the contract documents, if room is to receive tile or stone. Ventilation shaft walls shall be in accordance with partition types noted on the dwgs and must be as follows: one layer of 5/8" fire code gypsum wall board each side over 1" gypsum coreboard; total width to be 2‐1/4". Installation as recommended by manufacturer. All duct shafts offsets shall be encased with 2‐hour fire rated material. All permits issued by the NYC Department of Buildings shall be posted in a conspicuous place open for public inspection for the entire time of the construction and the use and operation of the equipment or until the expiration of the permit. Written dimensions on these Drawings shall have precedence over scaled dimensions. Drawings are not to be scaled. All work shall be laid out by dimensions. Layout to be approved by Architect prior to proceeding with the Work. 35. DEFINITIONS a. Indicated: Shown on Drawings by notes, graphics or schedules, or written into other portions of Contract Documents. Terms such as "shown," "noted," "scheduled" and "specified" have same meaning as "indicated," and are used to assist the reader in locating particular information. b. Directed, Requested, Approved, Accepted, etc.: These terms imply "by the Architect" unless otherwise General Requirements
01000-6
indicated. c. Reviewed by Architect: In no case releases Contractor from responsibility to fulfill requirements of Contract Documents. d. Project Site: Space available to Contractor at location of Project, either exclusively or to be shared with separate contractors, for performance of Work. e. Furnish: Supply and deliver to project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly installation and similar subsequent requirements. f. Install: Operations at project site, including unloading, unpacking, assembly, erection, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning and similar operations. g. h. i. j. k. 1.03 A. Installer: Entity (firm or person) engaged to install work, by Contractor, subcontractor or sub‐
subcontractor. Installers are required to be skilled experts in work they are engaged to install. Overlapping/Conflicting Requirements: Most stringent (generally most costly) applies and will be enforced, unless more detailed language written directly into Contract Documents clearly indicates that a less stringent requirement is acceptable. Refer uncertainties to Architect for decision before proceeding. Abbreviations, Plural Words: Abbreviations, where not defined in Contract Documents, will be interpreted to mean the normal construction industry terminology, determined by recognized grammatical rules, by the Architect. Plural words will be interpreted as singular and singular words will be interpreted as plural where applicable for context of Contract Documents. Contract Documents: Requirements of the work are contained in the Contract Documents and include cross‐reference therein to publish information, which is not necessarily bound therewith. PROJECT COORDINATION The Contractor shall: 1. 2. 3. 4. B. Provide: Furnish and install, complete and ready for intended use. Coordinate work of his own employees. Expedite his work to ensure compliance with schedules. Coordinate and schedule his work with that of other contractors and with work by the Owner. Not restrict access to the building during hours of operation. Provide adequate protection of the public from construction activities. Maintain pedestrian right‐of‐way on public sidewalks. Construction Organization and Start‐Up The Architect shall establish on‐site lines of authority and communications, including the following: General Requirements
01000-7
1. 2. 3. 1.04 Scheduling and conducting a pre‐construction meeting and progress meetings. Establishing procedures for transmittal of intra‐project communications. Interpreting Contract Documents and assisting in resolution of questions or conflicts which may arise. SUBMITTALS A. B. C. General: Submit shop drawings, product data and samples as required by the Contract Documents. Shop Drawings: Drawings shall be presented in a clear and thorough manner. Details shall be identified by reference to details shown on the Contract Drawings. Product Data: Each copy shall be clearly marked to: D. E. 1. Identify pertinent products. 2. Show performance characteristics and capacities. 3. Show dimensions and required clearances. Samples: Samples shall be of sufficient size and quantity to clearly illustrate: 1. Functional characteristics of the product. 2. Full range of color, texture and pattern. Submission Requirements 1. Make submittals promptly in accordance with approved schedule and in such sequence as to cause no delay in the Work or in the work of any other contractor. 2. Number of Required Submittals a. b. c. Shop Drawings: Submit three (3) opaque reproductions and one (1) sepia reproducible. Product Data: Submit three (3) copies of data. Samples: Submit the number stated in each specification section. If not stated, provide two (2) sets of each sample requested. 3. Submittal Information a. b. The date of submission and the dates of any previous submissions. The project title and number. c. The name of the: General Requirements
01000-8
(1) (2) (3) (4) Architect Contractor Manufacturer Manufacturer's Representative d. Identification of the product, with the appropriate specification section number. e. f. g. h. i. Indication of location where item is to be installed. F. Field dimensions, if required, clearly identified as such. Identification of deviations from Contract Documents. Identification or revisions on resubmittals. An 8" x 3" blank space for Architect's stamp. Resubmission Requirements 1. Shop Drawings and Product Data a. b. Revise initial drawings or data and resubmit as specified for the initial submittal. Indicate any changes which have been made. 2. 1.05 A. B. C. 1.06 A. Submit new samples as required for initial submittal. SECURITY Protect operations at the site and be responsible for theft, vandalism or damage resulting from Contractor's work or employees. Maintain a current list of approved persons. Only personnel properly identified should be permitted on the site. MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT Delivery and Handling 1. Arrange deliveries of products in accordance with construction schedules to avoid conflict with work and conditions at the site. a. Deliver products in undamaged condition, in manufacturer's original containers or packaging, General Requirements
01000-9
with identifying labels intact and legible. b. Immediately on delivery, inspect shipments to ensure compliance with requirements of Contract Documents and approved submittals and that products are properly protected and undamaged. 2. B. Storage and Protection 1. 2. 3. C. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods which prevent soiling and damage. Store products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, with seals and labels intact and legible. The Contractor shall provide additional off site storage space as required. Arrange storage in a manner to provide easy access for inspection. Make periodic inspections of stored products to ensure that products are maintained under specified conditions and free from damage or deterioration. Provide substantial coverings as necessary to protect installed products from damage from traffic and subsequent construction operations. Remove when instructed by the Architect. Substitutions and Product Options 1. Product List: Within ten (10) days after Contract Date, submit to the Architect a complete list of major products proposed to be used, with the name of the manufacturer and the installing subcontractor. 2. Product Options a. b. c. For products specified by naming several products or manufacturers, select any one of the products or manufacturers named which complies with the specifications. For products specified by naming one or more products or manufacturers and "or equal," Contractor shall submit a request for substitution for any product or manufacturer not specifically named. For products specified by naming only one product and manufacturer, there is no option. 3. Substitutions a. b. For a period of fifteen (15) days after Contract Date, the Architect will consider written requests from Contractor for substitution of products. Submit a separate request for each product complete with supporting documentation and with samples as appropriate, including: (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) Comparison of the qualities of the proposed substitution with that specified. Changes required in other elements of the Work because of the substitution. Effect on the construction schedule. Cost data comparing the proposed substitution with the product specified. Source of replacement materials. General Requirements
01000-10
c. The Architect shall be the judge of the acceptability of the proposed substitution. 4. A request for a substitution constitutes a representation that Contractor: a. Has investigated the proposed product and determined that it is equal to or superior in all respects to that specified. b. Will provide the same warranties for the substitution as for the product specified. c. Waives all claims for additional costs, under his responsibility, which may subsequently become apparent. 5. The Architect will review requests for substitutions with reasonable promptness and notify Contractor, in writing, of the decision to accept or reject the requested substitution. 1.07 CLEANING A. General 1. Execute cleaning, during progress of the Work and at completion of the Work, as required by General Conditions. 2. Conduct cleaning and disposal operations to comply with codes, ordinances and regulations. B. Materials 1. Use only those cleaning materials and methods recommended by the manufacturer of the surface material to be cleaned. 2. Use cleaning materials only on surfaces recommended by the cleaning material manufacturer. C. During Construction 1. The Contractor shall keep the Work free from accumulations of waste materials and rubbish resulting from construction operations on a daily basis. 2. The Work shall be protected and cleaned at the end of each work day. D. Final Cleaning 1. Remove grease, mastic, adhesives, dust, dirt, stains, fingerprints, labels and other foreign materials from sight‐exposed surfaces including new glass entrance doors. 2. Prior to final acceptance, Contractor, Architect and Owner's Representative shall conduct an inspection of sight‐exposed interior surfaces and all work areas, to verify that the entire Work is clean. General Requirements
01000-11
1.08 A. B. MAINTENANCE DATA Compile and produce data and related information appropriate for Owner's maintenance of products furnished under Contract. Prepare maintenance data in an organized manner and as referenced in other pertinent sections of these specifications. C. Instruct Owner's personnel in maintenance of products. END OF SECTION General Requirements
01000-12
SECTION 02070 ‐ SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PART 1 ‐ GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY OF WORK A. The Work of this Section includes, but is not necessarily limited to, the following: 1. Structural removals 2. Cutting of existing slab 3. Flooring – including wood, tile and stone 4. HVAC and related work 5. Sprinkler B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Schedule: Submit schedule indicating proposed methods and sequence of operations for selective demolition work to Building Management for review prior to commencement of work. B. Occupancy: Conduct selective demolition work in a manner that will minimize need for disruption of normal operations in the Building. Provide a minimum of 24 hours' advance notice to the Building Management of demolition activities which will severely impact Building's normal operations, construction activity or other tenant move‐in. C. Condition of Structures: The Contractor assumes responsibility for actual condition of items or structures to be demolished. D. Protection: Provide temporary barricades and other forms of protection as required to protect personnel and general public from injury due to selective demolition work. Provide shoring, bracing or support to prevent movement, settlement or collapse of structure or element to be demolished and adjacent facilities or work to remain. E. Damage: Promptly repair damage caused to adjacent facilities by demolition work. F. Utility Services: Maintain and keep in service existing utilities indicated to remain. Protect against damage during demolition operations and restore systems to base building areas. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving occupied or used facilities, except when authorized in writing by Selective Demolition
02070-1
authorities having jurisdiction. Provide temporary services during interruptions of existing utilities, as acceptable to governing authorities. G. 1.03 A. Environmental Controls: Use water sprinkling, temporary enclosures and other suitable methods to limit dust and dirt rising and scattering in air to the lowest practical level. Comply with governing regulations pertaining to environmental protection. Do not use water when it may create hazardous or objectionable conditions such as flooding. REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS Perform demolition in accordance with applicable Federal, State and local building code and regulations, safety standards and requirements of authorities, having jurisdiction, including applicable requirements of the following: 1.
2.
3.
Safety Requirements for Demolition: ANSI A 10.6. Building Construction Operation: ANSI/NFPA 241. Local regulations for protection of the public and control of noise, dust, dirt and other pollutants. PART 2 ‐ EXECUTION 2.01 INSPECTION Prior to commencement of selective demolition work, inspect areas in which work will be performed. Photograph existing conditions of structure surfaces, equipment or of surrounding properties which could be misconstrued as damage resulting from selective demolition work; file with Building Management prior to starting work. 2.02 DEMOLITION A. Perform selective demolition work in a systematic manner. Use such methods as required to complete work indicated on Drawings in accordance with demolition schedule and governing regulations. 1. Demolish concrete and masonry in small sections. Cut concrete and masonry at junctures with construction to remain using power‐driven masonry saw or hand tools; do not use power‐driven impact tools. 2. Locate demolition equipment throughout structure and promptly remove debris to avoid imposing excessive loads on supporting walls, floors or framing. 3. Provide services for effective air and water pollution controls as required by local authorities having jurisdiction. B. If unanticipated mechanical, electrical or structural elements which conflict with intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure both nature and extent of the conflict. Submit report to Building Management in written, accurate detail. Pending receipt of directive from Building Management rearrange selective demolition schedule as necessary to continue overall job progress without delay. 2.03 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS Selective Demolition
02070-2
2.04 A. Remove debris, rubbish and other materials resulting from demolition operations from building site. Transport and legally dispose of materials off site. If hazardous materials are encountered during demolition operations, comply with applicable regulations, laws and ordinances concerning removal, handling and protection against exposure or environmental pollution. CLEAN‐UP AND REPAIR Upon completion of demolition work, remove tools, equipment and demolished materials from site. Remove protection and leave interior areas broom clean. 1.
2.
3.
B. Remove both new and existing protection except for those specified to remain. Temporary partitions and closures will not be required to remain and shall be demolished and removed off the site. Leave interior areas broom clean. Repair demolition performed in excess of that required. Return remaining structures and surfaces to condition existing prior to commencement of selective demolition work. Repair adjacent construction or surfaces soiled or damaged by selective demolition work. END OF SECTION Selective Demolition
02070-3
SECTION 02112 ‐ ALTERATION DEMOLITION PART 1 ‐ GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY OF WORK A.
The Work of this Section includes, but is not necessarily limited to, the following: Demolition and removal necessary to accommodate the alterations. B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere 1. Temp Lighting 2. Temp Sprinkler Loop 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
The general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, apply to the work specified in this Section. B.
Examine all Drawings. Coordinate the work of this Section with all related and adjoining work. 1.03 SCHEDULE FOR DEMOLITION A.
Submit two (2) copies of proposed methods and operations of demolition and removals to the Owner and Client for review prior to the start of work. Include in the schedule the coordination for shut‐offs, capping and continuation of utility services, mechanical and electrical systems, as required. B.
The work shall be so performed as not to interfere with access to any occupied parts of the existing building and so as to cause the least possible interference with the operation of the Building or essential services thereof. The Contractor shall work out a time schedule with the Owner and obtain written approval of the Owner two (2) weeks in advance of work which may or will cause interference. 1.04 JOB CONDITIONS A.
Conditions existing at the time of inspection for bidding purposes will be maintained by the Owner insofar as practicable. The General Contractor will be fully responsible for ascertaining at time of bidding what variations in the areas of demolition may occur by Owner's removal and salvage operations prior to the start of the demolition work. B.
Items of salvageable value to the Contractor may be removed as the work progresses. Salvaged items must be transported from the site as they are removed. Storage or sale of removed items on the site will not be permitted. C.
All demolition and removal work shall be performed in accordance with hours permitted by the Owner. The General Contractor is to include any overtime hours which may be required. D.
Fire alarm and firefighting equipment and devices shall be operational and unobstructed at all times. Alteration Demolition
02112-1
E.
Existing entrances, exits and corridors shall be kept open and free from any operations so as not to interfere with ingress and egress at any time. F.
Adequate protection for all parts of the present building and its contents and occupants shall be provided wherever work under this Section is to be performed. G.
Proper protection shall be provided around all areas in which demolition is to be carried on so as to prevent dirt or dust from entering active portions of the building. Protective measures shall meet with the approval of the Owner. H.
If asbestos spray fireproofing is encountered, the demolition subcontractor shall immediately discontinue operations and notify the Contractor and the Client. 1.05 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES A.
Perform all work in accordance with the requirements of the N.Y.C. Building Code and all Federal, state and local laws, rules and regulations. B.
Obtain all permits including any required overtime permits and pay all fees required for the work. PART 2 ‐ EXECUTION 2.01 DEMOLITION A.
Demolition and removals shall be done in a systematic manner. B.
Masonry and concrete shall be demolished in small sections. Walls shall be demolished in small sections. C.
Doors and windows to be removed and blocked up shall include removal of frames, sills, stools and anchors. D.
Existing finishes (floor, wall, ceiling, etc.) shall be removed where new finishes are required, unless otherwise noted. E.
Where ceilings are removed for new ceilings, they shall be carefully removed so the hangers can be used for the new ceilings. F.
Items of salvageable value to the Client shall be carefully removed and placed in Client's storage. G.
Mechanical and electrical items to be removed shall not be removed until discontinuance is effected by the appropriate trade. 2.02 DISPOSAL Of DEMOLISHED MATERIALS Alteration Demolition
02112-2
A.
Remove from the site and legally dispose of all debris, rubbish and other materials resulting from demolition operations. Storage or sale of removed materials will not be permitted on the site. If hazardous materials are encountered during demolition operations, comply with applicable regulations, laws and ordinances concerning removal, handling and protection against exposure or environmental pollution. B.
Burning of removed materials from demolished structures will not be permitted on the site. 2.03 CLEAN UP AND REPAIR A.
Upon completion of demolition work, remove tools, equipment and demolished materials from site. Remove protection and leave interior areas broom clean. B.
Repair demolition performed in excess of that required. Return remaining structures and surfaces to condition existing prior to commencement of selective demolition work. Repair adjacent construction or surfaces soiled or damaged by selective demolition work. END OF SECTION Alteration Demolition
02112-3
SECTION 03360 – SPECIAL CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHES PART 1 GENERAL 1. 1 SUMMARY A.
This section includes the following. 1. Applying Sealer and Hardener, and polishing concrete to specified finish level. Finish to be medium sheen. Shop blast & level entire floor & grind down. Remove any protruding object typically throughout the entire floor. Fill in any openings/divots with concrete to match existing as required. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials: 1. ASTM‐C779, Standard Test Method for Abrasion Resistance of Horizontal Concrete Surfaces 2. ASTM G23‐81, Ultraviolet Light & Water Spray 3. ASTM C805, Impact Strength B. American Concrete Institute 1. ACI 302. 1R‐89, Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction C. Other Test: 1. Reflectivity 1.3 SUBMITTALS A.
Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01600‐ Product Requirements. 1. Provide submittal information within 35 calendar days after the contractor has received the owner's notice to proceed. B . Product data: 1. Submit special concrete finishes manufacturer's specifications and test data. 2. Submit special concrete finishes describing product to be provided, giving manufacturer’s name and product name for the specified material proposed to be provided under this section. 3. Submit special concrete finishes manufacturer's recommended installation procedures; which when approved by the Architect, will July 24, 2007
1
become the basis for accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used on the work. 4. Submit special concrete finishes technical data sheet giving descriptive data, curing time, and application requirements. 5. Submit special concrete finishes manufacturer’s Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) and other safety requirements. 6. Follow all special concrete finishes published manufacturer’s installation instructions. C. Test Reports: 1. Provide certified test reports, prepared by an independent testing laboratory, confirming compliance with specified performance criteria. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Installer Qualifications: 1. Use an experienced installer and adequate number of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary craft. 2. The special concrete finish manufacturer shall certify applicator. 3. Applicator shall be familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of work of this section. B.
Manufacturer’s Certification: 1. Provide letter of certification from concrete finish manufacturer stating that installer is certified applicator of special concrete finishes, and is familiar with proper procedures and installation requirements required by the manufacturer. C.
Mock‐ups: 1. Apply mock‐ups of each type finish, to demonstrate typical joints, surface finish, color variation (if any), and standard of workmanship. a. Build mock‐ups approximately 50 square feet in the location indicated or if not indicated, as directed by the Architect or Owner Representative. b. Notify Architect or Owner Representative seven days in advance of dates and times when mock‐ups will be constructed. c. Obtain from the Architect or Owner Representative approval of mock‐ups before starting construction. d. If the Architect or Owner Representative determines that mock‐
ups do not meet requirements, demolish and remove them from the site and cast others until mock‐ups are approved. July 24, 2007
2
e. Maintain mock‐ups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed work. f. Approved mock‐ups may become part of the completed work if undisturbed at time of substantial completion. D.
E.
1.5 Protection 1. No satisfactory chemical or cleaning procedure is available to remove petroleum stains from the concrete surface. Prevention is therefore essential. a. All hydraulic powered equipment must be diapered to avoid staining of the concrete. b. No trade will park vehicles on the inside slab. If necessary to complete their scope of work, drop cloths will be placed under vehicles at all times. c. No pipe cutting machine will be used on the inside floor slab. d. Steel will not be placed on interior slab to avoid rust staining. e. Acids and acidic detergents will not come into contact with slab. f. All trades informed that the slab must be protected at all times. Pre‐Installation Conference: 1. Conduct conference at project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section “ Project Management and Coordination” DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A.
Deliver materials in original containers, with seal’s unbroken, bearing manufacturer labels indicating brand name and directions for storage. B.
Dispense special concrete finish material from factory numbered and sealed containers. Maintain record of container numbers. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A.
July 24, 2007
Environmental limitations: 1. Comply with manufacturers written instructions for substrate temperature and moisture content, ambient temperature and humidity, ventilation, and other conditions affecting topping performance. a. Concrete Floor Flatness rating recommended at least 40, where possible. b. Concrete Floor Levelness rating recommended at least 30, where possible. 3
c. Concrete must be cured a minimum of 45 days or as directed by the manufacturer before application of Retro Plate can begin. d. Application of Retro‐Plate shall take place 10 days prior to installation of equipment and substantial completion, thus providing a complete, uninhibited concrete slab for application. B.
Close areas to traffic during floor application and after application, for time period recommended in writing by manufacturer. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS AND MANUFACTURERS A.
HARDENING/SEALING AGENT 1. Retro‐Plate 99, manufactured by Advanced Floor Products, Inc., P.O. Box 50533, Provo, Utah 84605, 801‐812‐3420. a. Performance Criteria: i. Abrasion Resistance: ASTM C779 – Up to 400% increase in abrasion resistance. ii. Impact Strength: ASTM C805 – Up to 21% increase impact strength. iii. Ultra Violet Light and Water Spray: ASTM G23‐81 – No adverse effect to ultra violet and water spray. iv. Reflectivity: Up to 30% increase in reflectivity. 2. Certified Applicators 3. Manufacturer’s Regional Representative 2.2 RELATED MATERIALS A.
Neutralizing Agent: 1. Tri‐sodium Phosphate B.
Water: 1. Potable PART 3‐ EXECUTION 3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS: July 24, 2007
4
A.
B.
Examine substrate, with installer present, for conditions affecting performance of finish. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. Verify that base slab meet finish and surface profile requirements in Division 3 Section “Cast‐In‐Place Concrete,” and Project Conditions above. C.
3.2 Prior to application, verify that floor surfaces are free of construction latents. APPLICATION A.
Start any of the floor finish applications in presence of manufacturer’s technical representative. B.
Sealing, Hardening and Polishing of Concrete Surface 1. Concrete must be in place a minimum of 45 days or as directed by the manufacturer before application can begin. 2. Application is to take place at least 10 days prior to racking and other in‐store accessory installation, thus providing a complete, uninhibited concrete slab for application 3. Only a certified applicator shall apply Retro‐Plate 99. Applicable procedures must be followed as recommended by the product manufacturer and as required to match approved test sample. 4. Achieve waterproofing, hardening, dust‐proofing, and abrasion resistance of the surface without changing the natural appearance of the concrete, except for the sheen. 5. Polish to required sheen level. 3.3 WORKMANSHIP AND CLEANING: A.
B.
C.
The premises shall be kept clean and free of debris at all times. D.
Remove debris from jobsite 1. Dispose of materials in separate, closed containers in accordance with local regulations. Remove spatter from adjoining surfaces, as necessary. Repair damages to surface caused by cleaning operations. July 24, 2007
5
3.4 PROTECTION: A. July 24, 2007
Protect finished work until fully cured in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. END OF SPECIFICATION SECTION 033600 6
SECTION 04200 ‐ MASONRY WORK PART 1 ‐ GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY OF WORK A. The Work of this Section includes all labor, materials, equipment, and services necessary to complete the masonry work as shown on the drawings and specified herein, including but not necessarily limited to, the following: 1. Concrete block 2. Face brick, common brick 3. Metal joint reinforcing, anchors, ties and related accessories for masonry 4. Re‐pointing existing face brick, front and rear 5. Waterproof treatment of existing masonry cellar walls 6. Blocking up openings and holes in existing masonry walls B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere 1. Light gauge metal framing ‐ See Drawings. 2. Sealant ‐ See Drawings. 3. Painting of existing brick walls ‐ See Section 09900. 1.02 SUBMITTALS Submit procedures and materials for cleaning masonry work. 1.03 DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE A. General: Deliver, store, handle and protect all materials from damage, moisture, dirt and intrusion of foreign matter. Store all masonry units and mortar materials on raised platforms and under ventilated and waterproof cover. Store packaged materials in manufacturer's unopened containers, marked with manufacturer's name and product brand name. Immediately reseal containers after partial use. Remove and replace damaged materials. B. Masonry Units: Pack, deliver and store to prevent breakage, cracking, chipping, spalling or other damage. Store, protect and ventilate units at project site. C. Aggregate: Store with provisions for good drainage. Masonry Work
04200-1
D. 1.04 A. B. C. Reinforcement and Anchors: Store and protect so that when in place, joint reinforcement and anchors will be free of soil, dirt, ice, loose rust, scale or other coatings which would destroy or reduce bond with mortar. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS Protection of Work: During erection, cover top of walls with waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed structures when work is not in progress. Extend cover a minimum of 24" down both sides and hold cover securely in place. Staining: Prevent grout or mortar of soil from staining the face of masonry to be left exposed or painted. Immediately remove any grout or mortar in contact with such masonry. Protect base of walls from rain‐
splashed mud and mortar splatter by means of coverings spread on ground and over wall surfaces. D. Protect sills, ledges and projections from mortar droppings. E. Conform to BIA requirements for masonry construction in cold weather. PART 2 ‐ PRODUCTS 2.01 MASONRY UNITS, GENERAL A. Manufacturer: Obtain masonry units from one manufacturer, of uniform texture and color for each kind required, for each continuous area and for visually‐related areas. B. Masonry Unit Characteristics: Provide units complying with standards referenced and requirements indicated. 2.02 CONCRETE BLOCK A. Aggregate: All aggregate for block shall conform to ASTM C331 and shall be produced by the rotary kiln process, shall be 100% "solite" or "norlite" and shall be graded to ensure a consistent texture. B. Portland cement, ASTM C150, Type 1, one source. C. Type 1. All concrete block units shall be square, true and have sharp arrises. They shall be dimensionally stable in regard to height, width and length. 2. All units shall be free of organic impurities that will cause rusting, staining or pop‐outs and shall contain no combustible matter. 3. Sizes and Shapes: Nominal face size shall be 8" x 16" x 8" x 18" thickness as indicated on drawings, with stretcher units, jamb units, header units, square corner units (at ends and corners of exposed or painted work), lintel units and other special shapes and sizes required to complete the work. 4. For all block walls and partitions, provide block conforming to ASTM C90, Grade N, Type 1; 1350 psi on net area. 5. Density of concrete block shall not exceed 95 lbs./ft.3. Masonry Work
04200-2
6. 7. a. b. C. 1. 2. a. b. E. 1. 2. 3. F. 1. 2. 3. Shrinkage: Shrinkage of concrete blocks shall not exceed .045% when tested in accordance with ASTM C426‐70. Water Content At the time of delivery to the job site, concrete masonry units shall have a value in weight of contained water of not more than 35% of the fully saturated content for the unit tested. Ship all units from the factory and store at the job site, with all necessary protection to prevent increase of water content from rain and other sources. Brick: Common brick, ASTM C62, Grade SW used in concealed construction only. D. Joint Reinforcing Welded truss design of No. 9 gauge galvanized steel wire, deformed, width 1" to 1‐1/2" to 2" less than wall thickness. Provide specially formed prefabricated pieces at corners and intersections of walls or partitions. Use truss reinforcement at brick and block construction spanning between brick and block every block course. Approved Joint Reinforcing Manufacturers Dur‐O‐Wal A. A. Wire Anchors, Ties & Rods Flat Metal Ties: Galvanized steel, 16 gauge by 7/8" wide, crimped or corrugated, by length to suit condition. Where dovetail anchors have not been set in concrete, anchor metal ties to concrete using expansion bolts or power‐actuated fasteners meeting with Architect's approval. Masonry Veneer Anchors for Fastening to Steel Studs: Flexible 2‐piece anchors equal to DW‐10X, with neoprene gaskets. Screws for fastening ties to studs shall be cadmium plated or co‐polymer coated. Size tie to extend with 3/4" of face to masonry veneer. Wire Mesh: Galvanized 16 gauge steel wire, 1/4" square mesh, width 1/2" less than wall thickness by length to suit condition. Mortar Materials Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type 1, standard color, one source. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207, Type S, as manufactured by Corsons or approved equal. Sand: Clean, washed, buff‐colored sand, graded per ASTM C144. Masonry Work
04200-3
4. 5. G. 1. 2. 3. H. 1. 2. Water: Clean, fresh and suitable for drinking. Masonry Cement (permitted for interior block partitions): ASTM C91. Mortar Mix Exterior Face Brick Construction: Mortar mix shall meet design strengths of ASTM C270, Type N, cement/lime mortar. Color mortar shall match existing. Other Masonry Construction: Provide mortar conforming to ASTM C270, Type M (below grade) and Type S (above grade). Pointing Mortar: 1 part Portland cement, 1 part lime, 6 parts sand. Accessory Items Provide 1/4" diameter plastic tube weep holes with removable rope inserts. Waterproofing treatment for cellar foundation walls shall be "thoroseal" made by Thoro System Products, Inc. or approved equal. I. Consolidant Consolidant shall be Conservaire H‐40 manufactured by ProSoCo, or equal. Apply per manufacturer's recommendations. PART 3 ‐ EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION Examine the areas and conditions where masonry is to be installed and notify the Architect of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected by the Contractor in a manner acceptable to the Architect. 3.02 COORDINATION Carefully coordinate with all other trades to ensure proper and adequate interface of the work of other trades with the work of this Section. 3.03 PREPARATION A. Brick 1. Wet brick having ASTM C67 absorption rates greater than 0.025 oz./in.2 per minute. 2. Determine absorption by placing 20 drops of water inside a circle the size of a quarter on typical units. If water is absorbed within 1 to 1‐1/2 minutes, wet brick before laying. Masonry Work
04200-4
3. 4. B. 3.04 A. 1. 2. 3. B. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. C. D. 1. 2. Use setting methods which ensure that each masonry unit is nearly saturated but surface dry when laid. During freezing weather, comply with the recommendation of BIA. Except for absorbent units specified to be wetted, lay masonry units dry. Concrete Block: Do not wet concrete block units. INSTALLATION General Build walls to the full thickness shown. Build single wythe walls to the actual thickness of the masonry units, using units of nominal thickness shown. Lay up walls plumb and true with courses level, accurately spaced and coordinated with other work. Pattern Bond: Lay exposed masonry in pattern and jointing to match existing. Mortar Bedding and Jointing All joints between bricks shall be completely filled with mortar. Bed joints shall be formed of a thick layer of smooth mortar, applied to the units previously laid, with the brick then shoved in place or bed joints may be formed as specified for cross joints. Cross joints shall be formed by applying full coats of mortar to the entire end of the entire side, as the case requires and then shoving the mortar‐covered end and/or side of the brick tightly against the bricks previously laid; the practice of buttering the corners of brick and then throwing mortar scrapings into the empty joints will be not permitted. Grouting shall be done only as necessary. Do not slush head joints. Lay concrete masonry units with full head and bead joints. Lay masonry walls with joints to match existing. Tool exposed joints slightly concave, to match existing. Remove masonry units disturbed after laying; clean and reset in fresh mortar. Do not pound corners at jambs to fit stretcher units which have been set in position. If adjustments are required, remove units, clean off mortar and reset in fresh mortar. Stopping and Resuming Work: Rake back 1/2 brick length in each course; do not tooth. Clean exposed surfaces of set masonry, wet units lightly (if required) and remove loose masonry units and mortar prior to laying fresh masonry. Built‐In Work As the Work progresses, build in items specified under this and other sections of these specifications. Fill in solidly with masonry around built‐in items. Grout metal items embedded or built into masonry work solidly with grout. Masonry Work
04200-5
3. E. 1. 2. F. 1. 2. G. 1. 2. H. I. J. 1. 2. Grout under lintels, with solid bed of mortar. Cutting and Patching All exposed masonry, new and existing, which requires cutting or fitting shall be cut accurately to size with motorized carborundum or diamond saw, producing cut edges. All masonry which requires patching in exposed work, if approved by Architect, shall be patched neatly with mortar to match appearance of masonry as closely as possible and to the Architect's satisfaction. Solid Wall Construction Fill the vertical longitudinal joining between wythes solidly with mortar by parging the in‐place wythe and shoving units into the parging. Tie wythes with continuous horizontal reinforcement embedded in mortar joints 16" o.c. vertically. Cavity Walls (at steel stud construction) Cavity between facing and stud back‐up shall be kept clean and clear of all mortar droppings and no mortar ledges shall project into the cavity. Temporary wood strips, cut to width of cavity and fitted with lift‐up wires, shall be laid on the ties and carefully lifted out before placement of the next layer of reinforcement. Provide weep joints in exterior wythe of cavity above ledges and through wall flashing as it extends out, along bottom of cavity walls, bond beams, shelf angles and other water stops; spaces 2'‐0" o.c. Ties and Anchors: Provide ties and anchors as shown or required, but not less than one metal tie, spaced not to exceed 16" o.c. horizontally and vertically. Stagger ties in alternate courses. Provide additional ties within 1'‐0" of all openings and space not more than 3'‐0" apart around perimeter of openings. Lintels: Where steel lintels are indicated, install loose steel lintels furnished by Section 05500, allowing 6" bearing minimum at ends. See Structural Drawings. Flashing and Masonry Work: Provide concealed flashing in masonry work at or above, all shelf angles, lintels, ledges and other obstructions to the downward flow of water in the wall so as to divert such water to the exterior. Prepare masonry surfaces smooth and free from projections which could puncture flashing. Place through wall flashing on bed of mortar and cover with mortar. Seal penetrations in flashing with mastic before covering with mortar. Extend the full length of lintels and shelf angles a minimum of 4" into masonry each end. Extend flashing from a line 1/2" in from exterior face of outer wythe of masonry, through the outer wythe, turned up a minimum of 4" and through the inner wythe to within 1/2" of the interior face of the wall in exposed work. Where interior surface of inner wythe is concealed by furring, carry flashing completely through the inner wythe and turn up approximately 2". At heads and sills, turn up ends not less than 2" to form a pan. Provide weep hoses in the head joints of the same course of masonry bedded in the flashing mortar. Masonry Work
04200-6
3. 4. 1. a. b. c. d. 2. a. b. c. d. Where flashing is penetrated by anchors, patch flashings at penetration using adhesive and mastic recommended by the manufacturer to ensure a watertight seal. Install flashing in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, using adhesive, primer, thinner, cleaner and mastic as recommended by flashing manufacturer. K. Re‐pointing Existing Masonry Joint Raking Rake out mortar from joints to depths equal to 2‐1/2 times their widths but not less than 1/2" nor less than that required to expose sound, un‐weathered mortar. Remove mortar from masonry surfaces within raked‐out joints to provide reveals with square backs and to exposed masonry for contact with pointing mortar. Brush, vacuum or flush joints to remove dirt and loose debris. Do not spall edges of masonry units or widen joints. Replace any masonry units which become damaged. Cut out old mortar by hand with chisel and mallet, unless otherwise indicated. Joint Pointing Rinse masonry joint surfaces with water to remove any dust and mortar particles. Time application of rinsing so that, at time of pointing, excess water has evaporated or run off and joint surfaces are damp but free of standing water. Apply first layer of pointing mortar to areas where existing mortar was removed to depths greater than surrounding areas. Apply in layers not greater than 3/8" until a uniform depth is formed. Compact each layer thoroughly and allow to become thumbprint hard before applying next layer. After joints have been filled to a uniform depth, place remaining pointing mortar in three (3) layers with each of first and second layers filling approximately 2/5ths of joint depth and the third layer to be the remaining 1/5th. Fully compact each layer and allow to become thumbprint hard before applying next layer. Where existing bricks have rounded edges, recess final layer slightly from face. Take care not to spread mortar over edges onto exposed masonry surfaces or to feather edge mortar. When mortar is thumbprint hard, tool joints to match original appearance of joints, unless otherwise indicated. Remove excess mortar from edge of joint by brushing. e. Cure mortar by maintaining in a damp condition for not less than 72 hours. END OF SECTION Masonry Work
04200-7
SECTION 05500 ‐ MISCELLANEOUS METALS PART I GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY OF WORK A. SCOPE Work of this section shall be governed by the contract documents, and all applicable laws of the places where the work is performed. Provide materials, labor, equipment and services necessary to furnish, deliver and install all work of this Section as shown on the drawings, as specified herein, and/or as required by job conditions, including but not limited to the following: 1. All miscellaneous metals in accordance with the drawings, schedules, and as specified herein. B. WORK INCLUDED 1. Steel supports for equipment as required for mechanical and electrical trades. 2. Metal louvers, registers and grilles for interior ventilation in gypsum board, plaster and cabinetwork. 3. Miscellaneous steel framing and shapes, such as rolled and bent plates, sleeves, clips, brackets, hangers, struts, anchors and other fastenings and supports indicated on drawings or required but not specifically mentioned to be provided as part of the work of other sections. 4. Metal access doors to all plumbing shut‐off valves, and metal access doors as required to HVAC equipment. 5. Miscellaneous decorative metal frames, trim and moldings called out on drawings or otherwise implied. C. RELATED WORK OF OTHER SECTIONS 1. Rough & Finish Carpentry 06100 2. Cabinetwork/Woodwork 06400 3. Glass, Glazing and Mirror 08800 4. Lath & Plaster 09200 5. Gypsum Drywall 09250 6. Mechanical Equipment 15010 thru 15900 7. Electrical Equipment 16010 thru 16930 1.02 STANDARDS FOR MATERIALS AND INSTALLATION A. Standard products meeting the general requirements will be acceptable if details of construction and installation are approved by the Architect. Supplementary parts necessary to complete each item shall be Miscellaneous Metals
05500-1
included, even though such parts are not definitely shown or specified. Anchors, brackets, pipe sleeves, for securing metal work to the adjacent construction shall be included. B. C. Metals shall be free from defects, impairing strength, durability, or appearance, and shall be of the best commercial quality for purposes specified. All metals shall be new materials and shall be made with structural properties to safely sustain or withstand stresses and strains to which normally subjected. Members shall be true to details, clean and straight. Curved work shall be true to radii and with smooth finished surfaces. Gauges of metals indicated on the drawings or specified herein are U.S. Standard for ferrous metals and Brown & Sharpe for non‐ferrous metals. Where no thickness or gauge is indicated on the drawings or specified herein, aluminum extrusions shall be not less than 1/8" thick and steel sheets not less than No. 16 gauge. PART 2 ‐ PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. All structural steel shapes shall conform to ASTM A572, structural second structural steel shapes elsewhere shall conform to ASTM A36 unless otherwise noted. B. Steel sheets shall conform to ASTM A245. C. Steel Plates shall conform to ASTM A283. D. Steel pipe shall conform to ASTM A120. Steel pipe shall be 1 1/4" I.D., galvanized, of approved manufacturer, uniform in quality and free from defects affecting function or appearance. E. Aluminum extrusions shall be alloy No. 6063‐T5 Temper, finished as shown on drawings. F. Stainless steel shall be A.I.S.I. Type 302, finished as shown on drawings. G. Red brass, where specifically called out on drawings, shall be alloyed as follows: Copper (Cu) 85% Zinc (Zn) 15% Lead (Pb) .07% (Maximum) Iron (Fe) .05% H. Brass, except where specifically called out as red brass, shall be, as best suited for the application, alloyed as follows: Architectural Bronze Muntz Metal Copper (Cu) 58% 60% Zinc (Zn) 38.75% 40% Lead (Pb) 0.20% Iron (Fe) ‐‐‐ 0.15% 2.02 GALVANIZING Miscellaneous Metals
05500-2
A. B. C. 2.03 A. B. C. D. 2.04 A. B. Hot‐Dip Galvanizing shall conform to ASTM A123. Galvanized coating shall successfully withstand the Preece Test referred to in the standard. Electro‐Galvanizing, where required, shall conform to the requirements for Type GA (0.0010 inch‐min. thickness) of ASTM A164. Paint for shop priming of ferrous metal (other than galvanized or cast‐abrasive surfaces) shall be "No. 99 Metal Primer" as manufactured by Themec Co., Inc., Pittsburgh Plate Glass Co.'s "Multiprime" or "Sherwin Williams" "Kem‐Kromik Primer." PAINTING All ferrous metal surfaces (except galvanized steel) shall be primed and given a shop coat of the specified paint. Surfaces which will be concealed in the finished construction or will not be accessible to finish painting shall receive an additional shop coat of the specified paint to which a small amount of tinting has been added for color differentiation. Marred and abraded surfaces shall be touched‐up with the specified paint after erection in the field. Before painting, steel or icon surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned with wire brushes, or other proper and effective means, of all loose scale, fillings, dirt and other objectionable materials. Grease shall be removed with gasoline, benzine or other volatile cleaner. Painting shall be done in dry weather or under cover, and steel or iron surfaces shall be free from moisture or frost. No materials shall be delivered until the shop coat has dried. Paint shall be delivered in the original containers of the approved manufacturer. ELECTROPLATING CHROMIUM (Cr.) plate metal items where called for on drawings. Satin or polished finish as noted. COPPER (Cu.) or an Architect‐approved alternate liaison metal substrate layer shall be plated where required between base metals and finish plate metals. 2.05 DIPPED FINISHES Special dipped finishes where noted on drawings shall be either totally immersed or brush applied acid, alkaline or pigment on items, as required, the reg‐wiped to achieve desired finish. Use appropriate stop ‐ bath solution to halt chemical activity when desired finish/color is achieved, as required. Submit application procedure description and finished samples (3) of each finish to Architect for approval before commencing finishing. 2.06 SAMPLES Submit representative samples of all miscellaneous and ornamental metal work for the approval of the Architect, including the required types of grilles. Submit samples of finishes as requested by the Architect. 2.07 SHOP DRAWINGS Submit shop drawings of all miscellaneous and ornamental metal work for the approval of the Architect. Shop Miscellaneous Metals
05500-3
drawings shall show in detail, materials, dimensions, thickness, methods of assembly and attachment, relation to adjoining work, and all other pertinent data and information. PART 3 ‐ EXECUTION 3.01 FABRICATION‐INSTALLATION A. All miscellaneous and ornamental metal work shall be fabricated and installed in thorough and workmanlike manner by skilled workmen to the complete satisfaction of the Architect. All visible joints shall be fully welded or brazed, whichever is appropriate, ground smooth and polished. No nicks or burrs shall be permitted. B. The Contractor shall examine the contract drawings and specifications in order to insure the completeness of the work required under this Section. Supplementary parts , necessary to complete all miscellaneous and ornamental metal, though not definitely shown on drawings or specified herein, shall be included. C. The contractor shall verify all measurements and dimensions at the job site and shall cooperate in the coordination and scheduling of work of this Section with the work of related trades (with particular attention to the installation of items embedded in masonry and concrete) so as not to delay job progress. D. All exposed joints shall be close‐fitting, and all bolts and screws, where exposed, shall be cut off flush with nuts or other adjacent metal. All cutting, drilling, punching and tapping required for the installation and attachment of other work to miscellaneous metal work, except where specified in connection with work under other sections, shall be performed as required. E. All metal work built‐in with concrete or masonry shall be formed for anchorage, or be provided with suitable anchors, expansion shields, or other anchoring devices shown on drawings as required. Such metal work shall be furnished in ample time for setting and securing in place. F. Unless otherwise shown, all joints shall be as strong and rigid as adjoining sections. Welding shall be continuous along entire line of contact, except where spot welding is indicated or permitted. Where exposed, welds shall be ground smooth. Where bolted or riveted connections are indicated, such connections may be welded at the Contractor's option. G. Where welding is required or permitted, it shall conform to requirements for shielded metal arc welding or the Standard Code for Arc and Gas Welding or the American Welding Society. Exposed welds shall be flush and ground smooth. H. Threaded connections shall be made up tight so that threads are entirely concealed. Abutting bars shall be shouldered and headed, doweled and pinned. Small bars shall pass through larger bars and be pinned. Rivet, bolts and screw heads shall be flat and countersunk in exposed work and elsewhere as required. Removable members shall carefully machined and fitted and secured, by means of screws and bolts of proper size and approved spacing. I. Bolts, bracket, sleeves and other items embedded in concrete shall be galvanized. J. Except where otherwise specified for a particular item of work or built‐in work, metal work shall be fastened to solid masonry with expansion bolts or with Rawl plugs and to hollow block with toggle bolts. Fastening to wood plugs or bolts shall be drilled to the exact diameter of the plug or bolt, using a rotary drill for concrete and masonry. Screws shall be threaded full length to the head of the screw. Miscellaneous Metals
05500-4
K. L. M. N. 3.02 A. B. 3.03 A. B. Exposed fastenings shall be of the same material, color and finish as the metal to which applied, unless otherwise noted. Shop assemblies shall be in the largest possible sections in order to reduce field connections to a minimum. All exposed interior and exterior ornamental metal surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned after erection and before approval. Do not use alkaline or abrasive agents to clean work. Take every precaution to avoid scratching or marring metal surfaces. Materials and methods employed in the cleaning operation shall be as recommended buy the manufacturer of the installed metal. Installed work which does become damaged shall be repaired and/or replaced as directed by the Architect or the Owner, and at no additional cost to the owner. DELIVERY AND STORAGE All manufactured materials, (except large assembled units), shall be delivered to the site in original, unopened containers, clearly indicating manufacturer's name, brand and other identifying information. Material shall be stored in a dry location and in such manner as to prevent damage or intrusion of foreign matter. All materials which, in the opinion of the Architect, have become damaged or otherwise unfit for use during delivery or storage shall be replaced at the expense of the Contractor. CLEANING AND PROTECTION Upon completion of the work, all unused materials, containers, equipment, etc., shall be removed from the site. Protect all floors, walls, and other adjacent surfaces from stains, marring or other damage and all such damage shall be repaired and all work and adjacent surfaces shall be left in a clean and undamaged condition. All completed work shall be adequately protected from damage by subsequent building operations and effects of weather. Protection shall be made by methods recommended by the manufacturer or installed materials and as approved by the Architect. 3.04 GUARANTEE The Contractor for the work of this section shall and hereby does as part of the contract, guarantee all work included under this section to be free from defective materials, workmanship, for a period of one year from the date of completion and acceptance of the work by the Owner, and agrees that he will repair or replace at his own expense promptly upon request, all defective parts of defective operation and other defects which may appear within that time. END OF SECTION Miscellaneous Metals
05500-5
SECTION 05510 ‐ STEEL PAN‐TYPE STAIRS PART 1 ‐ GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY OF WORK A. The Work of this Section includes, but is not necessarily limited to, the following: Steel pan stairs, stringers and supports B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere 1. Handrails and railings ‐ See Architectural Drawings. 2. Soffits ‐ See Architectural Drawings. 1.02 STANDARDS Except as modified by governing codes and by the Contract Documents, comply with the applicable provisions and recommendations of the following: A. AWS "Structural Welding Code" B. NAAMM "Metal Stairs Manual" 1.03 SUBMITTALS Shop Drawings: Show in detail the construction, gauges, jointing, methods of installation, fastening and supports, location and sizes of welds, anchoring and all other pertinent information. Submit details drawn to scale at not less than 1‐1/2": 1'‐0". Shop drawings shall contain the design, type of steel and load assumption and shall bear the seal of a licensed Professional Engineer registered in the State of New York. PART 2 ‐ PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Structural Steel: ASTM A36 B. Steel Sheets: ASTM A570 or A611, grade as required to meet structural requirements. C. Rectangular Tubing: AISI MT‐1010 and MT‐1015; best quality, hot‐rolled, electric resistant welded seamless carbon steel. D. Bolts and Nuts: ASTM A307, Grade A bolts. Steel Pan-Type Stairs
05510-1
2.02 E. Rivets: ASTM A502 F. Machine Screws: FS FF‐S‐92 G. Expansion Bolts: "Cinch" type, galvanized by approved manufacturer. H. Ferrous Metal Primer: SSPC Paint No. 2 I. Concrete Fill: Normal weight, ready‐mix type concrete with a minimum 28‐day compressive strength of 2500 psi, 40 lbs./ft.3 cement minimum and a water/cement ratio of 0.65 maximum. FABRICATION A. Provide steel pan‐type stairs and platforms of the design shown on Drawings constructed to support a live load of not less than 100 lbs./ft.2 and a concentrated load of 300 lbs. B. Provide stringers, risers, sub‐treads and platforms as shown. Form tread pan and riser in a continuous piece to receive the cement fill. Weld or bolt risers and treads to carrier angles which shall be welded or riveted to the structural steel stringers. Provide welded‐on clips for the support of soffits. C. On surfaces to receive wood or drywall finishes, countersink rivet and bolt head screws or cut off flush with such surfaces. D. Properly fit and securely fasten all parts, making joints close fitting. Cut, drill, punch and tap as required for installation. E. Perform welding in accordance with Structural Welding Code. Make joints as strong and rigid as adjoining sections. Weld continuously along entire line of contact, except where spot welding is indicated. Grind exposed welds flush and smooth. Welded connections may be used in place of bolted or riveted connections. F. Give ferrous metal surfaces a shop coat of ferrous metal primer. Before painting, thoroughly clean steel or iron surfaces of loose scale, filings or other objectionable materials. Remove grease. Apply paint in dry weather or under cover; ensure that steel or iron surfaces are free from moisture or frost. Do not deliver materials until shop coat has dried. PART 3 ‐ EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Work in the field shall comply with the same requirements as specified for shop work under "Part 2 ‐ Products." B. Provide connecting members for properly securing the work to support framing; including bolts, rivets, screws, hangers, inserts, sleeves, anchors, expansion bolts, washers and other items as required. Provide channels and clip angles as required for support of plaster soffit system. Steel Pan-Type Stairs
05510-2
C. Coordinate and schedule this Work with the work of other trades. Furnish anchors, fastenings and other items to be embedded in concrete or masonry or required for securing work to other construction. D. Provide concrete fill as shown. E. Include supplementary parts necessary to complete each item, though such work is not definitely shown or specified. 3.02 TOUCH‐UP AND CLEANING A. Leave work clean, smooth and neatly finished. B. Touch‐up marred and abraded shop paint on exposed surfaces after erection in the field. END OF SECTION Steel Pan-Type Stairs
05510-3
SECTION 06100 ‐ ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 ‐ GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY OF WORK A. The Work of this Section includes, but is not necessarily limited to, the following: Wood nailers and blocking B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere Architectural woodwork ‐ See Section 06400. 1.02 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES Fire‐retardant treat all wood and plywood provided in the work of this Section. 1.03 SUBMITTALS Certification of Fire Retardant Treatment: Submit certification stating name of fire retardant materials used, compliance with local building code requirements and compliance with AWPA Specifications C1 and C20 for lumber and C27 for plywood. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING Keep rough carpentry work dry during delivery, storage and installation and until finish is applied and building is enclosed. Provide for air circulation in stacks of lumber and plywood. 1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS PART 2 ‐ PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. General 1. Lumber Grading: Comply with "Simplified Practice Recommendations PS‐20, American Softwood Lumber Standards" by the U.S. Department of Commerce and with the applicable Lumbermen's Association rules under which each species of lumber is produced. 2. Plywood Grading: Comply with ANSI A199.1. 3. Grade Marking: Factory mark each piece of lumber with the official grade mark of the Rough Carpentry
06100-1
appropriate association or authorized inspection service under whose rules the lumber is graded. 4. Sizes and Patterns: Provide lumber which is dressed S4S and worked to such patterns as shown or specified. Dimensions on Drawings designate the nominal undressed size of the item. 5. Moisture Content: Provide lumber which has been seasoned by air drying or kiln drying to a moisture content not to exceed 19%. 2.02 B. Lumber 1. Nailers and blocking within drywall, plaster and veneer plaster partitions are to be one of the following: a. Douglas Fir, No. 2 Structural b. Spruce, No. 2 Structural 2. Nailers and blocking, unless otherwise indicated are to be one of the following: a. Douglas Fir, No. 3 Structural b. Spruce, No. 3 Structural c. Southern Pine, No. 3 C. Adhesive: Types as recommended by manufacturer for use indicated. D. Anchors and Fasteners 1. Bolts, Nuts, Studs: FS FF‐B‐571 or FS FF‐B‐575. 2. Expansion Shields: FS FF‐S‐325; group, type, class and style best suited for the purpose. 3. Lag Screws and Bolts: FS FF‐B‐561; type and grade best suited for the purpose. 4. Nails: FS FF‐N‐105; type and size best suited for the purpose. Hot dipped galvanized for exterior. 5. Toggle Bolts: FS FF‐B‐588; type and class best suited for the purpose. 6. Wood Screws: FS FF‐S‐111; type and size best suited for the purpose. Hot‐dipped galvanized for exterior. 7. Power‐Driven Fasteners: May be used if permitted by code. FIRE RETARDANT TREATED WOOD A. Materials: "Non‐Com" (Koppers Co., Inc.) for interior use where relative humidity is normally Rough Carpentry
06100-2
below 80%; "NCX" (Koppers Company, Inc.) for use where relative humidity is frequently above 80%. B. Treatment: Pressure treat to meet Building Code requirements and AWPA Specification C1 and C20 for lumber and C27 for plywood as a minimum. Guarantee fire retardant materials not to bleed through painted finish. C. Size wood before treatment so that minimum cutting will be required after treatment. PART 3 ‐ EXECUTION 3.01 CONDITION OF SURFACE Examine substrates, adjoining construction and conditions under which the Work is to be installed and do not proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Whenever rough carpentry is fitted to other work, obtain measurements of such other work. Verify dimensions shown and the shop drawing details. B. Blocking and Nailers: Provide blocking and nailers as shown or required for attachment of other work. Form to shapes as shown and cut as required for true line and level of work to be attached. Coordinate location with other work involved. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loading. Countersink bolts and nuts flush with surfaces, unless otherwise shown. C. Repair of Treated Wood Surfaces Apply heavy brush coat of same fire retardant chemicals to any surfaces which are cut after treatment. D. Priming Paint fire retardant treated wood with one coat of alkyd type paint or a moisture transmission resistant sealer immediately after installation. END OF SECTION Rough Carpentry
06100-3
SECTION 06400 ‐ ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK PART 1 ‐ GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY OF WORK A. This Work of this Section includes, but is not necessarily limited to, the following: 1. Casework, wood base and mouldings including but not limited to wood crown , wood veneer, melamine overlay and plastic laminate clad, including countertops and casework hardware. 2. Wood doors, including: a. Flush doors with wood veneer faces. b. Installation of finish hardware. 3. Refer to the drawings for all door and hardware on wood doors 4. Factory finishing of architectural woodwork as indicated . B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere 1. Glass and glazing ‐ See Section 08800. 2. Interior stone ‐ See Section 09600. 3. Blocking and nailers ‐ See Section 06100. 4. Hollow metal door frames ‐ See Section 08100. 5. Mechanical work ‐ See Division 15. 6. Electrical work ‐ See Division 16. 7. Furnishings ‐ See Division 12. 8. Finish hardware ‐ See Section 08710. 9. Painting ‐ See Section 09900. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The work of this Section shall be provided by a firm having a minimum of five (5) years' experience on projects of similar size and quality to that shown and specified. B. Fire‐Retardant Requirements Architectural Woodwork
06400-1
1. Fire‐retardant treat those items required by applicable codes to be treated and those items shown or specified as "Fire Retardant Treated Wood" or similar designation. 2. Mark each unit of fire‐retardant treated wood and plywood with producer's label and a label showing grade and rating. Mark on surface which will not be exposed after installation. 1.03 1.04 REFERENCES Comply with applicable requirements of the most current edition of "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards", as published by the Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI), except as otherwise modified by the Contract Documents or governing codes. SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturers' specifications and installation instructions for each item of factory‐fabricated woodwork. 1. Fire‐Retardant Materials: Include manufacturer's instructions for handling, storing and installation of fire‐retardant treated materials. Include certification that fire‐retardant treated materials comply with requirements indicated. 2. Quality Certification: Submit manufacturer's (fabricator's) certification, stating that the fabricated work complies with quality grades and other requirements indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings of architectural woodwork, showing location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large scale details, attachment devices and other components. C. Samples: Submit the following control samples for each species and cut or pattern of architectural woodwork: 1. Solid Wood with Factory Finish: Set of three (3) pieces, 4" x 3/4" x 18", for each color and finish; finished on one side and one edge. 2. Veneered Plywood with Factory Finish: Three (3) finished samples, 12" square, for each finish, veneer cut and color. 3. Casework Hardware: One (1) unit of each type and finish. 4. Plastic Laminate and Melamine: 12" square, each type, finish and color. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Protect woodwork during transit, delivery, storage and handling to prevent damage, soiling and deterioration. Architectural Woodwork
06400-2
B. Do not deliver woodwork until painting, wet work, grinding and similar operations which could damage, soil or deteriorate woodwork have been completed in installation areas. If due to unforeseen circumstances, woodwork must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas meeting requirements specified for installation areas. 1.06 A. Installer shall advise Contractor of temperature and humidity requirements for woodwork installation areas. Do not install woodwork until required temperature and relative humidity have been stabilized and will be maintained in installation areas. B. Maintain temperature and humidity in installation area as required to maintain moisture content of installed woodwork within a 1.0 percent tolerance of optimum moisture content from date of installation through remainder of construction period. The fabricator of woodwork shall determine optimum moisture content and required temperature and humidity conditions. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS C. All PART 2 ‐ PRODUCTS 2.01 BASIC MATERIALS AND FABRICATION METHODS A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with following requirements for architectural woodwork not specifically indicated as prefabricated or pre‐finished standard products. B. Wood Moisture Content: Provide kiln‐dried (KD) lumber with an average moisture content range of 6% to 11% for interior work. Maintain temperature and relative humidity during fabrication, storage and finishing operations so that moisture content values for woodwork at time of installation does not exceed 5% to 10%. C. Fire Retardant Treatment 1. Where fire‐retardant treated lumber and veneer core plywood are required, provide materials which comply with applicable AWPA standards for pressure impregnation with fire‐retardant chemicals and with the following requirements: a. Flame spread, fuel contributed and smoke developed ratings of 25 or less, with no increase in flame spread and no evidence of significant progressive combustion upon continuation of test for additional 20 minutes. b. Use cured organic resin solution for fire‐retardant treatment which is relatively insoluble in water; is suitable for interior applications; will not bleed through or otherwise adversely affect type of finishes indicated and permits milling of lumber after treatment and kiln drying by a treatment of woodworking plant certified by UL. c. Kiln‐dry treated woodwork to a maximum moisture content of 10% after treatment unless otherwise indicated. Architectural Woodwork
06400-3
d. 2. Where fire‐retardant particleboard is required, provide panels with fire‐retardant chemicals incorporated at time of manufacture to achieve surface‐burning characteristics of 25 for flame spread, 10 for fuel contributed and 25 for smoke developed when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. Comply with ANSI A108.1 for Grade 1‐M‐1 panels with density of 48 lbs./ft.3 for thicknesses of 3/4" and less, 44 lbs./ft.3 for thicknesses of 13/16" to 1‐1/4"; except as follows: a. Modulus of Rupture and Modulus of Elasticity: 1600 psi and 350,000 psi for 48 lb. density; 1300 psi and 275,000 psi for 44 lb. density. b. Linear expansion of 0.50% for 44 lb. density. c. Screw‐Holding Capacity, Face and Edge: 300 lbs. and 250 lbs. for 48 lb. density; 250 lbs. and 175 lbs. for 44 lb. density. D. Solid Wood: AWI Section 100, Grade 1 and as follows: 1. Opaque Finish: Any hardwood which, when finished, will not show any grain, imperfection or other surface defects when used with the opaque finish specified. 2. Concealed: Any hardwood specie, Grade III per AWI Section 100. E. Panel Products: AWI Section 200, veneer core or particle core plywood, with face veneers as indicated. 1. Transparent Finish: Grade I per AWI Section 200‐S‐8, cut and graining to match Designer's sample. 2. Opaque Finish: Any specie of hardwood veneer of Grade II per AWI Section 200‐S‐8 which, when finished, will not show any grain, imperfection or other surface defects when used with the opaque finish specified. F. G. Plastic Laminate: NEMA Standard LD3, color and finish to match Designer's samples. See Contract Drawings for specifications. Miscellaneous Products 1. Fasteners a. Wood Screws: FS FF‐S‐111, type, size, material and finish as required for the condition of use. b. Nails: FS FF‐N‐105, type, size, material and finish as required for the condition of use. c. Anchors: Type, size, material and finish as required for the condition of use. Inspect each piece of lumber and plywood; do not use twisted, warped, bowed or otherwise damaged or defective wood. Architectural Woodwork
06400-4
2.02 CONTACT ADHESIVES A. Non‐postforming: 1. 1730/1731 Low VOC Contact Adhesive. 2. 730/731 Contact Adhesive, low VOC canister. B. Postforming: 1. H2O Contact Adhesive, water‐based. C. Water‐resistant, non‐staining bond for common High Pressure Laminate (HPL) applications. D. Limitations: Avoid contact with copper. Avoid vinyl surfaces containing plasticizers. 2.03 COLD PRESS PVA ADHESIVES A. 3100 PVA Adhesive 1. For bonding decorative laminate to wood products. B. 3105 PVA Adhesive 1. High solids, for bonding decorative laminate to wood products. C. 3116 PVA Adhesive 1. For bonding decorative laminate to wood products and bonding paper‐backed products. D. Limitations: 1. Avoid tempered hardboard, fire retardant treated materials, moisture resistant treated materials, low pressure melamine, metallic, polyester, and painted surfaces, wheatboard, and strawboard. 2.04 HOT PRESS PVA ADHESIVES A. 3131 PVA Adhesive 1. High solids for bonding decorative laminates to wood products. B. 3132 PVA Adhesive 1. High solids for bonding decorative laminates to wood products. C. Limitations: 1. Avoid tempered hardboard, fire retardant treated materials, moisture resistant treated materials, low pressure melamine, metallic, polyester, and painted surfaces, wheatboard, and strawboard. 2.05 POSTFORMING AND PINCH ROLLING PVA ADHESIVES A. 3000/3001 PVA Adhesive 1. High solids for bonding decorative laminate to wood products and postforming applications. 2.
Adhesives a. For Laminating Plastic Laminate Surfaces: Melamine, phenol‐resin or resorcinol‐resin complying with FS MMM‐A‐181; type, grade and class best suited for the purpose. b. For All Other Uses: Moisture resistant complying with FS MMM‐A‐125, Type II, or MMM‐A‐188, Type I, II or III; type best suited for the purpose. 2.06. Architectural Woodwork Hardware as required for intended function as specified in drawings or minimum standard specification below: a. Mortise Door Bolts: 150 (Ives) Architectural Woodwork
06400-5
2.07 b. Flush Bolts: 359 (Ives) c. Drawer Slides: For typical cabinet drawers full extension glides as manufactured by Accuride or equal. For small drawers use #2132, for medium drawers use #3301 for large drawers or deep drawers use #3607. For waste basket drawers use one of the following and confirm with architect specified load for drawer. Light duty for drawers up to 139 lbs, medium duty for drawers up to 169 lbs, and heavy duty for drawers up to 1300 lbs . d. For cabinet doors which hinge and retract use Accuride 1432 cable system or approved equal e. Cabinet hinges: Stanley concealed #BB8180 f. Brackets: M686 (Garcy) with end clips g. Standards: 649 (Garcy) h. Catches: Magnetic type (Stanley) i. Pivots: 327 (Stanley) j. Coat Hooks: See drawings k.
Pulls: per the specifications on the contract documents FABRICATION ‐ GENERAL A. Provide steel framing and lumber framing for architectural woodwork, complete with all bracing and fastening devices as required for a rigid installation and as required to sustain the imposed loads. B. Do all fabrication from field measurement with provision for scribing as required to meet built‐in conditions. C. Coordinate the Work of this Section with the work of other trades. D. Fabricate units in largest practicable sections. Assemble in the shop for trial fit, disassemble for shipment and reassemble with concealed fasteners. E. Maintain relative humidity and temperature during fabrication, storage and finishing operations matching that of the areas of installation. F. Details indicate the required type and quality of construction. Subject to acceptance by the Designer, modifications to conform to manufacturer's standards will be considered providing they comply with the Contract Documents and maintain the profiles shown. G. Reinforcing shown is minimum. Provide additional reinforcing as required to ensure a rigid Architectural Woodwork
06400-6
assembly. Exposed surfaces shall be free from dents, tool marks, warpage, buckle, glue and open joints or other defects affecting serviceability or appearance. Accurately fit all joints, corners and miters. Conceal all fasteners. Make threaded connections tight so that threads are entirely concealed. 2.08 H. Fabricate architectural woodwork with pre‐cut openings, where possible, to receive hardware, appliances, plumbing fixtures, electrical work and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing‐in diagrams for proper size and shape. Smooth edges of cutoffs and, where located in countertops and similar exposures, seal edges of cutouts with a water‐resistant coating. CASEWORK A. Fabricate casework items to design, detail and dimensions indicated according to AWI Section 400, for grade and finish indicated. B. Opaque finished casework shall be AWI Premium Grade, and as follows: 1. Solid wood and plywood parts shall be as specified. 2. Factory‐finish exposed surfaces in opaque finish as specified by Designer. 3. Factory‐finish semi‐exposed surfaces with primer and one coat of semi‐gloss alkyd enamel in color to match exposed surfaces. Sand between coats C. Plastic laminate and melamine clad casework shall comply with AWI Premium Grade and as follows: 1. All exposed surfaces, counter tops and edges shall be specified high pressure laminate unless indicated to be melamine. 2. Except as otherwise indicated, all semi‐exposed surfaces shall be surfaced with white melamine cabinet liner and painted in fabricator's standard opaque finish, color to match exposed laminate. 3. All subsurfaces to be cabinet grade plywood fire retardant which complies with NYC Building Code. D. Casework doors shall be solid core. E. Provide casework hardware as shown, scheduled or required for proper operation. 2.09 DOORS A. Doors ‐ Wood Veneer: Provide doors to comply with AWI Section 200, Premium Grade, transparent finish and as follows: 1. Face veneers shall be as specified. 2. Core construction shall be per AWI Spec. Architectural Woodwork
06400-7
2.10 2.11 3. Control sample to be submitted for Designer approval. B. Pre‐machining: Pre‐machine doors for hardware at the factory in accordance with AWI Section 1300‐S‐2. C. Pre‐finishing: Factory finish with transparent finish to match Designer's sample. TRIM Panel Trim ‐ Solid (Cherry): Provide trim complying with AWI Section 500A, Premium Grade, and as follows: A. All trim shall be as noted on the Drawing details. B. Solid wood shall be as selected by the Designer. C. Trim shall have a transparent finish. FACTORY FINISHING A. Opaque Finish: Provide finish complying with AWI Finish System No. 7, Premium Grade, opaque catalyzed lacquer, semi‐gloss finish, colors to match control samples in the Designer's office. B. Transparent Finish: Provide finish complying with AWI Finish System No. 2, Premium Grade, transparent catalyzed lacquer, hand‐rubbed, open pore effect, to be submitted for Designer approval before proceeding with finish. PART 3 ‐ EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas prior to installing. B. Deliver inserts and similar anchoring devices to be built into substrates well in advance of time substrates are to be built. C. Prior to installation of architectural woodwork, examine shop fabricated work for completion and complete work as required, including back priming and removal of packing. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install the work plumb, level, true and straight with no distortions. Shim as required using concealed shims. Install to a tolerance of 1/8" in 8'‐0" for plumb and level (including countertops) and with 1/16" maximum offset in flush adjoining surface; 1/8" maximum offsets in revealed adjoining surfaces. B. Scribe and cut work to fit adjoining work and refinish cut surfaces or repair damaged finish at cuts. Architectural Woodwork
06400-8
C. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built‐in or directly attached to substrates. Secure to grounds, stripping and blocking with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for a complete installation. Except where pre‐finished matching fastener heads are required, use fine finishing nails for exposed nailing, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork and matching final finish where transparent finish is indicated. D. Fire‐Retardant Woodwork: Handle, store and install in accordance with manufacturer's directions and as required to meet required classification or rating. Provide special fasteners, moldings, adhesives and other accessories as tested and listed for type of fire‐retardant woodwork indicated. E. Casework: Install without distortion so that doors and drawers will fit openings properly and be accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation. Complete the installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated. Maintain veneer sequence matching (if any) of casework with transparent finish. F. Countertops: Anchor securely to base units and other support systems as indicated, or as required. G. Doors 1. Do not install doors until concrete, tile work and other wet work has been completed and dried in the areas to receive doors. 2. Doors shall not be subjected to abnormal heat, dryness or humidity. Avoid sudden changes such as forced heat (used to dry out the building). 3. Install doors in required openings as shown. Install flush panels with concealed fasteners. Provide pilot holes of proper size for screws into particle board core doors. Use stainless steel sheet metal screws into particleboard. 4. Apply hardware in accordance with hardware manufacturer's instructions and "Section 08710 ‐ Finish Hardware". Adjust door installations to provide uniform clearance at head and jambs and to contact stops uniformly. Remove and replace doors which are found to be warped, bowed, or otherwise damaged and cannot be properly fitted in frames. 3.03 ADJUSTMENT, CLEANING, FINISHING AND PROTECTION A. Repair damaged and defective woodwork wherever possible to eliminate defects functionally and visually; where not possible to repair properly, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. B. Clean hardware, lubricate and make final adjustments for proper operation. C. Clean woodwork on exposed and semi‐exposed surfaces. Touch‐up shop‐applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas. Architectural Woodwork
06400-9
D. Installer of architectural woodwork shall advise Contractor of procedures required to protect architectural woodwork during remainder of construction period to ensure that work will be without damage or deterioration at time of acceptance by Owner. END OF SECTION Architectural Woodwork
06400-10
Copyright 1998 AIA
MASTERSPEC - INTERIOR DESIGN
2/98
SECTION 06420 - PANELWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A.
Submittals: [Product Data] [Shop Drawings] [finish Samples].
B.
Quality Standard: ["Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards" of the Architectural Woodwork
Institute (AWI)] ["Manual of Millwork" of the Woodwork Institute of California (WIC)].
C.
Surface-Burning Characteristics: Flame-spread and smoke-developed ratings of not more than [75 and
450, respectively, per ASTM E 84] [25 and 450, respectively when tested per ASTM E 84 for 30
minutes with no evidence of significant combustion and without flame front progressing more than
10-1/2 feet (3.2 m) beyond centerline of the burner at any time] [25 when tested per ASTM E 84 for
30 minutes with no evidence of significant combustion and without flame front progressing more
than 10-1/2 feet (3.2 m) beyond centerline of the burner at any time].
1.
D.
Mockups: Before fabricating or installing panelwork, construct mockup to demonstrate aesthetic effects
and qualities of materials and execution. Obtain LB Architects' acceptance of mockup before start of
Work. Maintain mockup during installation in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the
completed Work.
1.
2.
E.
Identify fire-retardant-treated material with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency in the form of separable paper label or, where required by authorities having jurisdiction, imprint on surfaces of materials that will be concealed from view after installation.
Size: 9” x 9”
Remove mockups when directed.
Environmental Conditions: Do not deliver or install panelwork until building is enclosed, wet work is
completed, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
FABRICATORS
A.
2.2
As specified in Drawings
MATERIALS
A.
Hardboard: AHA A135.4.
B.
Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2.
C.
Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2.
D.
Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1.
PANELWORK
06420 - 1
Copyright 1998 AIA
MASTERSPEC - INTERIOR DESIGN
2/98
E.
Hardwood Plywood and Face Veneers: HPVA HP-1.
F.
Formaldehyde Emission Level for Medium-Density Fiberboard: NPA 9.
G.
Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2 made with phenol-formaldehyde resins.
H.
High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated, or if not indicated, as required by
woodwork quality standard.
2.3
FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS
A.
Fire-Retardant Chemicals: Formulations that do not bleed through or otherwise adversely affect finishes.
Do not use colorants in solution to distinguish treated material from untreated material.
B.
Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber: Comply with the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
Organic-Resin-Based Formulation: Exterior type per AWPA C20.
Low-Hygroscopic Formulation: Interior Type A per AWPA C20.
Nonpressure-Treatment Formulation: Nontoxic, water-soluble product applied by dip, spray, roller, curtain coating, vacuum chamber, or soaking.
Mill lumber [after] [before] treatment.
For pressure processes, kiln-dry material before and after treatment to levels required for untreated
material.
Fire-Retardant Particleboard: Flame-spread and smoke-developed ratings of not more than 25 per
ASTM E 84 by UL, ITS, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify products with markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.
1.
2.
For panels 3/4 inch (19 mm) thick and less and with 45-lb/cu. ft. (720-kg/cu. m) density,
ANSI A208.1 for Grade M-2 except for the following minimum properties: modulus of rupture,
1600 psi (11 MPa); modulus of elasticity, 300,000 psi (2000 MPa); internal bond, 80 psi (550
kPa); and screw-holding capacity on face and edge, 250 lbf (1100 N) and 225 lbf (1000 N), respectively.
For panels 13/16 to 1-1/4 inches (20 to 32 mm) thick and with 44-lb/cu. ft. (705-kg/cu. m) density,
ANSI A208.1 for Grade M-1 except for the following minimum properties: modulus of rupture,
1300 psi (9 MPa); modulus of elasticity, 250,000 psi (1700 MPa); linear expansion, 0.50 percent;
and screw-holding capacity on face and edge, 250 lbf (1100 N) and 175 lbf (780 N), respectively.
D.
Furring, Blocking, and Shims: [Fire-retardant-treated softwood lumber, kiln dried to less than 15
percent moisture content].
E.
Fasteners and Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for secure anchorage to substrate;
nonferrous metal or hot-dip galvanized at exterior walls and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance
2.4
FABRICATION
A.
Sand fire-retardant-treated wood lightly to remove raised grain on exposed surfaces before fabrication.
B.
Arrange panelwork in shop or other suitable space in proposed sequence for examination by LB Architects Mark units with temporary sequence numbers to indicate position in proposed layout.
1.
PANELWORK
Provide lighting of similar type and level as that of final installation for viewing layout.
06420 - 2
Copyright 1998 AIA
2.
3.
C.
2/98
Rearrange panelwork as directed until layout is accepted.
Obtain LB Architects’ acceptance of layout before start of assembly. Mark units and approved
Shop Drawings with assembly sequence numbers based on accepted layout.
Complete fabrication, including assembly, and finishing before shipment to Project site to maximum extent possible. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary
for fitting at site, provide allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting.
1.
2.
2.5
MASTERSPEC - INTERIOR DESIGN
Trial fit assemblies at the fabrication shop that cannot be shipped completely assembled.
Shop-cut openings, to maximum extent possible, to receive hardware, appliances, plumbing fixtures, electrical work, and similar items. Smooth edges of cutouts.
BOARD PANELING FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH
A.
Grade: Matte Clear Polyurthane
B.
Wood Species and Cut: [Hickory, quarter sawn]
C.
Pattern: [As indicated on Drawings]
2.6
LAMINATE-CLAD FLUSH PANELING
A.
Grade: [Premium] [Custom] [Economy].
B.
Laminate Cladding <Insert drawing designation; e.g., PL-1>: As follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
2.7
Color and Pattern: [As selected] <Insert manufacturers, products, and colors and patterns>.
Type Designations: [GP-50 faces, BK-50 backs, 0.050-inch (1.270-mm) nominal thickness]
[GP-28 faces, BK-20 backs; 0.028-inch, 0.020-inch (0.711-mm, 0.508-mm) nominal thicknesses].
Fire-Rated Type Designations: [FR-62, 0.062-inch (1.575-mm) nominal thickness] [Faces:
FR-50, 0.050-inch (1.270-mm) nominal thickness] [FR-32, 0.032-inch (0.813-mm) nominal
thickness] faces with fire-rated backer sheet of same thickness as faces.
Exposed Edges: GP-28, 0.028-inch (0.711-mm) nominal thickness.
Panel Core Construction: [Veneer-core plywood] [Particleboard] [Fire-retardant particleboard].
SHOP FINISHING OF PANELWORK
A.
Shop Finishing: To the greatest extent possible, finish panelwork at the shop. Defer only final
touchup, cleaning, and polishing until after installation
1.
Backpriming: Apply two coats of sealer or primer compatible with finish coats to concealed surfaces of panelwork. Concealed surfaces of plastic laminate-clad panelwork do not require
backpriming when surfaced with plastic laminate.
B.
Washcoat for Stained Finish: Apply a vinyl washcoat to panelwork made from closed-grain wood before
staining and finishing.
C.
Transparent Finish: As follows:
1.
PANELWORK
Grade: [Premium]
06420 - 3
Copyright 1998 AIA
2.
3.
4.
MASTERSPEC - INTERIOR DESIGN
2/98
AWI Finish System: [TR-6, Catalyzed polyurethane].
Staining: [None required]
Sheen: [Flat 10-25 gloss units] measured on 60-degree gloss meter per ASTM D 523.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Condition panelwork to prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas before installing.
B.
Install panelwork level, plumb, true, and straight with no distortions. Shim as required with concealed
shims. Install to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2400 mm) for plumb and level. Install
with no more than 1/16 inch in 96 inches (1.6 mm in 2400 mm) vertical cup or bow and 1/8 inch in 96
inches (3 mm in 2400 mm) horizontal variation from a true plane.
1.
For flush paneling with revealed joints, install with variations in reveal width, alignment of top
and bottom edges, and flushness between adjacent panels not exceeding 1/32 inch (0.8 mm).
C.
Scribe and cut panelwork to fit adjoining work, and refinish cut surfaces and repair damaged finish at
cuts.
D.
Anchor panelwork to supporting substrate with concealed panel-hanger clips, concealed screws, blind
nailing on backup strips, splined-connection strips, and similar trim and fasteners. Do not face nail, unless otherwise indicated.
E.
Clean panelwork on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up shop-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas. Complete the finishing work, to the extent not completed at the shop or before installing panelwork. Fill nail holes with matching filler where exposed.
END OF SECTION 06420
PANELWORK
06420 - 4
SECTION 07250 ‐ SPRAYED‐ON FIREPROOFING PART 1 ‐ GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY OF WORK A. The Work of this Section includes, but is not necessarily limited to the following: 1. Fireproofing new structural steel 2. Patching existing fireproofing as required B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain sprayed‐on fireproofing materials from a single manufacturer for each different product. B. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide materials and construction which are identical to those tested for the following fire performance characteristics, according to test method indicated, by UL or other testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and complying with requirements of the New York City Building Code. 1. Fire Resistance Ratings: As indicated by reference to design designation in UL "Fire Resistance Directory" for fire‐rated assemblies in which sprayed‐on fireproofing serves as direct‐applied protection, tested per ASTM E119. 2. Surface Burning Characteristics: As indicated for each sprayed‐on fireproofing product required, tested per ASTM E84 and listed in UL "Building Materials Directory." 3. Two‐Hour Rating: Minimum fire resistance rating shall be two (2) hours unless otherwise indicated on the drawings. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data for each sprayed‐on fireproofing product indicated. B. Test Reports: Submit the following test reports: 1. Certified test results form an independent testing laboratory indicating compliance of sprayed‐on fireproofing products with performance requirements indicated, including asbestos content where applicable. Sprayed-On Fireproofing
07250-1
2. Test results of in‐place performance as required under Part 3 of this Section for field quality control. C. Certificates: Submit the following certificates: 1. Where primers are applied to steel, submit statement from primer manufacturers, certifying that primers are compatible with sprayed‐on fireproofing and will not impair its performance under fire exposure for applications indicated as proved by ASTM E119 test. Include test and other data as evidence; distribute data to sprayed‐on fireproofing manufacturer. 2. Acceptance of steel primers by sprayed‐on fireproofing manufacturer, based on data submitted by primer manufacturer. 3. Sprayed‐on fireproofing manufacturers' certification that their products comply with specification requirements and are suitable for the use indicated. 1.04 DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE A. Deliver products to project site in original, unopened packages with manufacturers' labels identifying products legible and intact. Include on label, name of product, manufacturer's name, date of manufacture and shelf life, where applicable. Also include UL labels for fire‐resistance ratings applicable to project. B. Use materials with limited shelf life within period indicated. Remove from project site and discard any materials whose shelf life has expired. C. Store materials inside, under cover, above ground and in a manner to keep them dry until ready to use. Remove from project site and discard any materials that have been exposed to moisture or have otherwise deteriorated. 1.05 1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS Do not install sprayed‐on fireproofing when ambient or substrate temperatures are 40oF (4.4oC) and falling, unless temporary protection and heat can be provided to maintain temperatures of both at or above this temperature level for 24 hours before, during and after application of sprayed fireproofing. Ventilate spray fireproofing by means of natural or, where this is inadequate, forced air circulation during and after application until it thoroughly dries. SEQUENCING Schedule and coordinate application of sprayed‐on fireproofing with other, related work specified in other sections to comply with the following requirements: A. Prevent deterioration of sprayed‐fireproofing for interior applications due to exposure to unfavorable environmental conditions. B. Avoid unnecessary exposure of sprayed‐on fireproofing to abrasion and other damage likely to occur during construction operations subsequent to its application. Sprayed-On Fireproofing
07250-2
C. Ensure that sprayed‐fireproofing is installed prior to installation of enclosing or concealing work, with sufficient time allowed for inspection, testing and correction of defective fireproofing. PART 2 ‐ PRODUCTS 2.01 SPRAYED‐ON FIREPROOFING MATERIALS A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard products complying with requirements indicated below for material composition and physical properties representative of installed products. B. Material composition shall be one of the following: 1. Cementitious Fireproofing: Factory‐mixed dry formulation of inorganic binders and lightweight mineral aggregates mixed with water at project site to form a slurry for pumping and for dispersal by compressed air introduced at spray nozzle. 2. Mineral Fiber Fireproofing: Factory‐mixed dry formulation of inorganic binders, mineral fibers, fillers and additives for sprayed‐on application by conveying dry mixture by low pressure air through hose and mixing it with water at spray nozzle. C. Physical Properties: Minimum values, unless otherwise indicated, measured per standard test methods referenced with each property, as follows: 1. Bond Strength: 80 lbs./in.2 per ASTM E736. 2. Compressive Strength: 3.47 lbs./in.2 per ASTM E761. 3. Corrosion Resistance: No evidence of corrosion per ASTM E937. 4. Deflection: No cracking, spalling, delamination or the like per ASTM E759. 5. Effect of Impact on Bonding: No cracking, spalling delamination or the like per ASTM E760. 6. Air Erosion: Maximum weight loss of 0.025 grams/ft.2 per ASTM E859. 7. Dry Density: Values for average and individual densities as required for fire‐resistance rating indicated per ASTM E605, but not less than the following: a. For cementitious fireproofing: 14 lbs./ft.3 b. For mineral fiber fireproofing: 13 lbs./ft.3 8. Hardness: 0.50" maximum penetration per ASTM C569. 9. Surface Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame spread and smoke developed values of 10 and 0, respectively. D. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: Sprayed-On Fireproofing
07250-3
2.02 1. Cementitious Fireproofing: "Monokote", Grace Construction Products Division, W.R. Grace & Company. 2. Mineral Fiber Fireproofing: "Cafco Blaze‐Shield", United States Mineral Products Company. AUXILIARY FIREPROOFING MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary fireproofing materials which are compatible with sprayed‐on fireproofing products and substrates, approved for use indicated by manufacturer of sprayed‐on fireproofing and which have been approved by UL or other acceptable testing and inspecting agency for use in fire‐resistance rated designs indicated. B. Substrate Primers: Type approved by manufacturer of sprayed‐on fireproofing for substrate and for conditions of exposure indicated. C. Adhesive for Bonding Fireproofing: Type recommended by manufacturer of sprayed‐on fireproofing manufacturer. D. Metal Lath: Expanded metal lath fabricated from material of weight, configuration and finish required to comply with fire‐resistance rated designs indicated and fireproofing manufacturer's recommendations. Include clips, lathing accessories and other anchorage devices required to attach lath to substrates. E. Topcoats: Type as recommended by manufacturer of each fireproofing material required for applications indicated. F. Sealer for Mineral‐Fiber Fireproofing: Clear‐drying water‐dispersable protective coating recommended by mineral fiber fireproofing manufacturer. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "Cafco Bond‐Seal" by United States Mineral Products Company. PART 3 ‐ EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Require Installer to examine substrates to determine if they are in satisfactory condition to receive sprayed‐on fireproofing. A satisfactory substrate is defined as follows: 1. Substrate complies with requirements of the Section in which the substrate and related work is specified and is free of oil, grease, rolling compounds, incompatible primers, loose mill scale, dirt or other foreign substances capable of impairing bond of fireproofing with substrate under conditions of normal use or fire exposure. 2. Objects which will penetrate fireproofing, including clips, hangers, support sleeves and similar items have been securely attached to substrates. 3. Substrates are not obstructed by ducts, piping, equipment and other suspended Sprayed-On Fireproofing
07250-4
construction that could interfere with application of fireproofing. B. For steel or other substrates suspected of being coated with oil, rolling compounds or other substances not readily identifiable but potentially capable of impairing bond, conduct tests recommended by fireproofing manufacturer to determine their presence and effect on adhesion of fireproofing. C. Do not proceed with installation of fireproofing until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 A. Clean substrates of substances which could impair bond of fireproofing, including oil, grease, rolling compounds, incompatible primers and loose mill scale. B. Prime substrates where recommended by fireproofing manufacturer, except where compatible shop primer has been applied and is in satisfactory condition to receive fireproofing. C. For exposed sprayed‐on fireproofing applications repair substrates to remove any surface imperfections that could affect uniformity of texture and thickness in finished surface of fireproofing. D. Remove minor projections and fill voids which would telegraph through. E. Cover other work and existing improvements which might be damaged by fall‐out or over‐spray of fireproofing materials during application. Provide temporary enclosure as required to confine spraying operations, protect the environment and to ensure adequate ambient conditions for temperature and ventilation. PREPARATION 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Comply with fireproofing manufacturer's instructions for mixing materials, for application procedures and for types of equipment used to convey and spray on fireproofing material; as applicable to the particular conditions of installation and as required to achieve fire‐resistance ratings indicated. B. Coat substrates with adhesive prior to application of fireproofing where required to achieve fire‐resistance rating or recommended by fireproofing manufacturer for material and application indicated. C. Install metal lath as required to comply with fire resistance ratings and recommendations of fireproofing manufacturer for conditions of exposure and intended use. Securely attach lath to substrate in position required for fire‐resistance rating indicated and to support as well as to reinforce fireproofing, using anchorage devices of type recommended by fireproofing manufacturer. Attach lathing accessories where indicated or required. D. Install reinforcing fabric where required. E. Extend fireproofing full thickness over entire area of each substrate to be protected. Unless Sprayed-On Fireproofing
07250-5
otherwise recommended by fireproofing manufacturer, install body of fireproof covering in a single course. F. Apply fireproofing in thicknesses less than that required to achieve fire resistance ratings specified. G. Apply fireproofing materials by sprayed‐on method to maximum extent possible. Following spraying operation in each area, complete the coverage by trowel application or other placement method acceptable to manufacturer. H. Apply sealer and top coat to sprayed‐on fireproofing where recommended by the manufacturer. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Owner will employ and pay an independent testing laboratory to perform tests required for local authority approval. B. Make portions of the Work available to the Owner's testing agency as required for testing. C. Repair or replace fireproofing within areas where test results indicate fireproofing does not comply with code requirements. 3.05 CLEANING, REPAIR AND PROTECTION A. Immediately upon completion of spraying operations in each containable area of project, remove over‐spray and fall‐out of materials from surfaces of other work and clean exposed surfaces to remove evidence of soiling. B. Cure exposed cementitious fireproofing materials in compliance with fireproofing manufacturers' recommendations to prevent premature drying. C. Protect fireproofing according to advice of fireproofing manufacturer and Installer from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so that fireproofing will be without damage or deterioration at time of substantial completion. D. Coordinate installation of fireproofing with other work in order to minimize the need for other trades to cut or remove fireproofing. As other trades successively complete installation of their work, maintain protection of structure afforded by fireproofing by patching any areas which have been removed or damaged prior to concealment of fireproofing by other work. E. Repair or replace work which has not been successfully protected. END OF SECTION Sprayed-On Fireproofing
07250-6
SECTION 08100 ‐ STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 ‐ GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY OF WORK A. The Work of this Section includes, but is not necessarily limited to, the following: Steel doors and frames B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere 1. Finish hardware ‐ See Contract Documents 2. Painting ‐ See Section 09900. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications for fabrication and installation, including data substantiating that products comply with specified requirements. B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for the fabrication and installation of steel doors and frames. Include details of each frame type, elevations of door design types, conditions at openings, details of construction, finish, location and installation requirements of finish hardware and reinforcements and details of joints and connections. Provide a schedule of doors and frames using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on the Contract Drawings. 1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver steel doors and frames crated to provide protection during transit and job storage. B. Inspect steel doors and frames upon delivery for damage. Minor damages may be repaired provided the finish items are equal in all respects to new work and acceptable to the Designer; otherwise, remove and replace damaged items as directed. PART 2 ‐ PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Hot‐Rolled Steel Sheets and Strips: Commercial quality carbon steel, pickled and oiled, complying with ASTM A569. B. Cold‐Rolled Steel Sheets: Commercial quality carbon steel, complying with ASTM A366. C. Reinforcement Steel: ASTM A36 D. Filler: Sound deadening and heat‐retarding mineral fiber insulating material. Steel Doors and Frames
08100-1
2.02 E. Fasteners: Galvanized or cadmium‐plated steel. 1. Bolts and Nuts: ASTM A307, Grade A. 2. Expansion Bolts: FS FF‐S‐0325, Group III, expansion shield (self‐drilling tubular expansion shell bolt anchors), Type 1 or 2. 3. F. Shop Primer: One of the following, baked on: FS TT‐P‐57 (Type II) or FS TT‐P‐659. Machine Screws: FS FF‐S‐92, carbon steel, Type III cross‐recessed, Design I or II recess, Style 2C flat head. FABRICATION A. Fabricate doors and frames to the design and dimensions shown in accordance with best shop practices. Unless otherwise shown, fabricate doors and panels to a thickness of 1‐3/4". Take field measurements as needed when coordinating with adjoining work. B. Make doors and frames strong, rigid, neat in appearance and free from defects. Reinforce corners of doors as required to prevent twisting or sagging. C. Form exposed surfaces free from warp, wave and buckle, with all corners square, unless otherwise shown. Form molded members straight and true, with welded joints coped or mitered, well formed and in true alignment. Dress welded joints on exposed surfaces smooth so they are invisible after finishing. D. Provide clearances for doors, not otherwise specified, as follows: 1/8" at jambs and heads, 1/8" at meeting stiles of pairs of doors and 3/8" at bottom where no saddle or carpet is required. Where a saddle is shown, provide 1/4" clearance above the threshold. Where carpet is shown, provide 1/4" clearance above the carpet. E. Bevel lock edge 1/8" in 2" for doors. F. Mortise, reinforce, drill and tap doors at factory to receive mortise‐type hardware in accordance with reviewed hardware schedule and templates. Provide reinforcing, drill and tap for doors to receive surface applied hardware. At push plates and kick‐plates, provide reinforcing only. Use steel secured by spot welding as reinforcement. Reinforce as follows: 1. Hinges: 7 gauge and size, as required by approved hardware manufacturer. 2. Lock Fronts: 14 gauge and size, as required by approved hardware manufacturer. 3. Lock: 12 gauge and size, as required by approved hardware manufacturer. 4. Closer: 12 gauge one‐piece channel and size, as required by approved hardware manufacturer. 5. Other hardware reinforcements, as required for adequate strength and anchorage. Steel Doors and Frames
08100-2
6. G. Frame shall be fully mitered and continuously welded at frame corners and stops, with edges straight and true. Grind welds smooth and flush on exposed surfaces. H. Accurately machine, file and fit exposed connections with hairline joints unless otherwise shown. I. Conceal fasteners wherever possible. Countersink exposed screws using flat, Phillips head screws. J. Provide welds of adequate strength and durability. 2.03 2.04 In lieu of reinforcement specified, hardware manufacturers' recommended reinforcing units may be used. FLUSH DOORS A. Construct doors with 18 gauge face sheets with edges welded and finished flush. Do not expose seams or joints on door faces or edges. Reinforce face sheets with 20 gauge interlocking vertical C or Z‐shaped reinforcing members spaced not over 6" apart and spot welded to face sheets. Place filler between reinforcing members. Provide removable moldings of 18 gauge steel for glazed openings in doors applied with countersunk screws spaced not more than 12" o.c. B. Optional Framing for Core: A continuous truss formed inner core of sheet metal, not lighter than 28 gauge, spot welded to the face sheets every 2‐3/4" horizontally and 3" vertically over the entire surface of both faces. STEEL DOOR FRAMES A. Provide fully welded, combination type frames, to be used as both door buck and trim, formed to profiles shown and, unless otherwise shown, of 16 gauge steel. B. Fabricate anchors of steel no lighter than the gauge used for the frame, 2‐1/2" wide by 10" long, three (3) per jamb up to 7' high and four (4) per jamb over 7' high. C. Where frames are set into drywall steel stud walls, weld 16 gauge anchor clips 2' o.c. to each jamb and head. Anchor clips shall match the size and type of stud used in each wall. D. Provide 16 gauge steel channel temporary spreaders at the bottom of all three‐sided frames to prevent distortion during shipment and storage and to hold frames in proper position until anchorage and adjacent construction have been completed. E. Terminate bottom of frames at the indicated finished floor level. Where floor fill or setting beds occur, support frame by adjustable clip angles anchored to the structural substrate. Angle floor clips shall be 12 gauge, welded to frame and punched for two (2) 3/8" fasteners. F. Mortise, reinforce, drill and tap frames for mortise‐type hardware. For surface mounted hardware, provide internal reinforcement which is to be field drilled and tapped. Locate hardware in frames to match location shown or specified for doors and in accordance with approved hardware schedule and templates. Provide the following: 1. Hinge Reinforcements: 7 gauge and size, as required by approved hardware manufacturer. Steel Doors and Frames
08100-3
2. Strike Reinforcements: 7 gauge and size, as required by approved hardware manufacturer. 3. Closer and Holder Reinforcement: 12 gauge and size, as required by approved hardware manufacturer. 4. Cover Boxes: Fully enclosing steel cover boxes shall be provided over all mortises. Provide removable access plates in the heads of frames to receive concealed door closers. Offset reinforcement so that faces of hinges or keepers are flush with face of the frame rebate. 5. Holes for Silencers: Provide three (3) for single doors and two (2) for pairs of doors. Install plastic plugs in silencer holes to keep holes clear during installation. 2.05 SHOP PAINTING A. Clean, treat and paint surfaces of fabricated door and window work inside and out, whether exposed or concealed in the construction. B. Thoroughly clean metal surfaces of loose scale, shavings, filings, dirt and other deleterious materials by use of wire brushes or other effective means. Remove grease and oil by one of the methods specified in SSPC‐SP‐1‐63 "Solvent Cleaning." Fill seams in edges, as required. C. Apply two (2) coats of metal primer to reinforcement and attachment steel and framing which will be in contact with concrete. D. Chemically treat surfaces with phosphate compound to ensure maximum paint adhesion. Apply a sufficient number of coats of an approved enamel filler, baked on, to obtain uniformly smooth exposed surface. In addition, apply one coat of light‐colored primer, baked on, to both inside and outside surfaces. Touch up surfaces having runs, smears or bare spots. E. Provide minimum mil thicknesses of coating as recommended by the paint manufacturer. PART 3 ‐ EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION Examine substrate and conditions under which steel doors and frame work are to be installed for any conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install steel doors, frames and accessories in accordance with final shop drawings, manufacturer's data and as herein specified. B. Frame Installation: Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces and spreaders leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. C. Door Installation: Fit doors accurately in their respective frames, with the clearances specified Steel Doors and Frames
08100-4
herein. D. Hardware Installation: Apply hardware in accordance with hardware manufacturer's instructions and "Section 08710 ‐ Finish Hardware." Drill and tap for machine screws, as required. Do not use self‐tapping sheet metal screws. Anchor panels in place with concealed fasteners. Adjust doors to provide uniform clearance at head and jambs and to contact stops uniformly. Remove and replace doors which are warped, bowed or otherwise damaged and cannot be properly installed. 3.03 A. Check and adjust finish hardware item frames just prior to final inspection. Leave work in proper operating condition. Replace defective work, including doors and/or frames which are unacceptable. B. Immediately after erection, sand smooth any rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touch‐up of compatible air‐drying primer. ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING END OF SECTION Steel Doors and Frames
08100-5
SECTION 08370 ‐ TEMPERED GLASS DOORS PART 1 ‐ GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY OF WORK A. The Work of this Section includes, but is not necessarily limited to, the following: Tempered glass doors and sidelights B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere 1.
Finish hardware ‐ See Contract Drawings 2. Glass and glazing ‐ See Section 08800. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings 1. Show locations, quantities, fabrication details and installation details, dimensions, fastenings, hardware, finishes, etc., to show conformance with the requirements of the drawings and specifications. These shop drawings must be reviewed by the Designer before any fabrication or installation is begun. 2. Coordinate shop drawings with Section 08710 to ensure proper size and location of cylinder locks and other hardware. B. Performance Guarantees: Furnish a two‐year guarantee, certifying that work is in accordance with the Contract Documents, including authorized alterations and additions and that should any defects in materials and workmanship affecting the function and performance of the doors develop during the guarantee period, such defects will, upon written notice, be repaired or replaced at no expense to the Owner. Guarantee does not apply to breakage of glass. 1.03 DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE A. Store all materials delivered to the site in assigned spaces. Select spaces where stored materials will not be exposed to wetting or damage and will permit easy access to and handling of the materials. Store materials neatly, properly stacked on dunnage and cover or adequately protect against damage at all times. B. Protect materials against staining, etching, scratching and breakage. PART 2 ‐ PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS Acceptability of manufacturers is contingent upon products' compliance with the specifications. Submit Tempered Glass Doors
08370-1
information to Designer for approval. Acceptable manufacturers include: 2.02 PPG Industries Glass Division, Room 3W, One Gateway Center, Pittsburgh, PA 15222. MATERIALS A. Sizes and Styles 1. The required sizes of door units and the profile requirements are shown on the Contract Drawings. 2. Provide sidelights where indicated. 3. Style shall be PPG Herculite, or approved equal as indicted on the Contract Drawings 4. Glass shall be clear tempered with thickness as recommended by the manufacturer. 5. Top and bottom rails are to be in a finish as specified on the Contract Drawings. B. Hardware: Refer to Contract Drawings to be furnished by finish hardware supplier. PART 3 ‐ EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install doors and hardware in strict accordance with door manufacturer's recommendations. Make units plumb and true in opening. B. Items delivered to project site with warps, bends or other defects will be rejected. C. Before turning project over, inspect Work done under this Section and make all necessary adjustments, repairs or replacements of defective work. END OF SECTION Tempered Glass Doors
08370-2
SECTION 08710 ‐ FINISH HARDWARE PART 1 ‐ GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY OF WORK A. The Work of this Section, includes but is not necessarily limited to the following: Finish hardware B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere 1. Steel doors and frames ‐ See Section 08100. 2. Tempered glass doors ‐ See Section 08370. 3. Wood doors and frames – See Section 06400 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE Finish hardware, where required shall conform to the applicable requirements of the American Insurance Association, Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc., local codes and all other regulations and agencies having jurisdiction. Such items of hardware shall bear labels or marks indicating conformance to the above requirements. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Comply with applicable provisions of the following reference standards except as otherwise shown or specified. 1. Building Hardware Manufacturer's Association (BHMA) 2. Underwriter's Laboratories (UL) 3. United States Standards (US) 4. Steel Door Institute (SDI) 5. Hollow Metal Manufacturer's Association, Division of the National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers 6. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 7. Door and Hardware Institute (DHI) 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product literature, specifications for fabrication and installation, including data substantiating that products comply with requirements. Finish Hardware
08710-1
B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings including hardware schedules listing each door, each item of hardware, set numbers, manufacturers' names and numbers, materials, finishes, dimensions and descriptions of functions. Hardware schedules shall note items furnished in other sections. C. Samples: The samples listed below are required to be submitted at the same time as the submission of shop drawings. Quantity Description Hinges (each type) Closers Locksets (electric) Locksets (non‐electric) Stops (each type) D. Accepted samples will be delivered to the project site for installation after substantial completion. 1.04 1 1 1 1 1 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Control handling and installation of hardware items which are not immediately replaceable, so that completion of the work will not be delayed by hardware losses, both before and after installation. B. After installation, protect exposed surface with material which is easily removed without marring finish. PART 2 ‐ PRODUCTS 2.01 SCHEDULED HARDWARE A. Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size and other distinctive qualities of each type of builder's hardware are indicated. Products are identified by using appropriate hardware designation numbers. B. One manufacturer is listed for each hardware type required. Provide either the product designated or an approved comparable product of one of the other listed manufacturers. 2.02 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION, GENERAL The drawings show the direction of movement of each door leaf. Furnish each item of hardware for proper installation and operation of the door movement as shown. 2.03 HINGES A. Refer to Hardware Schedule for these items. B. Hinges shall be sized as recommended by the manufacturer. Finish Hardware
08710-2
2.04 2.05 2.06 C. Provide a minimum of 1‐1/2 pair of hinges per door leaf up to 7'‐6" high and 2 pairs per door leaf for doors 8'‐0" high. Provide one additional hinge per additional 2'‐6" or fraction thereof above 7'‐6". CLOSERS A. Refer to Hardware Schedule for these items. B. Closers shall be sized in accordance with the accepted manufacturer's standards to suit height, width, weight or door and draft conditions. LOCKING A. Refer to Hardware Schedule for these items. B. Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard wrought box strike for each latch or lock bolt, with curved lip extended to protect frame, finished to match hardware set. KEYS AND KEYING A. Keys: Keys shall be nickel silver. B. Keying: Keying requirements shall be determined by the Owner. 1. Provide instruction of the Owner's personnel in the operation of the key control system. 2. Contractor to verify base building keying and comply with Building Manager's keying requirements prior to ordering hardware. 2.07 STOPS A. Refer to Hardware Schedule for these items. B. Provide fasteners suitable for the substrate to which the specified stops are to be applied. PART 3 ‐ EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Hardware shall be suitable and adapted for its required use and shall fit its designated location. Should any hardware as specified or required, fail to meet the intended requirements or require modification to suit or fit the designated location, determine the correction or modification necessary and notify the Designer in ample time to avoid delay in the manufacture and delivery of hardware. B. Make periodic checks during construction in order to ascertain that the finish hardware items have been installed correctly. After completion of construction, adjust finish hardware to function properly and adjust as required for smooth, free operation. C. Furnish suitable templates, together with the reviewed finish hardware schedule, to the Finish Hardware
08710-3
respective trades as required, to ensure the accurate setting and fitting of finish hardware. 3.02 HARDWARE INSTALLATION A. Locate hardware units at heights indicated in "Recommended Locations for Builders Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames" by the Door and Hardware Institute, except as specifically indicated or required to comply with governing regulations and except as may be otherwise directed by Designer. B. Install each hardware item in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Wherever cutting and fitting is required to install hardware onto or into surfaces which are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage and reinstallation or application of surface protectors with finishing work specified in the Division 9 sections. Do not install surface‐mounted items until finishes have been completed on the substrate. C. Set units level, plumb and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce the attachment substrate as necessary for proper installation and operation. Doors shall have a uniform gap on all sides. D. Drill and countersink units which are not factory‐prepared for anchorage fasteners. Use templates and shop drawings furnished. Space fasteners and anchors in accordance with industry standards. 3.03 HARDWARE SETS See architectural drawings. END OF SECTION Finish Hardware
08710-4
(THE FOLLOWING CHECK LIST MUST BE PERFORMED WITH THE SPECIFICATIONS):  Mortise or rim lock must be coordinated with hollow metal  Series must be specified depending on manufacturer. Be sure you use a commercial grade heavy duty set.  Specify the function i.e. lock, passage according to the manufacturers specs.  Specify the finish i.e. US26 polished chrome US26D dull chrome look in design manual for a list of finishes.  Specify 3 hinges per door for doors 7’‐6” or less and 4 hinges for doors 8’‐0” or greater.  Delete the sets which do not pertain to your project and renumber starting with 1. Do not use 1A or 1B etc.  All glass doors to have electromagnetic locks. Concealed closers are available which require a special frame and routing of the door. Aesthetically they look better however, they are more expensive and are usually a long lead item. You will also need to chop the floor (this should be noted in the demo plans).  Electromagnetic locks are usually used on glass doors and act as an electric strike. Drop bolts in the heads of glass doors can be used as concealed locks in lieu of electromagnetic locks, however they are not legal if the door is used as a means of egress. Finish Hardware
08710-5
SECTION 08800 ‐ GLASS AND GLAZING PART 1 ‐ GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY OF WORK A. The Work of this Section, includes but is not necessarily limited to the following: 1.
Mirrors 2.
Tempered glass for office front B. Definitions 1. Glass: Includes prime glass, processed glass and fabricated glass products. 2. Glazing: Includes glass installation and materials used to install glass. C. Related Work Specified Elsewhere Tempered glass inserts ‐ See Section 08370. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS Except as modified by governing codes and by the Contract Documents, comply with the applicable provisions and recommendations of the following: A. FGMA "Glazing Sealing Systems Manual" and "Glazing Manual" B. Prime Glass Standard: FS DD‐G‐451 C. Heat‐Treated Glass Standard: FS DD‐G‐1403 D. Safety Glass Standards: CPSC 16CFR1201 and ANSI Z97.1 1.03 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES Perform all work in accordance with the requirements of the New York City building codes and Federal, state and local laws, rules and regulations. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Samples: Submit samples of each type of glass, glazing sealant and gasket. Provide sealant samples 12" long installed between samples of the materials to be glazed, fully cured. Samples will be reviewed for color and texture only. Glass samples shall be actual units as required for installation or minimum 18" x 18" units at the Contractor's option. B. Manufacturer's Data: Submit the following information from the manufacturer: 1. Statement that each product to be furnished is recommended for the application shown. Glass and Glazing
08800-1
2. C. Certification: Submit certification from fabricator that each piece of tempered glass complies with specified standards for heat strengthening and safety glazing. D. Maintenance Instructions: Furnish maintenance instructions for each type of glass for use during construction and for use by the Owner after acceptance of the Work. 1.05 Complete instructions for handling, storing, mixing, priming, installing, curing and protecting each glazing material. DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver glazing materials to the Project Site in manufacturers' unopened containers, fully identified with trade name, color, size, hardness, type, class and grade. Store each item in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Deliver, store and handle glass in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations; protected from weather, staining and damage. During storage and handling of glass provide cushions at edges to prevent impact damage. Protect glass from scratches and abrasion. PART 2 ‐ PRODUCTS 2.01 GLASS TYPES Provide glass types, fabricated from the glasses specified herein, in the locations shown on the Drawings: A. 1/4" thick mirror B. Clear glass, thickness as indicated, tempered. 2.02 GLASS PRODUCTS A. Prime Glass 1. Clear Glass: Plate or float glass, Type 1, Quality q3. 2. Mirror: Type I, Class I, Quality q2 with silver coating, copper protective coating and non‐metallic paint coating complying with FS DD‐M‐411. B. Processed Glass Tempered Glass: Prime glass as specified above, which has been heat treated by manufacturers standard process to strengthen glass in bending to not less than 4.5 times annealed glass strength. 2.03 GLAZING SEALANTS AND COMPONENTS A. Provide color of exposed sealant/compound indicated or if not otherwise indicated, as selected by Glass and Glazing
08800-2
Designer from manufacturer's standard colors. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for selection of hardness, depending upon the location of each application, conditions at time of installation and performance requirements as indicated. Select materials and variations or modifications carefully for compatibility with surfaces contacted in the installation. 2.04 2.05 B. One‐Part Silicone Rubber Glazing Sealant: Elastomeric silicone sealant complying with FS TT‐S‐001543, Class A, non‐sag. Provide acid type recommended by manufacturer where only nonporous bond surfaces are contacted; provide non‐acid type recommended by manufacturer where one or more porous bond surfaces are contacted. MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS A. Setting Blocks: Silicone blocks, 80 to 90 Shore A durometer hardness. B. Face Shims: Silicone blocks, 40 to 50 Shore A durometer hardness, self‐adhesive on one face only. C. Edge Blocks: Silicone blocks, 60 to 70 Shore A durometer hardness. D. Joint Cleaner, Primer and Sealer: The products recommended by the manufacturer. E. Adhesive: Mirror mastic of type recommended by manufacturer for installation shown. FABRICATION Obtain sizes from shop drawings or by field measurement. Cut glass to fit each opening with edge clearances and bite on glass as recommended by glass manufacturer. Do not nip glass edges. Edges may be wheel cut or sawed and seamed at manufacturer's option. For glass to be cut at site, provide glass larger than required so as to obtain, clean‐cut edges without seaming or nipping. Do not cut, seam, nip or abrade glass after heat‐treating. PART 3 ‐ EXECUTION 3.01 CONDITION OF SURFACE Examine substrates, adjoining construction and conditions under which the Work is to be installed. Do not proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Review the glazing procedures. Evaluate suitability of specified compounds and sealants for anticipated conditions. Review coordination with other work. B. Clean glazing channels, stops and rabbets to receive glazing materials of obstructions and deleterious substances which might impair the work. Remove protective coatings which might interfere with bond of sealants. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for final wiping of surfaces immediately before application of primer and glazing compounds or tapes. C. Prime surfaces to receive glazing compounds as required to comply with manufacturer's recommendations. 3.03 INSTALLATION Glass and Glazing
08800-3
A. Unless otherwise shown or specified, comply with recommendations and requirements of the FGMA "Glazing Sealing Systems Manual" and "Glazing Manual." B. Inspect each piece of glass immediately before installation. Do not install pieces which are improperly sized or have damaged edges, scratches, abrasion or other evidence of damage. Remove labels from glass immediately after installation. C. Where indicated or recommended for use by glass manufacturer, locate setting blocks at sill one‐quarter of the width in from each end of the glass. Use blocks of proper size to support the glass in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. D. Provide face shims for all glass sizes larger than 50 united inches, to separate glass from metal stops, except where continuous glazing tapes are provided. Locate face shims opposite each other and no further than 24" apart and no closer than 12" to a corner. Make bite of spacer on glass a nominal 1/4" or greater. E. Provide edge blocks, located in glazing rebate as recommended by the glass manufacturer, to ensure against displacement of the glass and against metal to glass contact within the rebate and to ensure permanently adequate bite of the glass within the glazing system. F. Set glass in a manner which produces greatest possible degree of uniformity in appearance. G. Do not use two different glazing materials in the same joint system unless the manufacturer of each material has stated in writing that his material is fully compatible with the other material. H. Use suitable protection to limit coverage of glazing materials to the surfaces intended for sealants. I. Tool exposed surfaces of glazing materials to provide a slight wash away from the glass. 3.04 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean excess sealant or compound from glass and framing members immediately after application using solvents or cleaners recommended by manufacturers. B. Protect glass from breakage immediately upon installation. Use streamers or ribbons suitably attached to framing and held free of the glass. Do not apply warning markings directly to the glass. C. Protect glass and glazing materials during the construction period so that they will be without any indication of damage or deterioration at the time of acceptance by the Owner. Cover glass to protect it from activities that might abrade the surfaces. D. During the construction period, replace glass which is broken, cracked, chipped or damaged in any way and from any source, including weather, vandalism or accidents. E. Maintain glass in a reasonably clean condition during construction so that it will not become stained and will not contribute to the deterioration of glazing materials. Conduct a systematic inspection program not less than once a month for glass. Clean to meet above requirements. Glass and Glazing
08800-4
F. Wash glass on both faces not more than four (4) days prior to acceptance by the Owner. Comply with instructions and recommendations of the glass manufacturer and glazing materials manufacturer for cleaning in each case. END OF SECTION Glass and Glazing
08800-5
SECTION 09250 ‐ GYPSUM DRYWALL PART 1 ‐ GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY OF WORK A. The Work of this Section includes, but is not necessarily limited to, the following: 1. Gypsum drywall partitions 2. Gypsum drywall ceilings B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere 1. Painting ‐ See Section 09900. 2. Wallcovering ‐ See Section 09950. 3. Tile ‐ See Section 09300. 4. Acoustical Ceilings ‐ See Section 09510. 5. Toilet Accessories ‐ See Section 10800. 6. Miscellaneous Specialties ‐ See Section 11900. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire‐Resistance Rating: Where gypsum drywall systems with fire‐resistance ratings are shown, provide materials and installations which are identical with those of applicable assemblies tested per ASTM E119 by fire testing laboratories acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Provide fire‐resistance rated assemblies identical to those accepted by BS&A or MEA, for use in New York City. B. Gypsum Board Terminology Standard: GA‐505 by the Gypsum Association. C. Single‐Source Responsibility: Obtain gypsum board products from a single manufacturer or from suppliers recommended by the prime manufacturer of gypsum boards. 1.03 SUBMITTALS Submit manufacturer's product specifications and installation instructions for each gypsum drywall component, including other data as may be required to show compliance with these specifications. 1.04 MOCK‐UP Construct an in‐place mock‐up of two (2) gypsum drywall panels with reveals as shown on Drawings and at locations directed by the Designer. Gypsum Drywall
09250-1
1.05 A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers or bundles bearing brand name and identification of manufacturer or supplier. B. Store materials in such a manner as to keep them protected from damage from construction traffic and other causes. Neatly stack gypsum boards flat to prevent sagging. Replace materials which have been damaged or are otherwise unfit for us. C. Handle gypsum boards to prevent damage to edges, ends or surfaces. Protect metal corner beads and trim from being bent or damaged. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS Comply with requirements of referenced gypsum board application standards and recommendations of gypsum board manufacturer, for environmental conditions before, during and after application of gypsum board. PART 2 ‐ PRODUCTS 2.01 CEILING SUPPORT MATERIALS AND SYSTEMS A. General: Size ceiling support components to comply with ASTM C754 and with Reference Standard 5‐16 of the NYC Building Code. B. Main Runners: Steel channels with rust inhibitive paint finish, hot or cold‐rolled. Provide deeper channels where spans are too long for 1‐1/2" members. C. Hanger Rods and Flats: Mild steel with zinc or equally rust inhibitive coating for rods and zinc or rust‐inhibitive paint finish for flats. D. Hanger Anchorage Devices: Shot‐in anchors, screws, clips, bolts or other devices applicable to the structural anchorage for ceiling hangers and whose suitability for intended use has been oven through standard construction practices or by certified test data and which are acceptable to the NYC Department of Buildings. Size devices for three (3) times calculated load supported except size direct pull‐out concrete inserts for "cz" calculated loads. E. Furring Members: ASTM Xx; 0.0179" minimum thickness of base metal, hat‐shaped. F. Furring Anchorages: 16 gauge galvanized wire ties, manufacturer's standard wire‐type clips, bolts, nails or screws as recommended by furring manufacturer and complying with C754. 2.02 WALL/PARTITION SUPPORT MATERIALS A. Studs: ASTM C645; 0.0179" minimum thickness of base metal unless otherwise shown. Studs: 1‐5/8 in., 2‐1/2 in., 3‐5/8 in., 4 in. and 6 in. C shaped studs, weighing 312 lbs., 370 lbs., 448 lbs., 472 lbs. and 607 lbs. per 1000 lin. ft with min base steel of 0.0179 in., galvanized and complying with ASTM C 645. For heights over 12’6” slab to slab use 3 5/8” stud. Gypsum Drywall
09250-2
2.03 2.04 1. 2. B. C. Depth of Section: As shown on drawings for each type of partition/wall assembly. Runners: Match studs; type recommended by stud manufacturer for floor and ceiling support of studs and for vertical abutment of drywall work at other work. Furring Members: ASTM C645; 0.0179" minimum thickness of base metal, hat‐shaped. Fasteners for Furring Members: Type and size recommended by furring manufacturer for the substrate and application shown. GYPSUM BOARD A. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C36, of types and edge configuration shown below; in maximum lengths available to minimize end‐to‐end butt joints, 5/8" thick unless otherwise shown. 1. Type: Regular, unless otherwise shown 2. Type: Type X for fire‐resistant rated assemblies 3. Type: Mold resistant gypsum board 4. Edges: Tapered B. Gypsum Backing Board for Multi‐Layer Applications: ASTM C442 or, where backing board is not available from manufacturer, gypsum wallboard, ASTM C36, of type and edge configuration indicated below; in maximum lengths available to minimize end‐to‐end joints; 5/8" thick unless otherwise shown. 1. Type: Regular, unless otherwise shown 2. Type: Type X for fire‐resistant rated assemblies 3. Type: Mold resistant gypsum board 4. Edges: Manufacturer's standard C. Water‐Resistant Backing Board: ASTM C630, with tapered edges and of type shown below; in maximum lengths available to minimize end‐to‐end butt joints; 5/8" thick unless otherwise shown. 1. Type: Regular, unless otherwise shown 2. Type: Type X for fire‐resistant rated assemblies TRIM ACCESSORIES Provide manufacturer's standard trim accessories of types shown for drywall work, formed of galvanized steel unless otherwise shown, with either knurled and perforated or expanded flanges for nailing or stapling and beaded for concealment of flanges in joint compound. Provide corner beads, L‐type edge trim‐beads, U‐type edge trim‐beads, special L‐kerf‐type edge trim‐beads and one‐piece control joint Gypsum Drywall
09250-3
beads. ACCESSORIES A. Corner Bead: Formed galvanized steel angle, min. base steel 0.014 in. thick, and complying with ASTM C 1047. B. C. Control Joint: Extruded vinyl formed with V shaped slot covered with removable flexible vinyl strip and complying with ASTM C 1047. D. Control Joint: Bent zinc sheet formed with V shaped slot, covered with plastic tape, with perforated flanges and Complying with ASTM C 1047. ## E. # ## Casing Bead: Formed galvanized steel trim, min. base steel 0.014 in. thick, and complying with ASTM C 1047, Type as follows: 1. LC‐Bead 2. L‐Bead. 3. U‐Bead. RUNNER BELOW IS FOR GYPSUM BOARD PARTITIONS AND SHAFTWALL. Floor and Ceiling Runners: L shaped runner, weighing 545 lbs. per 1000 lin. ft. with min. base steel of 0.0329 in., galvanized. F. Floor and Ceiling Runners: Perforated L shaped runner, weighing 281 lbs. per 1000 lin. ft. with min. base steel of 0.0179 in., galvanized. RUNNER BELOW IS FOR 2 IN. SOLID LATH AND PLASTER PARTITIONS. RUNNER BELOW IS FOR 2 IN. SOLID GYPSUM BOARD PARTITIONS USING 1 IN. SHAFTLINER. G. Floor and Ceiling Runners: L shaped runner, weighing 281 lbs. per 1000 lin. ft. with min. base steel of 0.0179 in., galvanized. H. Screws: ASTM C 954 or ASTM C 1002 or both with heads, threads, points, and finish as recommended by the manufacturer. I. Nails: ASTM C 514 with heads, lengths, configurations, and finish as recommended by the manufacturer. J. Acoustical Sealant: Nondrying, nonhardening, nonskinning, nonstaining, nonbleeding, gunnable type as recommended by the manufacturer. 2.05 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS A. Tape: 2‐1/16 in. wide paper reinforcing tape (ProForm Brand Joint Tape). B. Tape: 2 in. wide paper reinforcing tape with metal strips laminated along the center crease to form inside and outside corners (ProForm Brand Multi‐Flex Tape Bead). Gypsum Drywall
09250-4
C. Tape: 2 in. wide self adhering fiberglass tape (ProForm Brand Fiberglass Mesh Tape). D. Compound: Drying type pre‐mixed vinyl base compound (ProForm Brand All Purpose Joint Compound, regular grade and machine grade, ProForm Brand XP Joint Compound, ProForm Brand Multi‐Use Joint Compound, ProForm Brand Lite Joint Compound, and ProForm Brand Ultra Joint Compound. E. Compound: Drying type job mixed vinyl base compound (ProForm Brand Triple‐T Compound). F. Compound: Drying type vinyl base topping compound, pre‐mixed (ProForm Brand Topping Compound). G. Compound: Drying type vinyl based taping compound, pre‐mixed (ProForm Brand Taping Joint Compound). H. Compound: Setting type job mixed chemical‐hardening compound (ProForm Brand Sta‐Smooth Joint Compound, ProForm Brand Sta‐Smooth Lite Joint Compound, and ProForm Brand Sta‐Smooth HS Joint Compound). 2.06 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials for gypsum drywall work of the type and grade recommended by the manufacturer of the gypsum board. B. Gypsum Board Screws: Comply with ASTM C646. C. Concealed Acoustical Sealant: ASTM C834, non‐hardening, non‐skinning, nonstaining, non‐bleeding, gunnable sealant for concealed applications per ASTM C919. D. Exposed Acoustical Sealant: Non‐oxidizing, skinnable, paintable, gunnable sealant for exposed applications per ASTM C919. E. Sound Attenuation Blankets: Semi‐rigid mineral fiber blanket without membrane, Class 25 flame‐spread, thicknesses as shown. Use two (2) pound density insulation at supplementary air conditioning rooms. F. Water‐Resistant Adhesive: Type I organic adhesive for ceramic tile complying with ANSI A136.1. PART 3 ‐ EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION FOR METAL SUPPORT SYSTEMS Coordinate work with structural ceiling work to ensure that inserts and other structural anchorage provisions have been installed to receive ceiling hangers. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF SUPPORT SYSTEMS, GENERAL A. Metal Support Installation Standard: Comply with ASTM C754. Gypsum Drywall
09250-5
B. Do not bridge building expansion joints with support system, frame both sides of joints with furring and other support as shown. 3.03 A. Secure hangers to structural support by connecting directly to structure where possible, otherwise connect to inserts, clips or other anchorage devices or fasteners as shown. B. Space main runners 4'‐0" o.c. and space hangers 4'‐0" o.c. along runners, except as otherwise shown. C. Level main runners to a tolerance of 1/4" in 12'‐0", measured both lengthwise on each runner and transversely between parallel runners. D. Wire‐tie or clip furring members to main runners and to other structural supports as shown. E. Space furring member 16" o.c., except as otherwise shown. F. Install auxiliary framing at termination of drywall work and at openings for light fixtures and similar work, as required for support of both the drywall construction and other work shown for support thereof. 3.04 CEILING SUPPORT SUSPENSION SYSTEMS WALL/PARTITION SUPPORT SYSTEMS A. Install supplementary framing, blocking and bracing at terminations in the work and for support of fixtures, equipment, services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings and similar work to comply with details, or if not otherwise shown, to comply with applicable published recommendations of gypsum board manufacturer, or if not available, of the "Gypsum Construction Handbook" published by United States Gypsum Company. B. Isolate stud system from transfer of structural loading to system, both horizontally and vertically. Provide slip or cushioned type‐joints to attain lateral support and avoid axial loading. C. Install runner tracks at floors, ceilings and structural walls and columns where gypsum drywall stud system abuts other work, except as otherwise shown. D. Extend partition stud system through acoustical ceilings and elsewhere as shown to the structural support and substrate above the ceiling. E. Terminate partition stud system at ceilings, except where shown to be extended to structural support or substrate above. F. Space studs 16" o.c., unless otherwise shown. G. Frame door openings to comply with details shown, or if not otherwise shown, to comply with applicable published recommendations of gypsum board manufacturer, or if not available, of the "Gypsum Construction Handbook" published by United States Gypsum Company. Attach vertical studs at jambs with screws either directly to frames or to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install Gypsum Drywall
09250-6
runner track section (for jack studs) at head and secure to jamb studs. 3.05 H. Frame openings, other than door openings, to comply with details, or if not shown, in same manner as required for door openings. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads. I. Space wall furring members 16" o.c., unless otherwise shown. GYPSUM BOARD INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS, GENERAL A. Gypsum Board Application and Finishing Standards: ASTM C840 and GA‐216. B. Install sound attenuation blankets as shown, prior to gypsum board unless readily installed after board has been installed. C. Locate exposed end‐butt joints as far from center of walls and ceilings as possible and stagger not less than 1'‐0" in alternate courses of board. D. Install ceiling boards in the direction and manner which will minimize the number of end‐butt joints and which will avoid end joints in the central area of each ceiling. Stagger end joints at least 1'‐0". E. Install wall/partition boards vertically to avoid end‐butt joints wherever possible. At stairwells and similar high walls, install boards horizontally with end joints staggered over studs. F. Install exposed gypsum board with face side out. Do not install imperfect, damaged or damp boards. Butt boards together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16" open space between boards. Do not force into place. G. Locate either edge or end joints over supports, except in horizontal applications or where intermediate supports or gypsum board back‐blocking is provided behind end joints. Position boards so that like edges abut, tapered edges against tapered edges and mill‐cut or field‐cut ends against mill‐cut or field‐cut ends. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints over different studs on opposite sides of partitions. H. Attach gypsum board to supplementary framing and blocking provided for additional support at openings and cutouts. I. Form control joints with space between edges of boards prepared to receive trim accessories. J. Isolate perimeter of non‐load‐bearing drywall partitions at structural abutments where shown. Provide 1/4" to 1/2" space and trim edge with edge trim. Seal joints with acoustical sealant. K. Where sound‐rated drywall work is shown, including double‐layer work, seal the work at perimeters, control joints, openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant including a bead at both faces of partitions. Comply with ASTM C919 and manufacturer's recommendations for location of beads, and close off sound‐flanking paths around or through the work, including sealing of partitions above acoustical ceilings. L. Space fasteners in gypsum boards in accordance with referenced standards and manufacturer's Gypsum Drywall
09250-7
recommendations, except as otherwise shown. 3.06 SINGLE‐LAYER APPLICATION A. On ceilings, apply gypsum board prior to wall/partition board application to the greatest extent possible. B. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum board vertically (parallel), unless otherwise shown and provide sheet lengths which will minimize end joints. C. Single‐Layer Fastening Methods: Attach gypsum boards to supports with screws. 3.07 A. General: Install gypsum‐backing board for base layer and exposed gypsum board for face layer. B. On ceilings apply base layer prior to base layer application on walls/partitions; apply face layers in same sequence. Offset joints between layers at least 10". Apply base layers at right angles to supports, unless otherwise shown. C. On partitions/walls apply base layer and face layers vertically (parallel) with joints of base layer over supports and offset face layer joints at least 10" with base layer joints. D. Double‐Layer Fastening Methods: Attach base layer of gypsum board and face layer to base layer separately to supports with screws. 3.08 3.09 DOUBLE‐LAYER APPLICATION INSTALLATION OF DRYWALL TRIM ACCESSORIES A. General: Where feasible, use the same fasteners to anchor trim accessory flanges as required to fasten gypsum board to the supports. Otherwise, fasten flanges by nailing or stapling in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. B. Install metal corner beads at external corners of drywall work. C. Install metal edge trim whenever edge of gypsum board would otherwise be exposed or semi‐exposed. Install L‐type trim where work is tightly abutted to other work and install special kerf‐type where other work is kerfed to receive long leg of L‐type trim. Install U‐type trim where edge is exposed, revealed, gasketed or sealant‐filled. D. Install metal control joint where shown. FINISHING OF DRYWALL A. General: Apply treatment at gypsum board joints (both directions), flanges of trim accessories, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects and elsewhere as required to prepare work for decoration. Pre‐fill open joints and rounded or beveled edges, if any, using type of compound recommended by manufacturer. 1. Apply joint tape at joints between gypsum boards, except where trim accessories are shown. Gypsum Drywall
09250-8
2. B. Gypsum Board Ceilings: All gypsum board ceilings to receive skim coat of imperial plaster to ensure smooth surface. C. Non‐Tiled Areas: Treat fastener heads and embed tape as shown above using water‐resistant joint compound but finish with two (2) coats of joint compound used for regular gypsum board work. D. Partial Finishing: Omit third coat and sanding on concealed drywall work which is shown for drywall finishing or which requires finishing to achieve fire‐resistance rating, sound rating or to act as air or smoke barrier. E. Refer to sections on painting, coatings and wallcoverings in Division 9 for decorative finishes to be applied to drywall work. 3.10 Apply joint compound in a minimum three (3) coats (not including pre‐fill of openings in base) and sand between last two coats and after last coat. PROTECTION OF WORK Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner suitable to Installer, which ensures gypsum drywall work being without damage or deterioration at time of substantial completion. END OF SECTION Gypsum Drywall
09250-9
SECTION 09300 ‐ TILE PART 1 ‐ GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY OF WORK A. The Work of this Section includes, but is not necessarily limited to, the following: Ceramic floor and wall tile and bases B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere Toilet accessories ‐ See Section 10800. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Tile Manufacturing Standard: As applicable, furnish tile complying with the requirements of ANSI A137.1 for Standard Grade. B. Proprietary Materials: Handle, store, mix and apply proprietary setting and grouting materials in compliance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Provide materials obtained from one source for each type and color of tile, grout and setting materials. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical information and installation instructions for materials required, except bulk materials. B. Samples for Verification Purposes: Submit samples of each type of tile required, not less than 12" square, on plywood or hardboard backing, grouted with specified type and color of grout. C. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing pattern layout for tile floors. D. Certification: As applicable, furnish Master Grade Certificates for each shipment and type of tile, signed by manufacturer and installer. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use. Prevent damage or contamination to materials by water, freezing, foreign matter or other causes. B. Provide heated and dry storage facilities on site. C. Deliver and store all materials on site at least 24 hours before work begins. 1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS Tile
09300-1
A. Maintain environmental conditions and protect work during and after installation to comply with referenced standards and manufacturer's printed recommendations. B. Maintain temperatures at not less than 50oF in tiled areas during installation and for seven (7) days after completion, unless higher temperatures are required by referenced installation standards or manufacturer's instructions. PART 2 ‐ PRODUCTS 2.01 PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. ANSI Standard for Ceramic Tile: Comply with ANSI A137.1 "American National Standard Specifications for Ceramic Tile" for types and grades of ceramic tile indicated. B. ANSI Standard for Tile Installation Materials: Comply with ANSI standard referenced with installation products and materials indicated. C. Colors, Textures and Patterns: Provide products indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, as selected by Designer from manufacturer's standards. Provide tile trim which match color and finish of adjoining flat tile. Include coves, inside corners, outside corners and all other trim shapes required. 2.02 MARBLE THRESHOLDS A. General: Provide stone which is uniform in color and finish, fabricated to size and profiles required to provide transition between the tile surfaces and adjoining finished floor. B. Marble Quality: Provide white, honed marble complying with MIA Group "A" requirements for soundness. 2.03 SETTING MATERIALS A. Water: Clear and without deleterious substances which would impair the work. B. Waterproof Membrane Setting Bed: Polyurethane adhesive waterproof membrane tile set; "Tile Tite" as manufactured by Applied Polymers of America, Inc. or approved equal. C. Organic Adhesives: Organic adhesives complying with ANSI A136.1, Type I. 2.04 GROUTING MATERIALS Latex Portland Cement Grout: Provide multi‐purpose acrylic latex or epoxy grout by Hydroment. Color and type as selected by the Designer. Tile
09300-2
PART 3 ‐ EXECUTION 3.01 CONDITION OF SURFACES A. Examine the substrates, adjoining construction and the conditions under which the Work is to be installed. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Allowable variations in substrate levels for thin‐set work shall be the same as allowable variations in finished work. 3.02 SURFACE PREPARATION A. General 1.
All supporting surfaces shall be structurally sound, solid, stable, level, plumb and true to a tolerance in plane if 1/8” in 8’‐0” (3mm in 2,4m) for walls and ¼” in 10’‐0” (6mm in 3m) for floors. (See TCA HANDBOOK and ANSI Guidelines for details). They shall be clean and free of dust, oil, grease, paint, tar, wax, curing agent, primer, sealer, form release agent or any deleterious substance and debris which may prevent or reduce adhesion. 2.
Mechanically sand, shot blast or scarify the substrate to completely remove all paint, loosely bonded topping, loose particles and construction debris. When sanding or scarifying surfaces that may contain silica sand, use an approved dust mask. Surfaces containing asbestos must be handled in accordance with current EPA regulations. Contact your local EPA office. 3.
Neutralize any strong acid or alkali from the substrate prior to the application of the mortar. 4.
All substrates shall be dry. 5.
In all cases, the structural design of the floor shall not allow a deflection greater than 1/360 of the span under live and dead loads. 6.
For indoor applications over substrates such as metal, glass, solidly bonded nonporous coatings, existing ceramic tiles and other similar substrates, prime with ARDEX P‐82 Ultra Prime. B.
Concrete 1. Concrete surfaces shall be dry, completely cured and free of hydrostatic conditions and/or moisture problem. 2. On grade or below grade concrete slabs must be installed over an effective vapor barrier. If no barrier exists, install ARDEX MC MOISTURE CONTROL. 3. New concrete surfaces shall be wood floated or broom finished. C.
Cementitious Backer Units (CBU) 1.
When installed by others, the CBU shall be from a reputable manufacturer and shall conform to the quality standard requirements of ANSI A118.9. It must be installed according to the CBU manufacturer’s instructions and in strict accordance with ANSI A108.11 standard for INTERIOR INSTALLATION OF CEMENTITIOUS BACKER UNITS. D.
Exterior Wall Surfaces Tile
09300-3
1. Apply a coat of waterproof membrane or, when surface waterproofing is not required, a thin smoothing coat of the setting mortar approximately 1/16” (1.6mm) to 1/8” (3mm) thick to cover the entire concrete, masonry or CBU substrate. Allow drying and curing for at least 24 hours prior to installing tiles. (See the respective data sheets for details). E.
F.
Gypsum Wall Surfaces (Interior dry areas only) 1. Prime all plaster and gypsum wall and floor surfaces with ARDEX P 51 primer diluted 1:3 with water and let dry completely (minimum 3 hours) before applying the mortar. Resurfacing Old Surfaces (Interior installation only) 1. Old cement terrazzo, ceramic tile, paver, quarry tile, vinyl composition tile and vinyl floor covering other than cushion vinyl shall be sound, solid, well‐bonded, flawless, stripped clean and free of dust, wax, grease, sealer, soap residue and all other deleterious substances which may reduce or prevent adhesion. (See the most recent TCA HANDBOOK DETAILS TR‐
712 and TR‐713). Prime with ARDEX ULTA PRIME and allow drying thoroughly (min 3 hours, max 24 hours). G.
3.03
Plywood (Specify only for interior residential floors and countertops in dry areas) (See Notes to Specifier 2,6,9, and 10) 1. Plywood substrate and underlayment shall be A.P.A. rated GROUP 1, EXTERIOR GRADE plywood – C.C. plugged or better, conforming to US Product Standard PS 1‐95 or COFI rated “SELECT” or (SEL TF) EXTERIOR GRADE Douglas fir plywood conforming to CSA 0121 standard. Presswood, particle board, chipboard, masonite, Lauan, gypsum floor patching and leveling compounds, asbestos board and ALL dimensionally unstable materials are not acceptable substrates. 2. Plywood surfaces shall be installed smooth face‐up. offset joints of subfloor and underlayment. 3. Use exclusively new plywood. 4. When on joists that are 16” (40cm) OC, plywood subfloors shall consist of 2 layers each 5/8” (16mm) thick. Leave a ¼” (6mm) gap around drainpipes, conduits, posts and columns and along wall and curb bases. Leave a ¼” (6mm) spacing between panels. (See TCA HANDBOOK and ANSI Guidelines for details). The plywood shall be screwed 6” (15 cm) OC around the perimeter and 8” (20 cm) in each direction throughout the field of the panel. 5. Over plank or board floors, install one layer of ¾” (19mm) thick exterior grade plywood, fastening each panel with screws at every 8” (20cm) OC along edges and in all directions throughout the center of the panel. Leave ¼” (6mm) spacing between each plywood panel and between all materials which they abut such as walls, drains and posts. 6. The adjacent edges of the plywood panels shall not be more than 1/32” (0.75mm) above or below each other. 7. All wood subfloors shall be well heated and vented from under. INSTALLATION A.
On interior wall installation, use a notched trowel with deep enough grooves to achieve an 80% minimum mortar contact with the backside of the tiles. (Edges and corners shall be fully backed Tile
09300-4
with mortar when set). B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
3.04
In all wet areas, exterior work and traffic floors, back butter each tile with a sufficient mortar layer, using the flat edge of the trowel immediately prior to laying, to achieve a 100% mortar contact and a void‐free solid support. Simultaneously apply the mortar to the substrate surface with a notched trowel with deep enough grooves to achieve a continuous bed without voids or unsupported areas. Lay tiles while both mortar surfaces are wet. Do not allow mortar to dry or skin over on either surfaces before laying the tiles. For Large Size Tile Installation, 16”x16” (40x40cm) and larger and when medium‐bed mortar is required, use a specially designed medium‐bed trowel with ¾” (19mm) wide x 9/16” (14mm) deep notches to gauge the setting material. Install tiles in accordance with the mortar manufacturer’s strict instructions and following the general office outline procedure set forth in ANSI 108.5 SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE INSTALLATION OF CERAMIC TILES. On walls, start installing at eye level when using Ardex non‐sag thin set mortars. No tile supports, wedges, pegs or ropes are required to prevent sagging. On interior floors and walls, install tiles leaving a regular even spacing between tiles of at least 1/8” (3mm) and a maximum of 5/8” (15mm) (specify joint width desired). NO BUTT JOINTS SHALL BE PERMITTED. On all the exterior portion of the work, install tiles leaving a regular even spacing between tiles of at least 3/16” (5mm) (specify joint width if wider joints are desired). NO BUTT JOINTS SHALL BE PERMITTED. In areas where tiles are specified to be grouted with a chemical resistant epoxy grout, install tiles with a regular even spacing between tiles of at least 3/16” (5mm) to a maximum of 3/8” (10mm). (Specify the desired joint width) NO BUTT JOINTS SHALL BE PERMITTED. EXPANSION AND CONTROL JOINTS A.
B.
Carry existing joints in the concrete subfloors and walls through the covering surfaces. Install control joints where tiles about restraining surfaces, around the perimeter of the work and at the base of columns and curbs. C.
Install and space expansion and control joints in all directions in accordance with the Tile Council of America Detail #EJ‐171 recommendations, as described in the latest edition of the TCA Handbook for CERAMIC TILE INSTALLATION, CAUTION: CONTROL JOINTS: Under no circumstance shall control joints be cut in after the tiles have been installed. Install tiles up to the control joint and stop. If required, cut the tile and resume setting from the opposite side of the joint. Before continuing, rake the joint clean. D.
Install an approved compressible bead and sealant to caulk expansion and control joints. Follow the sealant manufacturer’s installation instructions. Tile
09300-5
3.05
GROUTING A.
B.
Except where tiles are installed with a fast‐setting material, grout wall tiles no sooner 8 hours and floor tiles no sooner than 24 hours after installation. Where tiles are installed with a fast‐setting material, grout wall tiles no sooner than 103 hours, and floor tiles no sooner than 5 hours after installation. C.
On floors and walls where joints are specified to be up to 3/16”, use ARDEX FLEX UNSANDED STAIN‐RESISTANT, WATER REPELLENT, UNSANDED GROUT. D.
On floors and walls where joints are specified to be up to ½”, use ARDEX FLEX SANDED FAST SETTING, WATER REPELLENT, FLEXIBLE GROUT. 3.06
CLEANING A.
B.
Excess grout should be removed from the face of the tile as work proceeds using the rubber float in “snow plow” fashion. Allow the grout to set firmly in the joints, and then dampen the entire area with a minimal amount of water. Allow dampened grout to stand for one minute, then wipe tile face repeatedly with clean sponge face. C.
3.07 3.08 Any dry film remaining on the tile surface can easily be removed by finishing or polishing with a damp terrycloth or similar pad after the grout has hardened in the joints. PROTECTION A. When recommended by tile manufacturer, apply a protective coat of neutral protective cleaner to completed tile walls and floors. Protect installed tile work with Kraft paper or other heavy covering during construction period to prevent damage and wear. B. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from using tiled floors for at least three (3) days after grouting is completed. C. Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral cleaner from tile surfaces. WATERPROOF MEMBRANE SETTING BED INSTALLATION A. Install waterproof membrane setting bed specified herein where indicated on the Drawings in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Flashing and Cove Treatment: Where vertical surfaces, including pipes, drains, walls, etc., integral flashings shall be made by coating both the vertical and horizontal surfaces with 30‐50 mils of waterproofing tile set, not less than 4" up and out from the waterproofing tile set junction. Allow to set and re‐coat with 50‐75 mils of waterproofing tile set as before. Treat metal flashing rings, collars, drains, etc., in the same manner. Tile
09300-6
C. Prepare and prime all surfaces as specified herein and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Use manufacturer's recommended primer as required. D. Application: Apply setting bed promptly placing the tile as the adhesive is spread, using a serrated mason's trowel at a rate to achieve thickness of 60 mils. The cove tile shall be placed first, followed by placing the floor tile. The placing of base tile may require the addition of thickener added to material as needed and stirred by slow speed hand drill until mix is uniform. This mix when spread on the wall can hold the weight of the tile. END OF SECTION Tile
09300-7
SECTION 09510 ‐ ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS PART 1 ‐ GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY OF WORK A. The Work of this Section includes, but is not limited to, the following: 1. Acoustical Panels 2. Acoustic Tiles 3. Exposed Suspension Systems 4. Concealed Suspension Systems 5. Direct Adhesion to Substrates B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The acoustical ceiling work shall be performed by a firm having five (5) years' experience in the installation of materials specified herein on projects comparable to this Project. The firm shall have the approval of the acoustical materials manufacturer. B. Coordination of Work: Coordinate layout and installation of acoustic ceiling units and suspension systems components with other work supported by or penetrating through ceilings, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment and fire suppression system components. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Samples: Submit samples of each acoustical material specified. Each set of samples shall show the full range of texture and color to be expected in the completed work. Sample submittal and Designer's acceptance will be for color and texture only. Compliance with all other requirements is the responsibility of the Contractor. 1. Acoustical Tile: Full size, each type 2. Exposed Tees and Moldings: 1' lengths B. Shop Drawings: Submit details and reflected ceiling plans of acoustical ceilings before proceeding with Work. Show location of tabs and items of work which are to be coordinated with acoustical ceilings or are to be supported by the acoustical ceiling. C. Manufacturer's Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for each acoustical material, suspension system and other products required, including certified laboratory test reports and other data as may be required to show compliance with the Contract Documents. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING Acoustical Ceilings
09510-1
A. Deliver materials to the Project site in manufacturer's unopened containers, clearly indicating manufacturer's name, brand, type, style, size, color, texture and other identifying information. B. Store materials in a dry location, off the ground and in a manner to prevent damage, deterioration and intrusion of foreign matter. Replace materials which have been damaged or are otherwise unfit for use. 1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS Do not install acoustical materials unless temperature and humidity conditions closely approximate the interior conditions which will exist when the building is occupied. Maintain temperature/humidity conditions before, during and after installation. PART 2 ‐ PRODUCTS 2.01 SYSTEM TYPES Provide the following types of acoustical ceiling systems composed of the components indicated. Type 1: Acoustical board installed in an exposed grid suspension system. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Acoustical Tile: See Contract Drawings for specifications. B. Acoustic Board: See Contract Drawings for specifications. C. Primary Suspension Members for Ceilings 1. Hanger Anchorage Devices: Clips, bolts, cast‐in‐place concrete inserts or other devices applicable to the indicated method of structural anchorage for ceiling hangers and whose suitability for use intended has been proved through standard construction practices or by certified test data. Size devices for three (3) times calculated load supported except size direct pull‐out concrete inserts for five (5) times calculated loads. 2. Hangers: Galvanized, 3/16" x 1' steel straps or 1/4" diameter threaded rods. 3. Carrying Channels: Cold rolled steel channels, 1‐1/2", 475 lbs. per 1,000 linear feet. 4. Provide additional framing and suspension members as required to span equipment, ductwork or other items that interfere with the standard suspension system. D. Metal Wall Moldings: Rolled formed steel of types indicated on the Drawings with manufacturer's standard baked‐on enamel coating to match color of acoustical material. E. Exposed Mechanical Suspension System for Acoustical Board: Manufacturer's standard design complete with hangers, main tees, cross tees, splices, angle molding, hold‐down clips and accessories as required. Include components as follows: Acoustical Ceilings
09510-2
1. Primary suspension members 2. Main Tees: 1‐1/2" high by 1" wide formed of 0.025" galvanized cold rolled steel section and bottom flange, faced with a rolled formed galvanized steel cap; capable of supporting lighting fixtures and acoustical ceiling board with maximum deflection not to exceed 1/360 of span between hangers or other supports. 3. Cross Tees: 1‐1/4" high by 1" wide formed of 0.025" galvanized cold rolled steel, double web bulb tee section and bottom flange, faced with a rolled formed galvanized steel cap. Web ends of cross tees shall be die formed for the tablock attachment to adjoining tee through the main tee to provide alignment with a minimum of torsional movement and lateral displacement. 4. Metal wall moldings 5. Accessories: Galvanized steel, specifically designed for use with the main components. 6. Exposed Finish: Chemically clean, electro‐galvanize and bonderize all rolled formed parts. Finish with a baked‐on enamel coating to match color of acoustical boards. F. Concealed Grid Tile System: Concealed mechanical suspension system consisting of electro‐galvanized main runners, cross tees, splices, wall moldings, etc. with all components sized and spaced to support the acoustical ceiling units, lighting fixtures and other items occurring in or on the ceiling with a maximum deflection not to exceed 1/360 of the span. Components as follows: 1. Primary suspension members 2. Metal wall moldings 3. Main Runners and Cross Tees: Manufacturer's standard concealed grid system that meet performance requirements specified. PART 3 ‐ EXECUTION 3.01 CONDITION OF SURFACES Examine the substrates, adjoining construction and the conditions under which the Work is to be installed. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Verify all measurements and dimensions at the Project site and coordinate the Work with the work of other trades, with particular attention given to the work of mechanical and electrical trades. B. Install all materials and systems in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions unless otherwise shown or directed. Acoustical Ceilings
09510-3
C. Make all exposed surfaces of acoustical units level and flush with all joints straight and true. Neatly cut and fit units around light fixtures and around other items protruding through acoustical ceilings. Install all exposed members with flush hairline joints. D. Center tile or board pattern both directions in each major space or room as shown or directed and, where possible, adjust pattern so that edge pieces will be not less than 1/2 unit in width. E. Run grain of units in one direction as shown or directed and align joints in both directions, unless otherwise shown. F. Use procedures that will minimize damage or soiling of the units during installation. Replace units which are damaged or cannot be adequately cleaned as directed. G. Provide tabs at access tiles at designated locations. 3.03 3.04 3.05 3.06 INSTALLATION OF MECHANICAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM, GENERAL A. Install primary suspension members and mechanical suspension system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions to support required loads and to prevent deflection in excess of 1/360 of the span. Water level accurately in both directions. B. Coordinate spacing of hangers, carrying channels, runners and molding with the location of electrical fixtures and other items occurring in or on the ceiling. INSTALLATION OF ACOUSTICAL BOARD, EXPOSED SYSTEM Install board with edges resting on flanges of tees. Cut and fit board neatly against abutting surfaces. Support edges by wall moldings. INSTALLATION OF CONCEALED GRID TILE SYSTEM A. Attach main runners to carrying channels by means of channel clamps. Insert cross tees into main runners. B. Install tile in cross tees in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean and repair surfaces that have been stained, marred or otherwise damaged. B. Protect acoustical ceilings during the construction period so that they will be without any indication of deterioration or damage at the time of acceptance by the Owner. END OF SECTION Acoustical Ceilings
09510-4
SECTION 09600 ‐ INTERIOR STONE PART 1 ‐ GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY OF WORK A. The work of this section includes, but is not necessarily limited to the following: 1.
Stone flooring 2.
Stone wall panels 3. Marble thresholds B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Obtain stone from quarry with consistent color range and texture throughout the work. B. Subcontract fabrication of stone to a firm which has successfully fabricated stone similar to the quality specified for a period of not less than five (5) years and is equipped to provide quantity shown. C. Field Measurements: Take field measurements prior to preparation of shop drawings and fabrication to ensure proper fitting of the work. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit specifications and other technical data for each type of stonework required. Include instructions for handling, storage, installation and protection of each type. B. Shop Drawings: Submit cutting and setting drawings showing sizes, dimensions, sections and profiles of stonework units, arrangement and provisions for jointing, anchoring and fastening supports and other necessary details for lifting devices and reception of other work. Indicate location of each unit of stone on setting drawings with number designation corresponding to number marked on each unit. Indicate control and expansion joints. Furnish and install ¼” thick metal expansion joint as required in a brushed finish. C. Samples: 1. Submit samples, not less than 12" X 12", of each different color, grade and finish of interior stone required. Include in each set the full range of exposed color and texture to be expected in completed work. 2. Submit 6" long samples of each color of grout required, installed between samples of adjacent stone. Interior Stone
09600-1
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Protect stone, mortar materials and accessories during storage and construction against moisture, soiling, staining and physical damage. B. Handle stone to prevent chipping, breakage, soiling or other damage. Do not use pinch or wrecking bars without protecting edges of stone with wood or other rigid materials. Lift with wide‐belt type slings wherever possible; do not use wire rope or ropes containing tar or other substances which might cause staining. If required, use wood rollers and provide cushion at end of wood slide. C. Store stone on wood skids or pallets, covered with non‐ staining, waterproof membrane. Place and stock skids and stones to distribute weight evenly and to prevent breakage or cracking of stones. PART 2 ‐ PRODUCTS 2.01 INTERIOR STONE MATERIALS A. General: Provide granite of kind, color, thickness and finish indicated for each area of use. B. Provide the following with finishes indicated: See Contract Drawings for specifications. 2.02 SETTING MATERIALS A. Color Pigments for Grout: Oxides of iron, manganese or chromium as required for custom colors selected, with chemical composition unaffected by cement, free of water and soluble salts, certified by manufacturer to be alkali and sun‐resistant and suitable for use with Portland cement. B. Liquid Admixture for Grout: Acrylic resin or styrene butadine rubber formulations for factory‐pre‐
diluted or concentrated form; designed by manufacturer for use with either job‐mixed or factory‐prepackaged color pigment. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to the following: Acrylbond TA‐865; H.B.Fuller Company Laticrete 3701; Laticrete International L & M Latex Grout Additive; L & M Surco Mfg. Inc. Hydroment Multipurpose Acrylic Latex Additive, Upco Division; Emhart Corporation C. Water: Clear and free of deleterious materials which would impair the work. D. Cement: Provide white cement as follows: Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type I, except complying with staining requirements of ASTM C91 Interior Stone
09600-2
for not more than 0.03% water soluble alkali. 2.03 E. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207, Type S F. Organic Adhesive For Stone Bases: ANSI A136.1, Type I, free of substances which cause staining of stone, approved for application indicated by stone producer and adhesive manufacturer. INTERIOR STONE ACCESSORIES A. Cleaner: Provide stone cleaners of proper formulation for kinds of stones, finishes and applications indicated, as recommended by stone producer and, if sealer required by sealer manufacturer. Do not use acid‐type cleaning agents or other cleaning compounds containing caustic or harsh fillers, except where expressly approved by stone producer for type of condition involved. B. Sealer for Floors: Colorless, slip and stain‐resistant sealer which will not affect color, gloss or physical properties of stone surface, as recommended by sealer and by stone producer for application indicated. 2.04 A. General: Fabricate interior stone as shown and as detailed on final shop drawings to comply with recommendations of applicable stone association. Provide holes and sinkages cut or drilled for anchors, fasteners or supports and lifting devices as indicated and as necessary to secure stonework in place. Cut and back check as required for proper fit and clearance. Shape beds to fit supports. B. Cut interior stone accurately to shape and dimensions shown on final shop drawings, maintaining fabrication tolerances of applicable stone associations listed. 1. Dress joints straight and at 90o angle with face, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Joint Width: Cut to provide joint widths of 1/16" throughout for joints between stone units with tolerances specified. C. Thickness: Provide stone of thickness indicated. Saw cut or roughly dress back of stone so that variation in thickness from that indicated does not exceed tolerances specified. D. Fabrication Tolerances: 1. Joints: 2. Face Dimensions: 3. Joint Offset: + 1/32" 4. Thickness: E. Contiguous Work: Provide chases, reveals, reglets, openings and similar spaces and features as required for contiguous work, including mechanical and electrical work; coordinate stonework FABRICATION 0" to +1/16" ‐1/16" to 0" ‐1/8" to +1/4" Interior Stone
09600-3
with Drawings and with shop drawings showing contiguous work. PART 3 ‐ EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION Sub floor Preparation: Clean sub floor surfaces to remove dirt, dust, debris and loose particles immediately prior to setting stone flooring. 3.02 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Do not use stone units with chips, cracks, voids, stains or other defects which might be visible in the finished work. B. Clean stone before setting by scrubbing with fiber brushes following by a thorough drenching with clear water. Use only mild cleaning compounds that contain no caustic or harsh fillers or abrasives. If not thoroughly wet at time of setting, drench or sponge stone. C. Set interior stone to comply with Drawings and final shop drawings. D. Variation in Level: For grades showing horizontal joints and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed 1/4" in 20' maximum, nor 1/2" in 40' or more. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF FLOORING Stone Flooring Set in Portland Cement Mortar Bid A. Cover sub floor with cleavage membrane, lapping joints not less than 3". B. Mix setting bed in proportions of one (1) bag of Portland cement to three (3) parts sand (measured in damp loose condition) to quantity of water to produce a stiff mixture with a moist surface when setting bed is ready to receive stone flooring. C. Spread and screen setting bed to uniform thickness indicated to produce sub grade elevations required for accurate setting of stone to finished floor elevations shown. Mix and place only the amount which can be covered with stone prior to initial set. Cut back, bevel edge, remove and discard setting bed material which has reached initial set prior to placing stone. D. Butter backs of stone flooring units with skim coat of neat cement and water just prior to placing it on bed. E. Tamp stone flooring units until firmly bedded to proper finished floor elevation indicated. Set and level each stone unit in single operation, prior to initial set of cement bed; do not return to areas already set and disturb stone for leveling purposes. 3.04 GROUTING A. Mix grout in proportion, by volume of one (1) part portland cement to one (1) part fine sand with latter measured in damp, loose conditions. Add liquid admixtures in the proportion of concentration recommended by admixture manufacturer. Add coloring pigments as required to Interior Stone
09600-4
match selected colors or provide factory‐mixed grout materials. B. Grout joints in stone units, except as joints indicated to be filled with sealant. Finish grout flush with finished surface of stone. Fill all gaps and skips to produce a finished joint which is uniform in color, smooth and without voids, pinholes or low spots. C. Remove grout spillage from face of stone as work progresses. D. Cure grout as recommended by manufacturer of liquid admixture. E. Do not permit traffic on stone flooring during setting of units or for at least 24 hours after final grouting of joints. F. Schedule: 3.05 ADJUSTMENTS, CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Remove and replace interior stone units which are broken, chipped, stained or otherwise damaged and, where directed, which do not match adjoining stonework. Provide new matching units, install as specified and in manner to eliminate evidence of replacement. Re‐point or grout defective and unsatisfactory joints as required to provide a neat uniform appearance. B. Clean interior stonework after setting, pointing, grouting and curing is complete; use procedures recommended by stone producer for types of application indicated. C. Apply sealer to cleaned interior stone flooring in compliance with sealer manufacturer's instruction. D. Protect interior stone flooring during construction period with kraft paper or heavy covering of type that will not stain or discolor stone. E. Before inspection for substantial completion, remove protective covering and clean sealed surfaces using procedures and materials recommended by sealer manufacturer. END OF SECTION Interior Stone
09600-5
SECTION 09 64 29
WOOD STRIP AND PLANK FLOORING
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.
2.
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes:
1. Engineered Plank Reclaimed Wood Flooring
2. Prefinished Wood Flooring
B.
Related Sections:
1.
SECTION 03 30 00 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE for concrete substrates to receive
wood flooring and for vapor retarder and granular base below slabs-on-grade (could also be
specified in SECTION 31 20 00 - EARTH MOVING).
2.
SECTION 06 10 00 - ROUGH CARPENTRY or SECTION 06 10 53 - MISCELLANEOUS
ROUGH CARPENTRY for wood substrates including sleepers, subflooring, and
underlayment.
3.
SECTION 06 15 00 - WOOD DECKING for wood decking to receive wood flooring.
4.
SECTION 06 40 23 - INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK for trim and molding
installed with wood flooring.
5.
Division 07 Sections for waterproofing membranes.
6.
SECTION 07 95 00 - EXPANSION CONTROL for expansion-joint covers installed adjacent
to areas with wood flooring.
7.
SECTION 08 71 00 - DOOR HARDWARE or SECTION 08 71 11 - DOOR HARDWARE
(SCHEDULED BY DESCRIBING Products) for thresholds covering perimeter gaps of
wood flooring at doorways.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit the following items in compliance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s product data including finish data and finish Material
Safety Data Sheet (MSDS).
Samples:
a. Submit manufacturer’s Prefinished sample according to specifications for species,
color, finish, width, thickness - minimum 6 inch (150 mm) in length
b. Fasteners
c. One of each specified accessory, minimum 4 inch (100 mm) in length
Installation adhesive including Material Safety Data Sheet - MSDS
Installation fasteners
Material Certifications: Submit material certifications.
Quality Assurance/Control Submittals:
a. Qualifications: Proof of manufacturer and installer qualifications.
b. Manufacturer’s Installation Guidelines.
Shop Drawings: Indicate;
a.
Location and extent of each type, finish, color, pattern, size, etc., of wood
flooring.
b.
Borders and patterns created by wood flooring. Include wood species and the
orientation of flooring in the space.
c.
Details and locations of wood and metal feature strips if any.
Section 09 64 29
Page 1
B.
4.
5.
Details and locations of trim and moldings that match wood flooring. Include
thresholds, reducer strips, nosings, base, shoe, and stair risers and treads. Indicate
sizes to the extent not specified.
e.
Details to accommodate expansion to the extent not specified.
f.
Details of wood flooring interface with supporting construction. Include locations
of sleepers, vapor retarders, underlayment, and underfloor ventilation.
g.
Details of unusual edge conditions, profiles, plugged screw holes, and similar
features
Submit the following items in compliance with Section 01 78 00 – Closeout Submittals:
1.
2.
3.
d.
Maintenance Instructions
Manufacturer’s Warranty
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer’s Qualifications: Minimum five years experience in the development, manufacturer
and distribution of high-performance solid or engineered plank wood flooring similar to that
specified.
B.
Installer’s Qualifications:
1.
Minimum three years experience installing hardwood flooring.
2.
Minimum three years experience installing hardwood flooring over radiant heating systems.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A.
Delivery: Deliver materials to site in manufacturer’s original, unopened containers and packaging,
with labels clearly identifying product name and manufacturer no later than one week prior to
installation date.
B.
Storage: Store materials in clean, dry area indoors on flat, level surface in accordance with
manufacturer’s instructions. Do not store boxes directly on concrete or near outside wall.
C.
Project/Site Conditions:
1.
Environmental Requirements: HVAC systems must be operational and controlling site
temperature and humidity. Area to receive flooring and adhesive must be maintained at
normal occupancy temperature (60-70ºF and humidity levels (35-55% humidity) for
minimum of one week prior to installation as well as during and continuously following
installation.
2.
Concrete sub floors: must be cured at least 60 days prior to installation and properly tested
for moisture following all of manufacturer’s guidelines.
3.
Wood sub floors: should be below 12% moisture content (MC) and within 4% of material
moisture content for engineered materials.
WARRANTY
A.
Structural Warranty: Minimum 15-year commercial warranty against de-lamination, separation,
buckling or cupping as a result of manufacturer’s defect when installed and maintained in accordance
with manufacturer’s instructions.
Section 09 64 29
Page 2
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURER
A.
reSAWN TIMBER co.
186 Keystone Drive
Telford, PA 18969
Website: www.resawntimberco.com
B.
Substitutions: NONE PERMITTED.
2.2
enCORETM Collection – JAVELIN
Toll free: 1-800-985-5355
Fax: 1-800-985-5355
e-mail: info@resawntimberco.com
A. JAVELIN
1. Wear Layer: Antique Reclaimed American Oak - Mix of Red & White Oak - Skip Planed
2. Construction: Engineered
3. Thickness: 5/8” thick (4mm wear layer)
4. Width: 5”
5. Length: 2’-10’ Random Lengths
6. Millwork: Tongue and Groove, End-Matched
7. Edge: Microbevel
8. Factory Finish: Matte Polyurethane - Major Voids Filled
9. Physical Property Performance Requirements:
a. * Hardness: ASTM D 1037 - Janka Ball: Minimum 1,325 lbs
2.3
ADHESIVE: Manufacturer’s recommended adhesive. Use only adhesives that do not contain urea
formaldehyde.
2.4
FASTENERS: Refer to NWFA Appendix F: Fastener Schedule.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates upon which wood flooring will be installed.
1. Verify that sub-floor is structurally sound, clean, dry, and free of contaminates that would
interfere with bonding of the flooring adhesive (such as concrete curing compounds, waxes
or oils) or protruding fasteners.
2. In wood frame structures, do not begin installation of flooring until the moisture content of
wood sub-floor is at a maximum of 12% and within 4% of material moisture content for
engineered materials and solid materials less than 3 inches wide; and within 2% of material
moisture content for solid materials 3 inches and wider.
3. Moisture Testing: Perform tests so that each test area does not exceed 200 square feet (18.6
sq. m), and perform no fewer than two tests in each installation area and with test areas
evenly spaced in installation areas. Test concrete floors for moisture vapor emission using a
Calcium Chloride test per ASTM F 1869. Do not install flooring if vapor pressure exceeds 3
lbs per 1,000 square feet (15 g/m2) in 24 hours.
4. Test alkalinity of the concrete slab to confirm it is within adhesive manufacturer’s acceptable
range.
5. Document test results and mark all test location(s) on As-Built Drawings.
B.
Verify that HVAC system is operation and maintaining occupancy level temperature and humidity
conditions.
Report unsatisfactory conditions to Architect and/or General Contractor and correct before
proceeding.
Commencement of work by installer is considered an acceptance of substrate conditions.
Prior to installation, the installer shall examine all material and determine that it matches the work
C.
D.
E.
Section 09 64 29
Page 3
order.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
B.
C.
3.3
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
3.4
Install in accordance with manufacturer’s complete installation instructions by nailing or stapling to
substrate and gluing to substrate. Details below are a summary only.
Lay floor in the direction(s)/pattern(s) as shown on Drawings.
Because wood is a natural material, variations in color naturally occur from plank to plank. Each box
should be inspected for differences in color with color variation staggered throughout the floor. For a
blended appearance, select pieces randomly from several boxes.
Allow 1/2 inch (13 mm) space for expansion and movement of flooring at walls and permanent
obstructions.
Use the “wet lay” or “walk-on-work” installation method as specified by the adhesive manufacturer.
Use only adhesive recommended by flooring manufacturer.
Adhere flooring without gaps. Ensure that each plank is completely adhered to substrate.
Immediately remove excess adhesive from prefinished surface of flooring.
Lay flooring over wood sub-floor parallel with length of room.
Blind [staple][nail] flooring to sub-floor with power driver. Space fasteners at 6-10” (152-254 mm)
and 2” (51 mm) from end of boards. Stagger end joints from row to row by a minimum of 10” (254
mm).
CLEANING
A.
B.
3.5
Acclimate flooring according to manufacturer’s instructions. For engineered products only - leave
engineered wood flooring in their sealed crates until time of actual installation.
Grind and fill sub-floor using methods and materials appropriate to the sub-floor construction to
eliminate humps and depressions exceeding 1/8 (3 mm) inch in 6 feet (1830 mm) radius.
Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.
Reference Section 01 74 23 – Final Cleaning
Follow manufacturer’s recommendations for cleaning and maintenance.
PROTECTION
A.
B.
C.
D.
Repair or replace defective or damaged work as directed by the Architect. All chipped, scratched or
otherwise damaged or defection work will be repaired or replaced. All repairs shall be undetectable.
Use manufacturer-supplied touch up stain if required.
Cover and protect completed flooring from further construction traffic with heavy Kraft-paper or
other suitable coverings. Do not use non-breathable sheet or film that could cause condensation to
form. Maintain covering throughout remainder of construction period.
Avoid foot traffic as much as possible until proper cure time has passed.
Do not move heavy furniture on floors for no less than 24 hours or in accordance with the
manufacturer.
END OF SECTION
reSAWN TIMBER co.TM
Engineered Plank Wood Flooring
Section 09 64 29
Page 4
SECTION 09650 ‐ RESILIENT FLOORING PART 1 ‐ GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY OF WORK A. The Work of this Section includes, but is not necessarily limited to, the following: 1.
Resilient tile 2.
Luxury Vinyl Tile 3. Vinyl wall base B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE Provide each type of resilient flooring and accessories as produced by a single manufacturer, including recommended primers, adhesives, sealants and leveling compounds. Wherever possible, provide required resilient flooring and accessories produced by a single manufacturer. All adhesives, sealants primers, compounds to be low VOC. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data and installation instructions for each type of resilient flooring, membrane and accessory. B. Samples: Submit, for verification purposes, samples of each type, color, and pattern of resilient flooring, including accessories, required, indicating full range of color and pattern variation. Provide full‐size tile units and 6" long sections of resilient flooring accessories. C. Maintenance Instructions: Submit manufacturer's recommended maintenance practices for each type of resilient flooring and accessory required. 1.04 DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE 1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. Maintain minimum temperature of 65oF in spaces to receive resilient flooring for at least 48 hours prior to installation, during installation, and for not less than 48 hours after installation. Store resilient flooring materials in spaces where they will be installed for at least 48 hours before beginning installation. Subsequently, maintain minimum temperature of 55oF in areas where work is completed. B. Install resilient flooring and accessories after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. PART 2 ‐ PRODUCTS Resilient Flooring
09650-1
2.01 MATERIALS A. B. Tile: Provide the following where shown and scheduled: See Contract Drawings for specifications. Bases: Provide straight base in areas designated to receive carpet and cove base in areas designated to receive vinyl composition tile. Provide where shown and scheduled on Contract Drawings. NOTE: All base to be purchased in rolls and to be 1/8” thick. Unless Otherwise Noted. C. Reducer Strips: CTA‐XX as manufactured by Johnsonite. Color as selected by the Designer and thickness as required for carpet. D. Adhesives (Cements): Waterproof, stabilized type as recommended by flooring manufacturer to suit materials and substrate conditions. E. Concrete Slab Primer: Non‐staining type as recommended by flooring manufacturer. F. Leveling Compound: Latex‐type as recommended by flooring manufacturer and compatible with the membrane waterproofing. G. Waterproofing Compound: Elastiment 300 as manufactured by Boiardi Products Corporation, or approved equal. PART 3 ‐ EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Broom clean or vacuum surfaces to be covered and inspect subfloor. The start of flooring installation indicates acceptance of subfloor conditions and full responsibility for completed work. B. Use leveling compound as recommended by flooring manufacturer for filling cracks, holes and depressions in subfloors. C. Apply concrete slab primer, if recommended by flooring manufacturer, prior to application of adhesive. Apply in compliance with manufacturer's directions. D. Where indicated, install waterproof membrane in accordance with approved manufacturer's instructions. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. General 1. Install flooring using method indicated in strict compliance with manufacturer's recommendations. Extend flooring into two spaces, door reveals and similar openings. Resilient Flooring
09650-2
2. B. Tile Floors 1. Lay tile in patterns as shown on the drawings, or if not shown, from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so that tile at opposite edges of room area of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid use of cut widths less than one half of a tile at room perimeters. Lay tile square to the room axis, unless otherwise shown. 2. Match tiles for color and pattern by using tile from cartons in same sequence as manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Cut tile neatly around all fixtures. Broken, cracked, chipped or deformed tiles are not acceptable. Lay tile with grain running in one direction, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Adhere the tile flooring to substrates using full spread of adhesive applied in compliance with flooring manufacturer's directions. C. Accessories Apply base to walls and other permanent fixtures in rooms or areas where base is required. Install base in lengths as long as practicable, with continuous runs forming outside corners and mitered or coped inside corners. Tightly bond base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with continuous contact at horizontal and vertical surfaces. Notify General Contractor and Architect of any deviations in wall surfaces that will impact finished installation prior to commencement of work. 3.03 Tightly cement flooring to substrate without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks or other surface imperfections. Hand roll flooring at perimeter of each covered area to ensure adhesion. CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Remove any excess adhesive or other surface blemishes, using neutral type cleaners as recommended by flooring manufacturer. Protect installed flooring with heavy Kraft paper or other covering. B. Finishing: After completion of project and just prior to final inspection of work, thoroughly clean floors and accessories. C. Apply polish and buff with type of polish, number of coats, and buffing procedures in compliance with flooring manufacturer's instructions. END OF SECTION Resilient Flooring
09650-3
SECTION 09680 ‐ CARPET PART 1 ‐ GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY OF WORK A. This Work of this Section includes, but is not necessarily limited to, the following: 1. Carpet 2. Cushion 3. Accessories B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Carpet Surface Burning Characteristics: Provide carpet identical to that tested for the following fire performance characteristics, per test method indicated below, by UL or other testing and inspecting organizations acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify carpet with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting organization. 1. Test Method: DOC FF 1‐70 2. Rating: Pass B. Cushion Surface Burning Characteristics: Provide carpet cushion identical to that tested for the following fire performance characteristics, per test method indicated below, by UL or other testing and inspecting organizations acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify carpet cushion with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting organization. 1. Test Method: DOC FF 1‐70 2. Rating: Pass 3. Test Method: ASTM E 84 4. Flame Spread: 25 or less 5. Smoke Developed: 450 or less 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of carpet material and installation accessory required, submit manufacturer's technical data on physical characteristics, durability, resistance to fading and Carpet
09680-1
flame resistance characteristics. B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing layout and seaming diagrams. Indicate pile or pattern direction and locations and types of edge strips. Indicate columns, doorways, enclosing walls or partitions, built‐in cabinets and locations where cutouts are required in the carpet. Show installation details at special conditions. C. Samples: Submit, for verification purposes in manufacturer's standard size, samples showing full range of color, texture and pattern variations expected. Prepare samples from same material to be used for the Work. Submit the following: 1. 12" square samples of each type of carpet material required. 2. 12" long samples of each type of exposed edge stripping and accessory item. 3. 6" square samples of each type of carpet cushion. 1.04 1.05 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING Deliver materials to project site in original factory wrappings and containers, labeled with identification of the manufacturer, brand name and lot number. Store materials in original undamaged packages and containers, inside well‐ventilated area protected from weather, moisture, soilage, extreme temperatures and humidity. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS Lay flat, blocked, off ground. Maintain minimum temperature of 65oF at least three days prior to and during installation in area where materials are stored. EXTRA MATERIALS Deliver extra materials to Owner. Furnish extra materials matching products installed as described below, packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. Before installation begins, furnish quantity of full width for each type of material equal to 5% of amount installed. PART 2 ‐ PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: A. Carpet Schedule: Carpet
09680-2
2.02 2.03 B. See Contract Drawings for specifications. Carpet Cushion: 1. Chris Craft Industries, Inc. 2. Dixie Manufacturing Company 3. E. R. Carpenter Company, Inc. 4. General Felt Industries, Inc. 5. Ludlow Carpet Cushion 6. Olin Corporation, Omalon Carpet Foundation 7. Sponge Cushion, Inc. 8. Uniroyal, Inc. CARPET CUSHION Treated for mildew resistance and, if applicable, with permanent mothproofing; sterilized; bonded to finished top surface appropriate for type of cushion and complying with the additional requirements and standards below: A. Type: "Authority," Choice #722, 24 oz., 8.0 density B. Traffic Designation: II ‐ Heavy C. Cushion Adhesives: Provide manufacturer's recommended mildew‐resistant adhesive, produced expressly for use with type of carpet cushion and substrate indicated. D. Thickness: 3/8" + 1/32" ACCESSORIES A. Tackless Carpet Stripping: Water‐resistant plywood in strips, 3/8" or 9/32" thick, as required to match cushion thickness; two (2) or three (3) rows, as indicated in Paragraph 3.02 below, of angular pins protruding from top, designed to grip and hold stretched carpet at backing. B. Carpet Edge Guard: Aluminum with fold‐down edge and concealed gripper teeth; minimum 1‐
1/2" wide punched anchorage flange; minimum 5/8" wide fold flange. Anodized aluminum finish, smooth finish, manufacturer's standard colors. C. Carpet Edge Guard: Extruded or molded heavy duty vinyl or rubber of size and profile indicated; minimum 2" wide anchorage flange; manufacturer's standard colors. D. Seaming Cement: Hot‐melt adhesive tape or similar product recommended by carpet manufacturer for taping seams and butting cut edges at backing to form secure seams and to Carpet
09680-3
prevent pile loss at seams. E. Carpet Adhesive: Water resistant and non‐staining as recommended by carpet manufacturer to comply with flammability requirements for installed carpet. F. Cushion Adhesive: Manufacturer's recommended mildew‐resistant adhesive, produced expressly for use with selected carpet cushion on substrate. PART 3 ‐ EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION Patch holes and level to a smooth surface. If previous finish chemically stripped, reseal concrete. Seal powdery or porous surfaces with sealer recommended by carpet manufacturer. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for seam locations and direction of carpet; maintain uniformity of carpet direction and lay of pile. At doorways, center seams under door in closed position; do not place seams perpendicular to door frame, in direction of traffic through doorway. Do not bridge building expansion joints with continuous carpet. B. Extend carpet under removable flanges and furnishings and into alcoves and closets of each space. C. Provide cutouts where required and bind cut edges where not concealed by protective edge guards or overlapping flanges. D. Install carpet edge guard where edge of carpet is exposed; anchor guards to substrate. E. Install tackless carpet stripping by nailing. Locate to ensure concealment of carpet edge between stripping and base of wall. Lay strip at entire perimeter of carpeted space, obstructions and cutouts. Provide narrow stripping with two (2) rows of pins where stretched width of carpet is 20' or less; stripping with three (3) rows of pins where carpet width exceeds 20'. F. Install cushion seams at 90o angle with carpet seams. Place cushion face up as recommended by cushion manufacturer. Apply minimum 2" fabric‐type adhesive tape on cushion seams. In ramped floor areas, increase anchorage or adhesive. Bond carpet cushion to substrate. G. Install with pattern parallel to walls and borders. H. Install carpet by trimming edges, butting cuts with seaming cement and taping and/or sewing seams to provide sufficient strength for stretching and continued stresses during life of carpet. I. Stretch carpet to provide smooth, ripple‐free, taut, trim edges; secure to stripping and conceal behind edge of stripping. Use power stretcher where carpet length is greater than 20'. J. Fit sections of carpet prior to application of adhesive. Trim edges and butt cuts with seaming cement. Carpet
09680-4
3.03 3.04 K. Apply adhesive uniformly to substrate in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Butt edges tightly to form seams without gaps. Roll entire area lightly to eliminate air pockets and to ensure uniform bond. CLEANING A. Remove adhesive from carpet surface with manufacturer's recommended cleaning agent. B. Remove and dispose of debris and unusable scraps. Vacuum with commercial machine with face‐
beater element. Remove soil. Replace carpet where soil cannot be removed. Remove protruding face yarn. C. Vacuum carpet. PROTECTION Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and installer, to ensure carpet is not damaged or deteriorated at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION Carpet
09680-5
SECTION 09900 ‐ PAINTING PART 1 ‐ GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY OF WORK A. The Work of this Section includes, but is not necessarily limited to, the following: 1. Painting and finishing of interior exposed items and surfaces throughout the project, except as otherwise indicated. Surface preparation, priming and coats of paint specified are in addition to shop‐priming and surface treatment specified under other sections of work. 2. "Paint" as used herein means all coating system materials, including primers, emulsions, enamels, stains, sealers and fillers and other applied materials whether used as prime, intermediate or finish coats. 3. Paint all exposed surfaces whether or not colors are designated in "schedules," except where natural finish of material is specifically noted as a surface not to be painted. Where items or surfaces are not specifically mentioned, paint same as adjacent similar materials or areas. If color or finish is not designated, Designer will select these from standard colors available for material systems specified. B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere 1. Shop Priming: Unless otherwise specified, shop priming of ferrous metal items is included under various sections of miscellaneous metal, hollow metal work, elevator work and similar items; also, for fabricated components such as architectural woodwork and shop‐fabricated or factory‐built mechanical and electrical equipment or accessories. 2. Mechanical and Electrical Work: Painting of mechanical and electrical work is specified in Divisions 15 and 16 respectively. C. Items Not To Be Painted 1. Pre‐Finished Items: Unless otherwise indicated, do not include painting when factory‐finishing or installer‐ finishing is specified for such item as (but not necessarily limited to) architectural woodwork, wood flooring work, elevator equipment and finished mechanical and electrical equipment including light fixtures, switchgear and distribution cabinets. 2. Concealed Surfaces: Unless otherwise indicated, painting is not required on surfaces such as walls or ceilings in concealed areas and generally inaccessible areas, pipe spaces and duct shafts. 3. Finished Metal Surfaces: Metal surfaces of anodized aluminum, brass, chromium plate and similarly finished materials will not require finish painting. 4. Operating Parts and Nameplates: Moving parts of operating units, mechanical and Painting
09900-1
electrical parts, such as valve and damper operators and sensing devices, will not require finish painting, unless otherwise indicated. 1.02 1.03 5. Do not paint over any code‐required labels, such as Underwriters' Laboratories and Factory Mutual, or any equipment identification, performance rating, name or nomenclature plates. QUALITY ASSURANCE Installer shall be a firm with not less than ten (10) years' successful experience in applying coatings and finishes of the type required on projects of similar type and quality level as this Project. SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical information including paint label analysis and application instructions for each material proposed for use. Include gloss ratings for each color and finish required. B. Samples: Submit samples for Designer's review of color and texture only. Provide a listing of materials and applications for each coat of each finish sample. Samples shall be step‐down type on which each successive coat of paint is exposed the same amount and tinted slightly different than the preceding and following coats; identify each coat by name and type. 1. On 12" x 12" gypsum wallboard, provide samples of each color, gloss and material, with texture to simulate actual conditions. Resubmit samples as requested by Designer until acceptable sheen, color and texture are achieved. 2. On actual wood surfaces, provide 4" x 8" samples of each wood finish and color required. Label and identify each as to location and application. C. 1.04 1.05 D. Detailed Painting Schedule: Submit a detailed painting schedule for review by the Designer. Prepare this schedule on the basis of the surfaces, types of paint materials and number of coats required. List the brand name of the product of the manufacturer proposed for each use. Submit list of previous projects of Installer for review by Designer to show compliance with requirements of Paragraph 1.02‐A. MOCK‐UP On actual wall surfaces and other interior building components, duplicate painted finishes of prepared samples. On at least 500 ft2 of surface as directed, provide full‐coat finish samples until required sheen, color and texture are obtained; simulate finished lighting conditions for review of in‐place work. DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver paint materials to the job site in original containers and packages, bearing the manufacturer's labels, indicating name, type and brand. Unless otherwise directed by the Painting
09900-2
Designer, deliver paints ready‐mixed. Order in advance in large enough quantities and in ample time to facilitate the Work. 1.06 1.07 B. Store materials and equipment in a designated storage space on the site. Keep storage space neat, clean and accessible at all times. Protect floors from paint spillage. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS Do not paint when the air is dust‐laden nor when weather and temperature conditions are unsuitable. Maintain temperatures within the building at a minimum of 60oF during the painting and drying periods. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations when they are more stringent with respect to application temperatures. All paints primers etc. to be low VOC PROTECTION A. Place paint or solvent‐soaked rags, waste or other materials which might constitute a fire hazard in metal containers and remove from premises at the close of each day's work. Take every precaution to avoid damage by fire. B. Provide suitable coverings to protect surfaces not requiring painting. C. Remove or protect items such as hardware, hardware accessories, plates, lighting fixtures and similar items placed prior to painting. Reposition or remove protection upon completion of each space. Have equipment disconnected adjacent to walls by workmen skilled in these trades to permit painting of wall surfaces; replace and reconnect after completion of painting. D. Maintain wrappings or other factory‐applied protection furnished with finish hardware or other items provided by other trades and installed in areas where painting is required, and if displaced or removed, replace for the duration of painting work. PART 2 ‐ PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS Except as otherwise indicated, paint systems are specified using a generic description and a specific product of Benjamin Moore & Company; equivalent products of the following manufacturers will be acceptable at the sole judgement of the Designer. A. Glidden Coatings and Resins B. PPG Industries C. Pratt and Lambert D. Sherwin Williams Company Painting
09900-3
2.02 COLORS AND FINISHES A. On the Drawings, the designations indicate the following paints: See Contract Drawings for specifications. B. Color Pigments: Pure, non‐fading, applicable types to suit substrates and service indicated. Lead content in pigment, if any, is limited to contain not more than 0.5% lead, as lead metal based on the total non‐volatile (dry‐film) of paint by weight. C. Gloss Ratings: Specular gloss of finished surfaces shall be within the following ranges when measured at 60o in accordance with ASTM D523. Gloss Units Degree of Gloss Flat Below 5 Eggshell 5 to 15 Semi‐Gloss 50 to 60 D. Paint Coordination: Provide finish coats which are compatible with primer paints used. Review other sections of these specifications in which primer paints are to be provided to ensure compatibility of total coatings system for various substrates. Upon request from other trades, furnish information on characteristics of finish materials proposed for use, to ensure that compatible primer coats are used. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and re‐prime, as required. Notify Designer in writing of any anticipated problems using specified coating systems with substrates primed by others. 2.03 MATERIAL QUALITY A. Provide best quality grade of various types of coatings as regularly manufactured by acceptable paint materials manufacturers. Materials not displaying manufacturer's identification as a standard, best‐grade product will not be acceptable. B. Provide undercoat paint produced by same manufacturer as finish coats. Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer and use only within recommended limits. C. Where indicated and in locations where ambient temperature‐ humidity conditions encourage the ready formation of mildew, use paints with additional mildew inhibitive agent incorporated during the manufacturing process, of type and in concentration recommended by the paint manufacturer to withstand such mildew formation. 2.04 INTERIOR PAINT SYSTEMS A. Provide the following paint systems for various substrates as indicated. B. Painted Wood: Semi‐Gloss Finish 1st Coat Interior Enamel Undercoat Moore's Alkyd Enamel Underbody 2nd and 3rd Coats Odorless Interior Semi‐Gloss Enamel Painting
09900-4
* * Moore's Alkyd Dulamel Enamel C. Gypsum Board Walls: Eggshell Finish 1st Coat Interior Latex‐Base Primer Coat Moore's Latex Quick‐Dry Prime Seal 2nd and 3rd Coats Interior Eggshell Latex‐Base Paint Moore's Latex Regal AquaVelvet D. Drywall Ceilings: 1st Coat Interior Latex‐Base Primer Coat Moore's Latex Quick‐Dry Prime Seal 2nd and 3rd Coats Interior Flat Latex‐Base Paint Moore's Regal Wall Satin E. Concrete Ceilings and Exterior Walls: Flat Finish 1st Coat Exterior Alkyd Oil Base Primer Coat Moore's Latex Quick‐Dry Prime Seal 2nd and 3rd Coats Exterior Flat Latex‐Base Paint Moore's Regal Wall Satin F. Hollow Metal Doors, Frames and Convectors: Semi‐Gloss Finish 1st Coat Base Primer Iron‐Clad Retardo Rust Inhibitive Primer 2nd Coat Interior Enamel Undercoat Moore's Alkyd Enamel Underbody 3rd Coat Odorless Interior Semi‐Gloss Enamel Moore's Alkyd Dulamel Enamel Flat Finish NOTE: All exterior walls and/or concrete slab ceilings which are to be painted are to be scraped, chemically washed, and painted per the schedule above. PART 3 ‐ EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Examine areas and conditions under which painting work is to be applied for conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Starting of painting work will be construed as acceptance of surfaces and conditions within any particular area. C. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces or conditions otherwise detrimental to the formation of a durable paint film. 3.02 SURFACE PREPARATION Painting
09900-5
A. Perform preparation and cleaning procedures in accordance with paint manufacturer's instructions and as herein specified, for each particular substrate condition. B. Remove hardware, hardware accessories, machined surfaces, plates, lighting fixtures and similar items in place and not to be finish‐painted or provide surface‐applied protection prior to surface preparation and painting operations. Remove, if necessary, for complete painting of items and adjacent surfaces. Following completion of painting of each space or area, reinstall removed items. C. Clean surfaces to be painted before applying paint or surface treatments. Remove oil and grease prior to mechanical cleaning. Schedule cleaning and painting so that contaminants from cleaning process will not fall onto wet, newly painted surfaces. D. Wood 1. Clean wood surfaces to be painted of dirt, oil or other foreign substances with scrapers, mineral spirits and sandpaper, as required. Sandpaper smooth those finished surfaces exposed to view and dust off. Scrape and clean small, dry, seasoned knots and apply a thin coat of white shellac or other recommended knot sealer before application of priming coat. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sandpaper smooth when dried. 2. Prime, stain or seal wood required to be job‐painted immediately upon delivery to job. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides and backsides of such wood. E. Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 1. Clean ferrous surfaces, which are not galvanized or shop‐coated of oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale and other foreign substances by solvent or mechanical cleaning. 2. Touch‐up shop‐applied prime coats wherever damaged or bare, as required by other sections of these specifications. Clean and touch‐up with the same type of shop primer. F. Gypsum Drywall: Repair minor cracks and holes with finishing compound and sand smooth after drying. 3.03 A. Mix and prepare painting materials in accordance with the manufacturer's directions. B. Store materials not in actual use in tightly covered containers. Maintain containers used in storage, mixing and application of paint in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. C. Stir materials before application to produce a mixture of uniform density and stir as required during application. Do not stir surface film into material. Remove film and, if necessary, strain material before using. 3.04 MATERIALS PREPARATION APPLICATION Painting
09900-6
A. General 1. Apply paint in accordance with manufacturer's directions. Use applicators and techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied. 2. Apply additional coats when undercoats, stains or other conditions show through final coat of paint, until paint film is of uniform finish, color and appearance. Give special attention to ensure that surfaces, including edges, corners, crevices, welds and exposed fasteners receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces. 3. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similarly exposed surfaces. Paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only before final installation of equipment. 4. Paint interior surfaces of ducts, where visible through registers or grilles, with a flat, non‐specular black paint. 5. Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match exposed surfaces. 6. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel coat. 7. Omit first coat (primer) on metal surfaces which have been shop‐primed and touch‐up painted, unless otherwise indicated. B. Scheduling Painting 1. Apply first‐coat material to surfaces that have been cleaned, pre‐treated or otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practical after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration. 2. Allow sufficient time between successive coatings to permit proper drying. Do not re‐coat until paint has dried to where it feels firm, does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure and application of another coat of paint will not cause lifting or loss of adhesion of the undercoat. C. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply materials at not less than manufacturer's recommended spreading rate, to establish a total dry film thickness as indicated or, if not indicated, as recommended by coating manufacturer. D. Primer Coats 1. Apply primer coat of material which is required to be painted or finished and which has not been prime coated by others. 2. Re‐coat primed and sealed surfaces where there is evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat, to ensure a finish coat with no burn‐through or other defects due to insufficient sealing. E. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover to provide an opaque, smooth surface of Painting
09900-7
uniform finish, color, appearance and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness or other surface imperfections will not be acceptable. 3.05 F. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture and coverage. Remove, refinish or repaint work not in compliance with specified requirements. CLEAN‐UP AND PROTECTION A. Clean‐Up 1. During progress of work, remove from site discarded paint materials, rubbish, cans and rags at end of each work day. 2. Upon completion of painting work, clean window glass and other paint‐spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paint by proper methods of washing and scraping, using care not to scratch or otherwise damage finished surfaces. B. Protection 1. Protect work of other trades, whether to be painted or not, against damage by painting and finishing work. Correct any damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing and repainting, as acceptable to Designer. 2. Provide "Wet Paint" signs, as required to indicate newly‐painted finishes. Remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others for protection of their work after completion of painting operations. 3. At the completion of work of other trades, touch‐up and restore all damaged or defaced painted surfaces. END OF SECTION Painting
09900-8
SECTION 09950 ‐ WALLCOVERING PART 1 ‐ GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY OF WORK A. The Work of this Section includes, but is not necessarily limited to, the following: 1. Fabric wallcovering 2. Vinyl wallcovering 3. Release coat on gypsum drywall substrate B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere 1. Painting ‐ See Section 09900. 2. Gypsum Drywall ‐ See Section 09250. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: Provide each type of wallcovering as produced by a single manufacturer, including recommended primers, adhesives and sealants. B. Installer: A firm specializing in wallcovering work with not less than three (3) years' experience in installing wallcoverings similar to those required for this Project. C. Test Panels: Install one (1) test panel [three (3) rolls wide] of full useable width of each type of wallcovering, including one corner, in areas designated by Designer. Replace test panels which are not acceptable to Designer until satisfactory installation is achieved. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data and installation instructions for each type of wallcovering and installation material. B. Samples: Submit full width samples of each type of wallcovering, illustrating range of color and pattern variation. Submit samples of each dye lot prior to shipment of wallcovering. C. Maintenance Instructions: Submit manufacturer's printed instructions for maintenance of installed work, including precautions for use of cleaning materials which could damage wallcovering. 1.04 DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE A. Comply with instructions and recommendations of manufacturer and as herein specified. Wallcovering
09950-1
B. Deliver materials to project site in original packages or containers clearly labeled to identify manufacturer, brand name, quality or grade and fire hazard classification. C. Store materials in original undamaged packages or containers. Do not store rolled goods in upright position. Maintain temperature in storage area above 40oF. 1.05 JOB CONDITIONS Maintain constant minimum temperature of 60oF at areas of installation for at least 72 hours before and 48 hours after application of materials. PART 2 ‐ PRODUCTS 2.01 WALLCOVERING A. Wallcoverings: Provide the following types where indicated: See Contract Drawings for Specifications. B. Match control samples on file in the Designer's office. 2.02 ACCESSORY ITEMS A. Adhesives: Provide manufacturer's recommended adhesive, primer and sealer, produced expressly for use with selected wallcovering on substrate as shown on drawings. Provide materials which are mildew‐resistant and nonstaining to wallcovering. B. Release Coat: Oil base sealer or enamel undercoater of type recommended by wallcovering manufacturer for drywall substrates. PART 3 ‐ EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Acclimatize wallcovering materials by removing from packaging in area of installation not less than 24 hours before application. B. Remove switchplates, wall plates and surface‐mounted fixtures in areas where wallcovering is to be applied. C. Prime and seal substrates in accordance with wallcovering manufacturer's recommendations for type of substrate. Apply release coat to gypsum drywall which will permit subsequent removal of wallcovering without damage to paper facing. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Hang wallcoverings according to the manufacturer's directions. Place wallcovering panels consecutively in order cut from rolls, including filling of spaces above or below openings. Hang wallcovering by reversing alternate strips unless recommended otherwise by the wallcovering manufacturer. Use wallcovering from the same dye lot in the same space and where contiguous with adjoining, abutting wallcovering. Wallcovering
09950-2
3.03 B. Apply adhesive to back of wallcovering and place in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Install seams plumb and at least 6" away from corners. Horizontal seams are not permitted. Remove air bubbles, wrinkles, blisters and other defects. Cut wallcovering evenly to edges of wall penetrations. C. Trim selvage before installation. D. Keep face of wallcovering free of adhesive. ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING A. Replace removed plates and fixtures and verify cut edges of wallcovering have been completely concealed. B. Remove surplus materials, rubbish and debris resulting from wallcovering installation upon completion of work and leave areas of installation in neat, clean condition. END OF SECTION Wallcovering
09950-3
SECTION 10 2219 ‐ DEMOUNTABLE PARTITIONS ‐ MODERNUS LAMA SYSTEM PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01
UMMARY OF WORK A. The Work of this Section includes, but is not limited to, the following: 1. Demountable partition systems 2. Doors. 3. Glazed panels. B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere 1. Division 01: Administrative, procedural, and temporary work requirements. 2. Section 08 1416 ‐ Flush Wood Doors. 3. Section 08 7100 ‐ Door Hardware. 4. Section 08 8000 ‐ Glazing. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. B221 ‐ Standard Specification for Aluminum‐Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wires, Shapes and Tubes. 2. E90 ‐ Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions. 1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Demountable Partition System: 1. Product of manufacturer regularly engaged in Work of this Section. 2. Full‐height, modular partition system for interior use, designed to permit relocation, reconfiguration, and reuse of all parts. 3. Permit installation on top of finished floor using floor track without damage to finished surfaces. B. Standard Modules: 1. Wall panels: i. Wall thickness: ‐ Single Glaze 2‐3/8 inches. ‐ Double Glaze 3‐1/8 inches ii. Panel width: Minimum 6 inches to maximum 48 inches. iii. Top trim height: 1‐1/2 inches. iv. Bottom trim height: 1‐1/2 inches. 2. Sliding doors: i. Frameless ‐ Top rail height: 1‐1/16 inches. ii. Framed ‐ Top rail height: 1‐1/2 inches. ‐ Vertical stile width: 1‐1/2 inches. 3. Pivot doors i. Frameless – Single Glaze ii. Framed Panel ‐ Single Glaze iii. Framed Panel ‐ Double Glaze: + Door Panel Thickness: 3‐1/8 inches iv. Plus or minus 1 inch vertical adjustment. v. 1/4 inch adjustment at sliding glass doors. C. Wood Modules: 1. Panels: i. Single Glaze ‐ Panel thickness: 2‐3/8 inches. ‐ Panel width: Minimum 6 inches to maximum 60 inches. ii. Double Glaze ‐ Panel thickness: 3‐1/8 inches. ‐ Panel width: Minimum 6 inches to maximum 60 inches. 2. Sliding door thickness: 1‐3/4 inches. 3. Swing door module thickness: ‐ Single Glaze 2 3/8 inches ‐ Double Glaze 3 1/8 inches 4. Plus or minus 1 inch vertical adjustment. 5. 3/8 inch adjustment at sliding panels. 6. Sound Transmission Class: Minimum STC rating of 35, tested to ASTM E90. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals for Review: 1. Shop Drawings: Include panel layout in plan and elevation, opening locations and sizes, relationship to adjacent construction, components, and accessories. 2. Product Data: Provide data on panel system, components, and accessories. 3. Samples: i.. 3 x 3 inch finish samples showing available colors. ii. 12 inch long samples of each framing and trim profile. iii. 12 x 12 inch infill panel samples for each panel type. iv. 12 x 12 inch door samples showing core, edges, and faces. B. Quality Control Submittals: v. Each hardware component. 1. Certify that doors meet requirements of applicable accessibility code. C. Closeout Submittals: 1. Operation and Maintenance Data. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: 1. Minimum 2 years documented experience in work of this Section. 2. Approved by partition system manufacturer. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Do not begin installation until building is weather tight and environmental conditions in building are approximately equivalent to those that will exist after installation. 1.7 WARRANTIES A. Provide manufacturer’s 2 year warranty providing coverage against defects in materials and workmanship. PART 2 ‐ PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Contract Documents are based on Lama by Modernus. (www.modernus.com) B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 01. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B221, alloy and temper best suited to application. B. Hardware: Specified in Section 08 7100. C. Glass: 1. Minimum 3/8 inch thick clear tempered; specified in Section 08 8000. 2. Glazing method: Gasket. D. Wood Veneer: Refer to Schedule of Finishes/Equipment. A. Refer to Schedule of Finishes/Equipment. PART 3 ‐ EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install partition system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and approved Shop Drawings. B. Set partitions plumb, level, and straight. C. Fit components to adjacent construction. D. Assemble components rigid, with tight joints. E. Conceal fasteners from view. F. Install doors plumb and level. 3.2 ADJUSTING A. Touch up minor scratches to match factory finish. B. Adjust doors to operate smoothly. 3.3 DEMONSTRATION A. Demonstrate proper dismantling, relocation, and reinstallation of all system components to Owner. END OF SECTION SECTION 10270 ‐ ACCESS FLOORING PART 1 ‐ GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY OF WORK A. The Work of this Section includes, but is not necessarily limited to, the following: 1. Access flooring 2. Stairs 3. Railings 4. Ramps (removable) B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere 1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Provide standard access flooring system which, when installed, complies with the following minimum requirements for structural performance. Floor Panels: Units, including those with cutouts, capable of supporting design loads of type and magnitude indicated below: A. Concentrated loads: 1,250 lbf. B. Rolling loads: 600 lbf. C. Pedestals: Pedestal assemblies capable of withstanding an axial loading of 5,000 lbs. per pedestal, without panels or other supports in place. D. Understructures: Manufacturer's standard stringers. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data for each type of access flooring product. B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing complete layout of access flooring based on field verified dimensions; include dimensional relationships to adjoining work installation tolerances. Include full details, with descriptive notes indicating materials, finishes, fasteners, typical and special edge conditions, accessories, understructure and other data to permit a full evaluation of entire access flooring system. C. Samples: Submit samples of each exposed metal finish and each type and color of floor covering necessary. Access Flooring
10270-1
1.04 A. NFPA Standard: Provide access flooring complying with NFPA 75 requirements for raised flooring and with BS&A or MEA for use in New York City. B. Coordination of Work: Coordinate location of access flooring pedestals to prevent interference with mechanical and electrical work in underfloor cavity. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Mark pedestal locations on concrete subfloor so that mechanical and electrical work can take place without interfering with installation of pedestals. B. Do not proceed with installation of access flooring until after substantial completion of other performable work within the affected space. 1.06 DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE 1.07 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS PART 2 ‐ PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS/TYPE Subject to compliance with requirements, provide flooring manufactured by Tec‐Cor, C‐TEC Inc. or approved equal. 2.02 FLOOR PANELS A. Provide modular standard field panels of size and construction indicated which are interchangeable with other standard field panels, easily placed and removed without disturbing adjacent panels or understructure by one person using a portable lifting device, free of exposed metal edges in installed position with floor covering in place. B. Nominal Panel Size: 24" x 24" unless otherwise shown. C. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate panels to the following tolerances with squareness tolerances expressed as the difference between diagonal measurements from corner to corner: 1. Size and Squareness: + 0.015" of required size, with a squareness tolerance of + 0.015", unless tolerances are otherwise indicated for a specific panel type. 2. Flatness: + 0.020" measured on a diagonal on top of panel. 3. Size and Squareness of Die‐Cast Aluminum Panels: + 0.0025" of required size, with a squareness tolerance of + 0.0035". Access Flooring
10270-2
2.03 4. Steel‐Covered Wood Core Panels: Manufacturer's standard panel construction with 1" thick high‐density particleboard core laminated to top and bottom face sheets of zinc‐coated sheet steel. FLOOR PANEL COVERING A. General: Cover tops of floor panels to comply with requirements indicated for color, pattern and material. B. Colors and Patterns: Match Designer's samples. C. Plastic Laminate: NEMA LD‐3, high wear‐type, of grade indicated below; fabricated in one piece to cover each panel face within perimeter plastic edging. D. Plastic Edging: Manufacturer's standard plastic edge trim applied by manufacturer's standard method either mechanically or adhesively or both to perimeter of each panel, of size and profile to suit floor covering selected, unless otherwise indicated. 2.04 UNDERSTRUCTURE A. Pedestals: Provide manufacturer's standard pedestal assembly including base, column with provisions for height adjustment, and head (cap); made either of steel or aluminum or a combination of both. 1. Base: Square or circular base with not less than 16 in.2 of bearing area. 2. Provide vibration proof mechanism for making and holding fine adjustments in height for leveling purposes over a range of not less than 2". Include means of locking leveling mechanism at a selected height, which requires deliberate action to change height setting and prevents vibratory displacement. 3. Fabricate units of sufficient height to provide required underfloor clearance. Head of type designed to support understructure system indicated. 4. B. Stringer System: Manufacturer's standard steel modular stringer system, designed and fabricated to interlock with pedestal head and to form a grid pattern with members under each edge of each floor panel and with a pedestal under each corner of each floor panel. Protect steel components against corrosion with manufacturer's standard galvanized or paint finish. Provide stringers which support each edge of each panel where required to meet design load criteria. 2.05 A. Colors and Finishes: For exposed accessories available in more than one standard color or finish, provide color or finish selected by Designer. B. Cutouts: Fabricate cutouts in floor panels to accommodate cable penetrations and service ACCESSORIES Access Flooring
10270-3
outlets, if any. Comply with requirements indicated for size, shape, number and location. Provide reinforcement or additional support, if needed, to make panels with cutouts comply with standard performance requirements. 1. Fit cutouts with manufacturer's standard grommets in sizes indicated or, where size of cutouts exceed maximum grommet size available, trim edge of cutouts with manufacturer's standard plastic molding having tapered top flange. Furnish removable covers for grommets. 2. Include the cost for providing the following cutouts: a. 5 cutouts ‐ 12" x 6" b. 15 cutouts ‐ 3" x 5" C. Service Outlets: Manufacturer's standard UL listed and labeled assemblies, for recessed mounting flush with top of floor panels, designed and fabricated to accommodate power, communication and signal cables and complying with the following requirements: 1. Location: Locate outlets in center of panels. 2. Receptacles and Wiring: Electrical receptacles and wiring for service outlets are specified in Division 16. 3. Railings: Manufacturer's standard satin‐finish extruded aluminum post and rail‐type railings, at ramps and open‐sided perimeter of access flooring where indicated. Include handrail, intermediate rails, posts, brackets, end caps, wall returns, wall and floor flanges, plates and anchorages where required. 4. Steps: Provide steps of size and arrangement indicated with floor covering to match access flooring. Apply non‐slip aluminum nosings to step treads unless otherwise shown. 5. Panel Lifting Device: Manufacturer's standard portable lifting device of type and number required for lifting panels with floor covering provided. 6. Perimeter Support: Where indicated, provide manufacturer's standard aluminum extrusions to support panel edge and form transition between access flooring and adjoining floor covering at same level as ramp flooring. 7. Provide removable ramp (1:12) slope with non‐skid surface. PART 3 ‐ EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Take field measurements prior to preparation of shop drawings and fabrication to ensure proper fitting of work. Indicate final measurements on shop drawings. Access Flooring
10270-4
3.02 B. Locate each pedestal and complete any necessary subfloor preparation and vacuum clean the subfloor of all dust, dirt and construction debris before starting installation. INSTALLATION A. Install floor system and accessories under supervision of the manufacturer's authorized representative to ensure rigid, firm installation free of vibration, rocking, rattles, squeaks and other unacceptable performance. B. Lay out floor panel installation to keep the number of cut panels at the floor perimeter to a minimum. Scribe panel assemblies at perimeter to provide a close fit with no voids greater than 1/8" where panels abut vertical surfaces. C. Secure grid members to pedestal heads in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. D. Thoroughly vacuum clean the subfloor areas as installation of floor panels proceeds. Extend cleaning under installed panels as far as possible. E. Cutting and trimming or other dirt or debris producing operations will not be permitted in the rooms where floors are being installed. F. Level installed access floor to within 0.10" of true level over the entire area and within 0.0625" in any 10'‐0" distance. 3.03 A. After completion of installation, vacuum clean the entire floor system and cover with continuous sheets of reinforced paper or plastic. Maintain and repair damages to protective covering until directed to be removed by the Designer. B. Replace access floor panels which are chipped, broken, stained, scratched or otherwise damaged, or do not conform to specified requirements. CLEANING, PROTECTION AND FINAL ADJUSTMENTS END OF SECTION Access Flooring
10270-5
SECTION 10800 ‐ TOILET ACCESSORIES PART 1 ‐ GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY OF WORK A. The Work of this Section includes, but is not necessarily limited to, the following: 1.
Toilet accessories 2.
Toilet partitions B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere 1. Tile 2. Fixtures and faucets 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Accessory Locations: Coordinate accessory locations with other works to avoid interference and to ensure proper operation and servicing of accessory units. B. Products: Provide products of same manufacturer for each type of accessory unit. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data and installation instructions for each accessory. B. Samples: If required, submit full‐size samples of units to Designer for review of design and operation. Acceptable samples will be returned and may be used in the work. C. Setting Drawings: Provide setting drawings, templates, instructions and directions for installation of anchorage devices in other work. 1.04 DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE PART 2 ‐ PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS/TYPE Drawings and specifications are based upon the particular products of the manufacturers indicated. Equal products of other manufacturers will be acceptable provided they comply with the indicated requirements. Submit information on alternate products to the Designer for approval. 2.02 MATERIALS ‐ GENERAL A. Stainless Steel: AISI Type 302/304 with polished No. 4 finish, 22 gauge minimum, unless other indicated. Toilet Accessories
10800-1
2.03 B. Brass: Leaded and unleaded, flat products, FS QQ‐B‐613; rods, shapes, forgings and flat products with finished edges, FS QQ‐B‐626. C. Chromium Plating: Nickel and chromium electro‐deposited on base metal, ASTM B456, type SC2. D. Galvanized Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A386, hot‐dip galvanized after fabrication. E. Fasteners: Screws, bolts and other devices of same material as accessory unit or of galvanized steel where concealed. FABRICATION A. General: Stamped names or labels on exposed faces of accessory units are not permitted, unobtrusive labels on surfaces not exposed to view are acceptable. B. Surface‐Mounted Toilet Accessories: Except where otherwise indicated, fabricate units with tight seams and joints exposed, edges rolled. Provide concealed anchorage wherever possible. C. Recessed Toilet Accessories: Except where otherwise indicated, fabricate units of all welded construction without mitered corners. Hang doors and access panels with full‐length stainless steel piano hinge. Provide anchorage which is fully concealed when unit is closed. 2.04 SCHEDULE OF ACCESSORIES See Contract Drawings for specifications. PART 3 ‐ EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION Install accessory units in accordance with manufacturers' instructions, using fasteners which are appropriate to substrate and recommended by manufacturer of unit. Install units plumb and level, firmly anchored in locations and at height indicated. 3.02 ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING A. Adjust accessories for proper operation and verify that mechanisms function smoothly. Replace damaged or defective items. B. Clean and polish all exposed surfaces after removing labels and protective coatings. END OF SECTION Toilet Accessories
10800-2
SECTION 11450 ‐ PANTRY EQUIPMENT PART 1 ‐ GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY OF WORK A. The work of this Section includes, but is not limited to, the following: 1. Sink 2. Refrigerator 3. Microwave B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere Electrical services and connections ‐ See Division 16. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE Verify existing conditions including sizes and types of connections necessary for proper relocation of existing kitchen equipment. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions as well as operating and maintenance instructions. B. Warranty: Submit manufacturer's standard written warranty for each item of equipment. 1.04 DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE PART 2 ‐ PRODUCTS 2.01 See drawings for pantry specification PART 3 ‐ EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. B. Place new and relocated units in final location after finishes have been completed in each area. Verify that clearances are adequate for proper operation of equipment. C. Refer to Division 16 for electrical requirements. 3.02 ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING Pantry Equipment
11450-1
A. Test each item of pantry equipment to verify proper operation. Make necessary adjustments. B. Verify that required accessory items have been furnished and properly installed. C. Leave units in clean condition, ready for operation. END OF SECTION Pantry Equipment
11450-2
SECTION 11900 ‐ MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES PART 1 ‐ GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY OF WORK A. The Work of this Section, includes but is not necessarily limited to, the following: 1. Project/Visual Board 2. Sol‐R‐Veil Shade B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere Installation of electrical controls ‐ See Division 16. l.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicable trade association names and titles of general standards are referred to by accepted abbreviations. B. Provide electrical equipment with UL labels. l.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications, installation instructions and template drawings. Include wiring diagrams and operating instructions for electrical equipment. B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing adjacent construction and installation details. Locate service connections for electrical equipment. C. Samples: Submit samples of finishes and other items, as requested. 1.04 DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE Deliver products in manufacturers' undamaged protective containers. Store and handle units in accordance with the manufacturers' instructions to avoid damage, soiling and deterioration. Miscellaneous Specialties
11900-1
PART 2 ‐ PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Specified manufacturers and model numbers establish required standards for design, size and quality of the respective items, unless otherwise specified. B. Equivalent items by other qualified manufacturers will be acceptable, subject to compliance with specified requirements. Submit alternates to Designer for approval. 2.02 WALL MOUNTED PROJECTION/VISUAL BOARDS A. Manufacturer: TBD B. Model No.: TBD C. Size: TBD 2.05 SOL‐R‐VEIL SHADES A. Manufacturer: See Drawings B. Color: See Drawings C. Style: D. Model No.: PART 3 ‐ EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Examine the adjoining construction and the conditions under which the Work is to be installed. Proceed with the Work after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Provide information and service as necessary for the proper coordination of other work with the Work of this Section. 3.02 INSTALLATION Install miscellaneous specialties to comply with the manufacturers' instructions and final shop drawings. Provide accessories, anchors and other items required for proper installation and attachment to adjoining construction. 3.03 ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING A. Upon completion of installation, including work of other trades, lubricate, test and adjust operable equipment to operate easily and in compliance with manufacturers' specifications. Miscellaneous Specialties
11900-2
B. Clean exposed and semi‐exposed surfaces of installed equipment. Touch‐up shop applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas. END OF SECTION Miscellaneous Specialties
11900-3